2017 Nissan Pathfinder | Owner's Manual USA

User Manual: 2017-pathfinder

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 555 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2017 Nissan Pathfinder Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM17EA 0R52U0
Table of Contents

2017 PATHFINDER

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

2017 NISSAN PATHFINDER R52-D

R52-D

Printing : June 2016 (10)

Publication No.: OM1E 0R51U0

Printed in U.S.A.

OM17EA 0R52U0

2571558-EN-Pathfinder-OM-Cover.indd 1 5/28/16 6:31 PM

46231 2c Cover Tweddle Group • PDF Supplied 6/8/2016 Black + PMS 200

GRACOL PROOF on PRODUCTION PAPER

Back Cover

Front Cover

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN

owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with

confidence. It was produced using the latest

techniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-

stand the operation and maintenance of your

vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-

ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this

manual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Booklet

explains details about the warranties cov-

ering your vehicle. The “Maintenance and

schedules” section of this manual explains

details about maintaining and servicing

your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Cus-

tomer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only)

will explain how to resolve any concerns

you may have with your vehicle, and clarify

your rights under your state’s lemon law.

When you require any service or have any ques-

tions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you

with the extensive resources available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options, your ve-

hicle may also be equipped with additional ac-

cessories installed prior to delivery. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details

concerning the particular accessories with which

your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures, warnings,

cautions and instructions concerning proper use

of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle

and/or accessory. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your vehicle is

equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-

iarity with controls and maintenance require-

ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your

vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

●NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for conditions.

●

ALWAYS give your full attention to driving

and avoid using vehicle features or taking

other actions that could distract you.

●

ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-

priate child restraint systems. Pre-teen

children should be seated in the rear seat.

●ALWAYS provide information about the

proper use of vehicle safety features to

all occupants of the vehicle.

●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

For descriptions specified for 4-wheel drive

models, a 4WD mark is placed at the beginning

of the applicable sections/items.

As with other vehicles with features for

off-road use, failure to operate 4-wheel

drive models correctly may result in loss of

control or an accident. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIV-

ING

This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger

car because it has a higher center of

gravity for off-road use. As with other

vehicles with features of this type, fail-

ure to operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or an accident.

For additional information, refer to “On-

pavement and off-road driving

precautions”, “Avoiding collision and

rollover” and “Driving safety precau-

tions” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety or durability and may

even violate governmental regulations. In

addition, damage or performance prob-

lems resulting from modifications may

not be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diag-

nostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the

port during normal driving, for example

remote insurance company monitoring,

remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or

engine reprogramming, may cause inter-

ference or damage to vehicle systems. We

do not recommend or endorse the use of

any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, un-

less specifically approved by NISSAN. The

vehicle warranty may not cover damage

caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all features

and equipment available on this model. Features

and equipment in your vehicle may vary depend-

ing on model, trim level, options selected, order,

date of production, region or availability. There-

fore, you may find information about features or

equipment that are not included or installed on

your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations in

this manual are those in effect at the time of

printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change

specifications, performance, design or compo-

nent suppliers without notice and without obliga-

tion. From time to time, NISSAN may update or

revise this manual to provide Owners with the

most accurate information currently available.

Please carefully read and retain with this manual

all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to

ensure you have access to accurate and up-to-

date information regarding your vehicle. Current

versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals and any

updates can also be found in the Owner section

of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide. If you have ques-

tions concerning any information in your Owner’s

Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. Re-

fer to NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

page in this Owner’s Manual for contact informa-

tion.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual. They

are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause death or serious

personal injury. To avoid or reduce the

risk, the procedures must be followed

precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of a

hazard that could cause minor or moder-

ate personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-

cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”

or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-

tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the

vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these

call attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or

emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-

tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of component wear

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-

ies, may contain perchlorate material. The

following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate

Material – special handling may apply, See

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/”.

APD1005

The Bluetooth® word

mark and logos are

registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use

of such marks by

DENSO

CORPORATION is

under license. Other

trademarks and trade

names are those of

their respective

owners.

SiriusXM® services

require a subscription

after trial period and

are sold separately or

as a package. The

satellite service is

available only in the

48 contiguous USA

and DC. SiriusXM®

satellite service is

also available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval

system, or transmitted in any form, or by any

means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,

recording or otherwise, without the prior written

permission of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES...

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are

our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSAN

dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to

provide NISSAN directly with comments or

questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free

number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the

following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to the

top of the instrument panel on the driver’s

side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2

Exterior front ......................................0-3

Exterior rear.......................................0-4

Passenger compartment ...........................0-5

Instrument panel...................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations . . ..............0-8

Warning and indicator lights ........................0-9

1. Folding 3rd row bench (P. 1-2)

2. Folding 2nd row bench (P. 1-2)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-49)

4. Head restraints/headrests (P.1-12)

5. Seat belts with pretensioner(s) and

shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-17, 1-49)

6. Supplemental air bags (P.1-49)

7. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P. 1-49)

8. Seats (P. 1-2)

9. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-49)

10. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-27)

11. Second row seat top tether strap an-

chor (located on bottom of seatback)

(P. 1-27)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2466

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Front view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-27)

2. Engine hood (P. 3-21)

3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-33)

4. Windshield-washer fluid (P. 8-11)

5. Power windows (P. 2-58)

6. Door locks (P. 3-5)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-7)

Keys (P. 3-2)

7. Mirrors (P. 3-34)

Side view camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-27)

8. Tire pressure (P. 8-25)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

Tire chains (P. 8-25)

9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-36)

10. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)

Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-36)

Daytime running lights (P. 2-36)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2456

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Antenna*

2. Rear window wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-33)

3. Liftgate release (P. 3-22)

Rearview camera (P. 4-20, 4-27)

4. Rear sonar sensors (if so equipped)

(P. 5-73)

5. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-22)

6. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-29)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

Fuel-filler door (P. 3-29)

7. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-5)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2474

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Glove box (P. 2-51)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-33)

3. Map lights (P. 2-62)

4. Power moonroof (if so equipped)

(P. 2-60)

5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-51)

6. Cup holders (P. 2-51)

7. Console box (P. 2-51)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LII2458

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Vents (P. 4-46)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-36)

3. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-36)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-49)

Horn (P. 2-40)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-18)

6. Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-33)

Rear window wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-33)

8. Control panel*

9. Center display*

Navigation system* (if so equipped)

10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-49)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-49)

12. Glove box (P. 2-51)

13. Automatic heater and air conditioning

controls (P. 4-47)

14. Audio system controls*

15. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

16. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)

LII2409

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

17. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-38)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-40)

18. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-32)

19. Control panel and vehicle information

display switches (P. 2-19)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System*

20. Hood release (P. 3-21)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-44)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-46)

Power liftgate main switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-22)

Warning systems switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-46)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-44)

Power inverter switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-47)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

renthesis for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

VQ35DD engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-9)

2. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4)

3. Drive belt location (P.8-13)

4. Fuse box (P. 8-19)

5. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-6)

6. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-10)

7. Air cleaner (P. 8-15)

8. Fuse box (P. 8-19)

9. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-19)

10. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-19)

11. Battery (P. 8-11)

12. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-6)

13. Radiator cap (P. 8-4)

14. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

rentheses for operating details.

LDI3012

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS) warn-

ing light

2-11

Brake warning light 2-11

Charge warning

light

2-12

Forward Emergency

Braking (FEB) sys-

tem warning light (if

so equipped)

2-12

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-12

Master warning light 2-14

Warning

light

Name Page

Power steering

warning light

2-14

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-14

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-15

Indicator

light

Name Page

Front fog light indi-

cator light (if so

equipped)

2-15

Front passenger air

bag status light

2-15

High beam indicator

light (blue)

2-15

Hill descent control

system ON indicator

light (if so equipped)

2-15

Indicator

light

Name Page

Malfunction Indica-

tor Light (MIL)

2-16

Overdrive OFF indi-

cator light

2-16

Security indicator

light

2-16

Side light and head-

light indicator light

(green)

2-17

Slip indicator light 2-17

TOW mode ON in-

dicator light

2-17

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

2-17

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-17

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

MEMO

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats ............................................1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-5

2nd row bench seat adjustment ..................1-7

3rd row bench seat adjustment ..................1-9

Armrests .....................................1-10

Flexible seating................................1-10

Head restraints/headrests .........................1-12

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ..................................1-13

Non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

components ..................................1-13

Remove ......................................1-14

Removable (without Dual head restraint/

headrest DVD system only) .....................1-14

Install ........................................1-15

Adjust........................................1-15

Folding head restraint/headrest .................1-16

Seat belts .......................................1-17

Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-17

Seat belt warning light .........................1-20

Pregnant women ..............................1-20

Injured persons................................1-20

Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-20

Seat belt extenders ............................1-24

Seat belt maintenance .........................1-24

Child safety ......................................1-25

Infants........................................1-26

Small children.................................1-26

Larger children ................................1-26

Child restraints ...................................1-27

Precautions on child restraints ..................1-27

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ..............................1-29

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

LATCH.......................................1-33

Rear-facing child restraint installation using

the seat belts .................................1-34

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH..................................1-37

Forward-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts ............................1-40

Booster seats .................................1-46

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ..............1-49

Precautions on SRS ...........................1-49

Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-66

Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-67

WARNING

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat properly. For

additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this

section.

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls or make the

vehicle move. Unattended children

could become involved in serious

accidents.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

●Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given to

vehicle operation. The seat may move

suddenly and could cause loss of con-

trol of the vehicle.

●The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort. Seat

belts are most effective when the pas-

senger sits well back and straight up in

the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the

risk of sliding under the lap belt and

being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For

additional information about adjusting the seats,

refer to the steps outlined in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you

slide the seat forward or backward to the desired

position. Release the bar to lock the seat in

position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean

back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever

up and lean your body forward. Release the lever

to lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2160 LRS2161

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust

the seat height until the desired position is

achieved.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable

lower back support to the driver. Move the lever

up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.

LRS2202 LRS2132

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(if so equipped)

Operating tips

●The power seat motor has an auto-reset

overload protection circuit. If the motor

stops during operation, wait 30 seconds

then reactivate the switch.

●Do not operate the power seat switch for a

long period of time when the engine is off.

This will discharge the battery.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slide

the seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-

sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback

forward again, move the switch forward and

move your body forward. The seatback will move

forward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of the

seatback for occupants of different sizes for

added comfort and to help obtain proper seat

belt fit. For additional information, refer to “Pre-

cautions on seat belt usage” in this section. Also,

the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants

to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in P (Park).

LRS2662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Push the front or rear end of the switch up or

down to adjust the angle and height of the seat

cushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides adjustable

lower back support to the driver. Move the lever

up or down (manual) or push the front or back

end of the switch (power) to adjust the seat

lumbar area.

LRS2636

Manual (if so equipped)

LRS2132

Power (if so equipped)

LRS2270

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2ND ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar 䊊

1up and hold it while

you slide the seat forward or backward to the

desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat

in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the lever 䊊

and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull

the lever 䊊

2up and lean your body forward.

Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-

back for occupants of different sizes for added

comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For

additional information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seat-

back can be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is

in P (Park).

WARNING

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat and adjust the seat

belt properly. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt

usage” in this section.

One touch walk-in function

The 3rd row can be accessed from outside the

vehicle by using the seatback release lever lo-

cated on the upper outboard side of the seatback

on the 2nd row bench seat. If a child safety seat is

installed on the passenger’s side of the 2nd row

seat, the 3rd row can be accessed without re-

moving the child safety seat.

Outboard seats

LRS2143 LRS2142

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

Multi-mode

WARNING

When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and seat-

back are locked properly.

CAUTION

●Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot

or bump your head when operating the

walk-in seat.

●Do not drive with the 2nd row seat

tipped up.

●Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat

to pinch, hit any part of your body or

other people when operating the 2nd

row seat. Make sure the seat path is

clear of all objects before moving the

seat.

To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift

up on the seatback lever located on the upper

outboard side of the seatback on the 2nd row

bench seat. This will release the back of the seat

and fold up the seat cushion. This will also re-

lease the seat tracks so you will be able to slide

the seat forward or backward.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to the 3rd

row.

To return the seat to a locked position, push the

upper seatback rearward until the seatback and

tracks are locked. Push the seat cushion down.

Child seat access mode

The passenger’s side of the 2nd row seat can be

slid forward for easy entry or exit from the 3rd row

bench seat without a child safety seat being

removed.

To enter the 3rd row from outside the vehicle, lift

up on the seatback lever located on the upper

outboard side of the seatback on the 2nd row

bench seat. This will release the seatback. Then

tilt the seat and release the tracks so you will be

able to slide the seat forward or backward.

Slide the entire seat forward for access to the

rear seats.

To return the seat to a locked position, push the

upper seatback rearward until the seatback and

track are locked.

WARNING

●Do not leave a child in the child safety

seat when operating the child seat ac-

cess mode.

●When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and seat-

back are locked properly.

CAUTION

●Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot

or bump your head when operating the

walk-in seat.

●Do not drive with the 2nd row seat

tipped up.

●Be careful not to allow the 2nd row seat

to pinch, hit any part of your body or

other people when operating the 2nd

row seat. Make sure the seat path is

clear of all objects before moving the

seat.

Exiting the 3rd row

To exit the 3rd row from either seating position, lift

the upper seatback release lever to the upper-

most position. This will release the back of the

seat, then fold the seat cushion up and release

the tracks.

Slide the entire seat forward.

To return the seat to a locked position, push the

upper seatback rearward until the seatback and

track are locked.

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

When returning the seat to its original

position, confirm that the seat and seat-

back are locked properly.

CAUTION

Be careful not to pinch your hand or foot

or bump your head when operating the

walk-in seat.

3RD ROW BENCH SEAT

ADJUSTMENT

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull up on the latch

located on the outside corner of each seatback.

Lean back until the desired angle is obtained.

To bring the seatback forward again, pull up on

the latch and pull the seatback upright until the

desired angle is obtained.

The recline feature allows adjustment of the seat-

back for occupants of different sizes for added

comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For

additional information, refer to “Precautions on

seat belt usage” in this section. Also, the seat-

back can be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is

in P (Park).

WARNING

●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat

to make sure it is securely locked.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat and adjust the seat

belt properly. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt

usage” in this section.

LRS2147

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

ARMRESTS

The 2nd row bench seat comes equipped with an

armrest. Pull the armrest down until in resting

position.

FLEXIBLE SEATING

WARNING

●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo

area or on the rear seats when they are

in the fold-down position. In a collision,

people riding in these areas without

proper restraints are more likely to be

seriously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. Be sure everyone

in your vehicle is in a seat and using a

seat belt properly.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Do not fold down the rear seats when

occupants are in the rear seat area or

any luggage is on the rear seats.

– Make sure that the seat path is clear

before moving the seat.

– Be careful not to allow hands or feet

to get caught or pinched in the seat.

●Head restraints/headrests should be

adjusted properly as they may provide

significant protection against injury in

an accident. Always replace and adjust

them properly if they have been re-

moved for any reason.

●If the head restraints/headrests are re-

moved for any reason, they should be

securely stored to prevent them from

causing injury to passengers or damage

to the vehicle in case of sudden braking

or an accident.

●When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched posi-

tion. If they are not completely secured,

passengers may be injured in an acci-

dent or sudden stop.

●Properly secure all cargo to help pre-

vent it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seatbacks.

In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured

cargo could cause personal injury.

WRS0167

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Folding the 2nd row bench seat

To fold the 2nd row bench seat flat for maximum

cargo hauling:

1. Make sure that the head restraints are low-

ered or removed. To remove the head

restraint/headrest, push and hold the lock

knob while moving the head

restraint/headrest in an upward direction.

Store the head restraint/headrest properly

so it is not loose in the vehicle.

2. Stow the 2nd row seat belts in the seat belt

hooks found on the sides of the vehicle.

3. Lift up on the recline lever on the side of the

outboard seats to fold the seatbacks flat.

4. To return the 2nd row bench seats to a

seating position, push up on the seatback

until it latches in place.

Folding the 3rd row seats

To fold the 3rd row seats flat for maximum cargo

capacity:

1. Pull the strap 䊊

Ato release the head

restraint/headrest forward.

2. Stow the 3rd row seat belts in the seat belt

hooks 䊊

Dfound on the sides of the cargo

area.

3. Pull up on the latch 䊊

Blocated in the upper

corner of each seatback and lower the seat-

back forward over the seat base.

LRS2144 LRS2737

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

To return the 3rd row seats to a seating position:

1. Use the pull straps 䊊

Cto raise each seat-

back. Pull back until the seatback latches

into position. Make sure to properly raise

each seatback to an upright and se-

cured position.

2. Do not use the pull strap to return the head

restraint/headrest to the upright position.

Pull back on the head restraint/headrest until

it latches in the upright position.

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal

seating position, the head

restraints/headrests must be returned to

the upright position to properly protect

vehicle occupants.

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They may

provide additional protection against in-

jury in certain rear end collisions. Adjust-

able head restraints/headrests must be

adjusted properly, as specified in this sec-

tion. Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach anything

to the head restraint/headrest stalks or

remove the head restraint/headrest. Do

not use the seat if the head

restraint/headrest has been removed. If

the head restraint/headrest was removed,

reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position. Failure to fol-

low these instructions can reduce the ef-

fectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may increase

the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision.

The illustration shows the seating positions

equipped with head restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped with

a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped

with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).

●Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be integrated,

adjustable or non-adjustable.

LRS2308

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Adjustable head restraints/headrests have

multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock

them in a desired adjustment position.

●The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch to

secure them to the seat frame.

●Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the head

restraint/headrest so the center of your

ear is approximately level with the center

of the head restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

●If the head restraint/headrest has been re-

moved, ensure that it is reinstalled and

locked in place before riding in that desig-

nated seating position.

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

LRS2300 LRS2299

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the head

restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the

highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from

the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in

a secure place so it is not loose in the

vehicle.

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant uses

the seating position.

REMOVABLE (without Dual head

restraint/headrest DVD system only)

CAUTION

Do not remove head restraint/headrest

from vehicles equipped with Dual head

restraint/headrest DVD system. Removal

may damage the system wiring.

LRS2302 LRS2302

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with

the holes in the seat. Make sure that the

head restraint/headrest is facing the correct

direction. The stalk with the notch (notches)

䊊

1must be installed in the hole with the lock

knob 䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the

head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/headrest

before an occupant uses the seating posi-

tion.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center

is level with the center of your ears. If your ear

position is still higher than the recommended

alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at

the highest position.

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2303 WRS0134 LRS2351

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

FOLDING HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST

To fold the head restraint/headrest, pull the strap

located on the rear of the head

restraint/headrest.

If the head restraint/headrest has been folded,

make sure that it is returned to the upright position.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is posi-

tioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch

before riding in that designated seating position.

LRS2305 LRS2306 LRS2307

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

When the seat is returned to the normal

seating position, the head

restraint/headrest must be returned to the

upright position to properly protect ve-

hicle occupants.

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-

justed and you are sitting upright and well back in

your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances

of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the

severity of injury may be greatly reduced.

NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your

passengers to buckle up every time you drive,

even if your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories specify that seat belts be worn at

all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be in the rear

seats and in an appropriate restraint.

WARNING

●The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may

reduce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an acci-

dent. Serious injury or death can occur if

the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck. The

belt should be away from your face and

neck, but not falling off your shoulder.

●Position the lap belt as low and snug as

possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE

WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could

increase the risk of internal injuries in

an accident.

●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely

fastened to the proper buckle.

●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

●Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

●Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

●If the seat belt warning light glows con-

tinuously while the ignition is turned

ON with all doors closed and all seat

belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-

function in the system. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●No changes should be made to the seat

belt system. For example, do not modify

the seat belt, add material, or install

devices that may change the seat belt

routing or tension. Doing so may affect

the operation of the seat belt system.

Modifying or tampering with the seat

belt system may result in serious per-

sonal injury.

●Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have ac-

tivated, they cannot be reused and must

be replaced together with the retractor.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

●All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware, should

be inspected after any collision. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. NISSAN recom-

mends that all seat belt assemblies in

use during a collision be replaced un-

less the collision was minor and the

belts show no damage and continue to

operate properly. Seat belt assemblies

not in use during a collision should also

be inspected and replaced if either

damage or improper operation is noted.

●All child restraints and attaching hard-

ware should be inspected after any col-

lision. Always follow the restraint

manufacturer’s inspection instructions

and replacement recommendations.

The child restraints should be replaced

if they are damaged.

SSS0014

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front seats are

equipped with a seat belt warning light. The

warning light, located on the instrument panel,

will show the status of the driver and passenger

seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning light

will not light up if the seat is not occupied.

For additional information, refer to “Warning

lights, indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use

seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and

always position the lap belt as low as possible

around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder

belt over your shoulder and across your chest.

Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-

dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific

recommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons use

seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

●Every person who drives or rides in this

vehicle should use a seat belt at all

times. Children should be in the rear

seats and in an appropriate restraint.

●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and receive

neck or other serious injuries. You

could also slide under the lap belt and

receive serious internal injuries.

●For the most effective protection when

the vehicle is in motion, the seat should

be upright. Always sit well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on the

floor and adjust the seat belt properly.

●Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to

release the child. If the seat belt cannot

be unbuckled or is already unbuckled,

release the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

LRS0786

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional information,

refer to “Seats” in this section.

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2160

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the tongue into the buckle 䊊

Auntil

you hear and feel the latch engage.

●The retractor is designed to lock dur-

ing a sudden stop or on impact. A

slow pulling motion permits the seat

belt to move and allows you some

freedom of movement in the seat.

●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from

its fully retracted position, firmly pull

the belt and release it. Then

smoothly pull the belt out of the re-

tractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and snug

on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the

retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

C. Be sure

the shoulder belt is routed over your shoul-

der and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seating

positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes

of operation:

●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and

retract to allow the driver and passengers some

freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks

the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly

or during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the

seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt

cannot be extended again until the seat belt

tongue is detached from the buckle and fully

retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode

after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this sec-

tion.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During normal

seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode

should not be activated. If it is activated, it

may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-

sion. It can also change the operation of

the front passenger air bag. For additional

information, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certain

that the seatbacks are completely secured

in the latched position. If they are not

completely secured, passengers may be

injured in an accident or sudden stop.

LRS2674 LRS2675

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on the

buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automatically retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt

movement by two separate methods:

●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the

retractor

●When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,

check the operation as follows:

●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward

quickly. The retractor should lock and re-

strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check,

get the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to

learn more about seat belt operation.

䊊

AShoulder belt height adjust button

Shoulder belt height adjustment (front

and 2nd row outboard seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-

justed to the position best for you. For additional

information, refer to “Precautions on seat belt

usage” in this section.

To adjust, push the button and then move the

shoulder belt anchor to the desired position so

that the belt passes over the center of the shoul-

der. The belt should be away from your face and

WRS0139 SSS0896

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

neck, but not falling off of your shoulder. Release

the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WARNING

●After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the shoul-

der belt anchor up and down to make

sure it is securely fixed in position.

●The shoulder belt anchor height should

be adjusted to the position best for you.

Failure to do so may reduce the effec-

tiveness of the entire restraint system

and increase the chance or severity of

injury in an accident.

●The shoulder belt should rest on the

middle of the shoulder. It must not rest

against the neck.

●Be sure that the seat belt is not twisted

in any way.

●Be sure that the shoulder belt anchor is

secured by trying to move the shoulder

belt anchor up and down after

adjustment.

Seat belt hook

When the seat belt is not in use and when folding

down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on

the seat belt hooks.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it is

not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt

and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with

the installed seat belts is available for purchase.

The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and are available for the:

●Driver and front passenger seating position

●2nd and 3rd row seating position

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for assistance with purchasing an extender if an

extender is required.

WARNING

●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made

by the same company which made the

original equipment seat belts, should

be used with NISSAN seat belts.

●Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use could

result in serious personal injury in the

event of an accident.

●Never use seat belt extenders to install

child restraints. If the child restraint is

not secured properly, the child could be

seriously injured or killed in a collision

or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-

mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.

Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat

belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the

seat belts to retract until they are completely

dry.

3rd row shown; 2nd row similar

LRS2157

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat

belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder

belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

●Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such as

buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires

and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,

deterioration, cuts or other damage on the

webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-

sembly should be replaced.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the seat

belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Retrac-

tor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt

becomes wrapped around a child’s neck

with the ALR mode activated, the child can

be seriously injured or killed if the seat

belt retracts and becomes tight. This can

occur even if the vehicle is parked. Un-

buckle the seat belt to release the child. If

the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child by

cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool

(such as a knife or scissors) to release the

seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect them.

They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in this

manual, child safety information is available from

many other sources, including doctors, teachers,

government traffic safety offices, and community

organizations. Every child is different, so be sure

to learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child restraint

systems:

●Rear-facing child restraints

●Forward-facing child restraints

●Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.

Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less

than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing

child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints

are available for children who outgrow rear-

facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.

Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer

use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-

tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit

them properly. The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The lap

belt may not fit over their small hip bones.

In an accident, an improperly fitting seat

belt could cause serious or fatal injury.

Always use appropriate child restraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territo-

ries require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Child restraints” in this section.

CHILD SAFETY

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by

using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle

seat belt. For additional information, refer to

“Child restraints” in this section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear seat.

Studies show that children are safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than in

the front seat.

This is especially important because your

vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-

tem (air bag system) for the front passen-

ger. For additional information, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in

this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed

in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-

mends that infants be placed in child restraints

that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. You should choose a child restraint

that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least

20 lbs (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child

restraint as long as possible up to the height or

weight limit of the child restraint. Children who

outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be

secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a

harness. Refer to the manufacturer’s instructions

for minimum and maximum weight and height rec-

ommendations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that comply

with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You

should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle

and always follow the manufacturer’s instructions

for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness until they reach the maxi-

mum height or weight limit allowed by the child

restraint manufacturer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit

of the harness-equipped forward-facing child re-

straint, NISSAN recommends that the child be

placed in a commercially available booster seat to

obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit

properly, the booster seat should raise the child

so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle portion of

the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross

the neck or face and should not fall off the shoul-

der. The lap belt should lie snugly across the

lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A

booster seat can only be used in seating posi-

tions that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have

a label certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

A booster seat should be used until the child can

pass the seat belt fit test below:

●Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

●Is the child able to sit without slouching?

●Do the child’s knees bend easily over the

front edge of the seat with feet flat on the

floor?

●Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap

belt low and snug across the hips and shoul-

der belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?

●Is the child able to use the properly adjusted

head restraint/headrest?

●Will the child be able to stay in position for

the entire ride?

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

If you answered no to any of these questions, the

child should remain in a booster seat using a

three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow dif-

ferent guidelines. Check local and state

regulations to confirm your child is using

the correct restraint system before travel-

ing.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat

and do not allow a child in the cargo area.

The child could be seriously injured or

killed in a sudden stop or collision.

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used and

installed properly. Always follow all

of the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation and use.

LRS2690 ARS1098

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

– Infants and children should never be

held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-

gest adult cannot resist the forces of

a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both a

child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat. If you

must install a forward-facing child

restraint in the front seat, refer to

“Forward-facing child restraint in-

stallation using the seat belts” in this

section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating air bag could seriously

injure or kill a child. A rear-facing

child restraint must only be used in

the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child restraint

that will fit the child and vehicle.

Some child restraints may not fit

properly in your vehicle.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

age, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

– Never use the anchor points for adult

seat belts or harnesses.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the front

passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child re-

straint while in the vehicle.

●When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, loose objects can injure occupants

or damage the vehicle.

WRS0256

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating sur-

face and buckles before placing a child in

the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal child

restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH

(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-

tem. Some child restraints include rigid or

webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-

nected to these anchors. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Teth-

ers for CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible child

restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints for

infants and children of various sizes. When se-

lecting any child restraint, keep the following

points in mind:

●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying

that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●If the child restraint is compatible with your

vehicle, place your child in the child restraint

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the child restraint is compatible with

your child. Choose a child restraint that is

designed for your child’s height and weight.

Always follow all recommended procedures.

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is less than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), you

may use either the LATCH anchors or the

seat belt to install the child restraint (not both

at the same time).

●If the combined weight of the child and child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint.

●Be sure to follow the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions for installation.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated. Canadian law requires the

top tether strap on forward-facing child re-

straints be secured to the designated an-

chor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor

points that are used with LATCH system compat-

ible child restraints. This system may also be

referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible

system. With this system, you do not have to use

a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint

unless the combined weight of the child and child

restraint exceeds 65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint is

greater than 65 lbs (29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s

seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the

LATCH system lower anchor locations -

bench seat

LRS2137

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installation.

The LATCH lower anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the following positions

only:

●2nd row bench seat – outboard seating

positions

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use and installation of

child restraints could result in serious in-

jury or death of a child or other passen-

gers in a sudden stop or collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the locations

shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in the

2nd row center position using the

LATCH system anchors. The child re-

straint will not be secured properly.

– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-

ing your fingers into the lower anchor

area. Feel to make sure there are no

obstructions over the anchors such

as seat belt webbing or seat cushion

material. The child restraint will not

be secured properly if the lower an-

chors are obstructed.

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage

the child restraint anchorages. The

child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchor-

ages, and a child could be seriously

injured or killed in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear

of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is

attached to the seatback to help you locate the

LATCH lower anchors.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0700

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Installing child restraint LATCH lower

anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include two

rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can

be connected to two anchors located at certain

seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to

secure the child restraint. Check your child re-

straint for a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the in-

structions provided by the child restraint manu-

facturer.

When installing a child restraint, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this manual and

those supplied with the child restraint.

LATCH label locations 2nd row bench

LRS2146

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

Top tether anchor

WARNING

●Do not allow cargo to contact the top

tether strap when it is attached to the

top tether anchor. Properly secure the

cargo so it does not contact the top

tether strap. Cargo that is not properly

secured or cargo that contacts the top

tether strap may damage it during a

collision. A child could be seriously in-

jured or killed in a collision if the top

tether strap is damaged.

●Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorages, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Top tether anchor point locations

Anchor points are located in the following loca-

tions:

●2nd row bench on the bottom of the seat-

back in the seating positions shown.

●3rd row bench on the bottom of the seat-

back on the passenger side seating position

as shown.

If you have any questions when installing a top

tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

2nd row bench seat

LRS2553

3rd row bench seat

LRS2508

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint in the 2nd row seats using the LATCH

system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint or try

installing by using the vehicle seat belt (if

applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child

restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear

seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the front

seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt

is fully retracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while

pulling up on the seat belt.

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1

through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint

mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint in the 2nd row seats using the

LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-

ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check

to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-

erly attached to the lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point. For additional information, refer to “In-

stalling top tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

LRS2398

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

LRS2399

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

4. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing-mounted attachments, remove any

additional slack from the anchor attach-

ments. Press downward and rearward firmly

in the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the LATCH attachment path. The child re-

straint should not move more than 1 inch

(25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it

forward and check to see if the LATCH at-

tachment holds the restraint in place. If the

restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the restraint

in another seat and test it again. You may

need to try a different child restraint. Not all

child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1

through 6.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH

lower anchors (2nd row bench outboard seating

positions only).

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-

ment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used

when installing a child restraint. Failure to

use the ALR mode will result in the child

restraint not being properly secured. The

restraint could tip over or be loose and

cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or

collision. Also, it can change the operation

of the front passenger air bag. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in this section.

2nd row bench seat

LRS2553

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety” and “Child

restraints” sections of this manual before install-

ing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the combined

weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds

65 lbs (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the

child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not the

lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be

sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the

rear seats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position. Child

restraints for infants must be used in

the rear-facing direction and, there-

fore, must not be used in the front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-

ways follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should be

secured against the vehicle seatback.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child

restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure

to reinstall the head restraint/headrest

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and

installation, refer to “Head

restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit,

try another seating position or a different

child restraint.

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child

restraint and insert it into the buckle until you

hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to

follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-

structions for belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a top

tether strap, route the top tether strap and

secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point (2nd row installation only). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that require the

use of a top tether strap in seating positions

that do not have a top tether anchor.

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully

extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor

is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It

reverts to ELR mode when the seat belt is

fully retracted.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS2394

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the

shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seat

belt; press downward and rearward firmly in

the center of the child restraint with your

knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion

and seatback while pulling up on the seat

belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-

fore you place the child in it. Push it from side

to side while holding the child restraint near

the seat belt path. The child restraint should

not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and check

to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.

If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat

belt as necessary, or put the restraint in

another seat and test it again. You may need

to try a different child restraint. Not all child

restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

9. Check to make sure the child restraint is

properly secured prior to each use. If the

seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2

through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light should illuminate. If this

light is not illuminated, refer to “Front pas-

senger air bag and status light” in this sec-

tion. Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the seat

belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode) is canceled.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be used

when installing the child restraint with seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.

2nd row bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and

store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall

the head restraint/headrest when the child

Forward-facing – step 10

LRS0865

2nd row bench seat

LRS2553

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

restraint is removed. For additional informa-

tion about head restraint/headrest adjust-

ment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest

does not contact the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

3rd row bench seat

WARNING

In the 3rd row bench seat, a child restraint

with a top tether strap can only be used on

the passenger side seating position. Do

not place in the driver’s side seating posi-

tion and attempt to angle the tether strap

to the passenger side seating position.

3rd row bench seat

LRS2508

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

The passenger side of the 3rd row bench seat is

the seating position that can use a top tether

strap. First, secure the child restraint with the

seat belt, as applicable.

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1as shown.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor

point 䊊

2on the bottom of the seatback

behind the child restraint.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to the

manufacturer’s instructions to remove any

slack. Make sure the head restraint/headrest

does not contact the top tether strap.

If you have any questions when installing a

top tether strap, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed by

correctly fitted child restraints. Under no

circumstances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items or

equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could

damage the child restraint anchorages.

The child restraint will not be properly

installed using the damaged anchorage,

and a child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a booster

seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions out-

lined in this section.

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not used

properly, the risk of a child being injured

or killed in a sudden stop or collision

greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s face

and neck and the lap portion of the

belt does not cross the stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the child’s

arm.

– A booster seat must only be installed

in a seating position that has a

lap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

LRS2479

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Booster seats of various sizes are offered by

several manufacturers. When selecting any

booster seat, keep the following points in mind:

●Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be

sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat

and seat belt system.

●Make sure the child’s head will be properly

supported by the booster seat or vehicle

seat. The seatback must be at or above the

center of the child’s ears. For example, if a

low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle

seatback must be at or above the center of

the child’s ears. If the seatback is lower than

the center of the child’s ears, a high back

booster seat should be used.

●If the booster seat is compatible with your

vehicle, place the child in the booster seat

and check the various adjustments to be

sure the booster seat is compatible with the

child. Always follow all recommended pro-

cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved child

restraint at all times while the vehicle is

being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to booster

seat installation in the rear seats or the front

passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Lock-

ing Retractor (ALR) mode when using a

booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to all Warnings

and Cautions in the “Child safety,” “Child re-

straints” and “Booster seats” sections of this

manual before installing a child restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the

2nd or 3rd rows or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0453 LRS0464

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

1. If you must install a booster seat in the

front seat, move the seat to the rear-

most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only

place it in a front-facing direction. Always

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned on

the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the correct

booster seat fit. If the head

restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a

secure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest when the

booster seat is removed. For additional

information about head restraint/headrest

adjustment, removal and installation, refer to

“Head restraints/headrests” in this section.

If the seating position does not have an

adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is

interfering with the proper booster seat fit,

try another seating position or a different

booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low

and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to

follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-

structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt

toward the retractor to take up extra slack.

Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned

across the top, middle portion of the child’s

shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-

tions for properly fastening a seat belt

shown in “Three-point type seat belt with

retractor” in this section.

WRS0699

Front passenger position

LRS0454

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

7. If the booster seat is installed in the front

passenger seat, place the ignition switch in

the ON position. The front passenger air bag

status light may or may not illuminate,

depending on the size of the child and the

type of booster seat being used. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Front passenger

air bag and status light” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important information

concerning the following systems:

●Driver and front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System)

●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag

●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag

●Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag system

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help

cushion the impact force to the head and chest of

the driver and front passenger in certain frontal

collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the chest area of the driver and front passenger in

certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where the

vehicle is impacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact force to

the head of occupants in front and rear outboard

seating positions in certain side-impact colli-

sions. The curtain air bags are designed to inflate

on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a

rollover, the curtain air bags are designed to

inflate and remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the crash

protection provided by the driver and front pas-

senger seat belts and is not a substitute for

them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn

and the occupant seated a suitable distance

away from the steering wheel, instrument panel

and door finishers. For additional information

about instructions and precautions on seat belt

usage, refer to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

LRS0865

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (SRS)

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

WARNING

●The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact, rear

impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-

tal collision. Always wear your seat

belts to help reduce the risk or severity

of injury in various kinds of accidents.

●The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit. For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

●The seat belts and the front air bags are

most effective when you are sitting well

back and upright in the seat. The front

air bags inflate with great force. Even

with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

front air bag if you are up against it

when it inflates. Always sit back against

the seatback and as far away as practi-

cal from the steering wheel or instru-

ment panel. Always properly use the

seat belts.

●The driver and front passenger seat belt

buckles are equipped with sensors that

detect if the seat belts are fastened. The

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors the severity of a collision and

seat belt usage, then inflates the air

bags as needed. Failure to properly

wear seat belts can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

●The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) that turns the front pas-

senger air bag OFF under some condi-

tions. This sensor is only used in this

seat. Failure to be properly seated and

wearing the seat belt can increase the

risk or severity of injury in an accident.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-

ing wheel. Placing them inside the

steering wheel rim could increase the

risk that they are injured when the front

air bag inflates.

WRS0031

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them in

your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

WARNING

●Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-facing

child restraint in the front seat. An in-

flating front air bag could seriously in-

jure or kill your child. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints”

in this section.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain

side-impact and rollover supplemental air

bags:

●The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event of

a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce the

risk or severity of injury in various kinds

of accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

WARNING

●The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective when

you are sitting well back and upright in

the seat with both feet on the floor. The

side air bag and curtain air bag inflate

with great force. Do not allow anyone to

place their hand, leg or face near the

side air bag on the side of the seatback

of the front seat or near the side roof

rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the

front seats or rear outboard seats to

extend their hand out of the window or

lean against the door. Some examples

of dangerous riding positions are

shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING

●When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front seat.

If the side air bag inflates, you may be

seriously injured. Be especially careful

with children, who should always be

properly restrained. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

●Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with side

air bag inflation.

WRS0032 SSS0162

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SSS0159

LRS2187

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules

2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)

3. Occupant classification sensor (weight sen-

sor)

4. Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-

mental air bag modules

5. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags

6. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bag inflators

7. Satellite sensors

8. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)

9. Pressure sensors in door (driver’s side

shown; front passenger side similar)

10. Crash zone sensor

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,

please observe the following items.

●Do not allow a passenger in the rear

bench seats to push or pull on the seat-

back pocket.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lb (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

●Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in the

rear seat or an object stored on the

floor.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

between the seat cushion and center

console or between the seat cushion

and the door.

●If a forward-facing child restraint is in-

stalled in the front passenger seat, do

not position the front passenger seat so

the child restraint contacts the instru-

ment panel. If the child restraint does

contact the instrument panel, the sys-

tem may determine the seat is occupied

and the passenger air bag may deploy

in a collision. Also the front passenger

air bag status light may not illuminate.

For additional information about in-

stalling and using child restraints, refer

to “Child restraints” in this section.

●Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status light.

●If you notice that the front passenger air

bag status light is not operating as de-

scribed in this section, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

●Until you have confirmed with a dealer

that your passenger seat occupant clas-

sification system is working properly,

position the occupants in the rear seat-

ing positions.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status light

may illuminate and the supplemental

air bag warning light may flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front

passenger seats. This system is designed to

meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-

lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,

all of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual still apply and must be

followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is

located in the center of the steering wheel. The

front passenger supplemental front-impact air

bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove

box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in

higher severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severity frontal

impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal

collisions. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not

always an indication of proper front air bag sys-

tem operation.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors

information from the crash zone sensor, the Air

bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors

and occupation classification sensor (weight

sensor). Inflator operation is based on the sever-

ity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver.

For the front passenger, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is also monitored. Based on informa-

tion from the sensor, only one front air bag may

inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity

and whether the front occupants are belted or

unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air

bag may be automatically turned off under some

conditions, depending on the weight detected on

the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is

used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the

front passenger air bag status light will be illumi-

nated. For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light”in this section.

One front air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air bag

system, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer to obtain information about the

system. If you are considering modification of

your vehicle due to a disability, you may also

contact NISSAN. Contact information is con-

tained in the front of this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise

may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.

This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a

fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the face and

chest of the front occupants. They can help save

lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an

inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions

or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide

restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the driver and

front passenger seated upright as far as practical

away from the steering wheel or instrument

panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to

help protect the front occupants. Because of this,

the force of the front air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or

is against, the front air bag module during infla-

tion.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is in the ON position.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF under some condi-

tions. Read this section carefully to learn

how it operates. Proper use of the seat,

seat belt and child restraints is necessary

for most effective protection. Failure to

follow all instructions in this manual con-

cerning the use of seats, seat belts and

child restraints can increase the risk or

severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with an

occupant classification sensor (weight sensor)

that turns the front passenger air bag on or off

depending on the weight applied to the front

passenger seat. The status of the front passen-

ger air bag (ON or OFF) is indicated by the front

passenger air bag status light which is

located on the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ⬙ON⬙

position, the front passenger air bag status light

on the instrument panel illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off or remains illumi-

nated depending on the front passenger seat

occupied status. The light operates as follows:

LRS0865

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CONDITION DESCRIPTION PASSENGER AIR BAG INDI-

CATOR LIGHT ( )FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small

Adult in front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects placed

on the front passenger seat may also cause the

light to operate as described above depending

on their weight.

For additional information related to the normal

operation and troubleshooting of this occupant

classification sensor system, please refer to

“Normal operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-

matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated

under some conditions as described below in

accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front

passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a

crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your

vehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce

the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, such

as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-

matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to

meet the requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle

is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an

occupant and objects on the seat by weight. For

example, if a child is in the front passenger seat,

the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System is de-

signed to turn the front passenger air bag OFF in

accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regulations is

on the seat, its weight and the child’s weight can

be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who are

properly seated and using the seat belt as out-

lined in this manual should not cause the front

passenger air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF,

however if the occupant takes his/her weight off

the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting up-

right, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could cause

the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be

sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt

properly for the most effective protection by the

seat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-

dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.

NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child

restraints and booster seats be properly installed

in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant

classification sensor is designed to operate as

described above to turn the front passenger air

bag OFF for specified child restraints as required

by the regulations. Failing to properly secure

child restraints and to use the ALR mode may

allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or

sudden stop. This can also result in the passen-

ger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being

OFF. For additional information about proper use

and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the

front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the

seat could result in air bag inflation, because of

the object’s weight detected by the occupant

classification sensor. Other conditions could also

result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is

standing on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants

are seated and restrained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status light, you

can monitor when the front passenger air bag is

automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front

passenger air bag status light is illuminated (indi-

cating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the

person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat

properly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,

the front passenger air bag status light may or

may not be illuminated, depending on the size of

the child and the type of child restraint being

used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated

(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a

crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure that

the child restraint is installed properly, the seat

belt is used properly and the occupant is posi-

tioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not

illuminated, reposition the occupant or child re-

straint in a rear seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light will not

illuminate even though you believe that the child

restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are

properly positioned, it is recommended that you

take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN

dealer can check system status by using a spe-

cial tool. However, until you have confirmed with

a dealer that your air bag is working properly,

reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front

passenger air bag status light will take a few

seconds to register a change in the front passen-

ger seat status. For example, if a large adult who

is sitting in the front passenger seat exits the

vehicle, the front passenger air bag status light

will go from OFF to ON for a few seconds and

then to OFF. This is normal system operation and

does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air

bag system, the supplemental air bag warning

light , located in the meter and gauges area

of the instrument panel, will be illuminated (blink-

ing or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification sensor

system to classify the front passenger based on

weight, please follow the precautions and steps

outlined below:

Precautions

●Make sure that there are no objects weigh-

ing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hanging on the seat or

placed in the seatback pocket.

●Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear of the

seatback.

●Make sure that a rear passenger is not push-

ing or pulling on the back of the front pas-

senger seat.

●Make sure that the front passenger seat or

seatback is not forced back against an ob-

ject on the seat or floor behind it.

●Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with your feet comfortably ex-

tended to the floor.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the “Seat

belts” section of this manual. Front passen-

ger seat belt buckle status is monitored by

the occupant classification system, and is

used as an input to determine occupancy

status. So, it is highly recommended that the

front passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds al-

lowing the system to classify the front pas-

senger before the vehicle is put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by checking the

front passenger air bag status light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification sen-

sor system generally keeps the classifica-

tion locked during driving, so it is important

that you confirm that the front passenger is

properly classified prior to driving. How-

ever, the occupant classification sensor

may recalculate the weight of the occupant

under some conditions (both while driving

and when stopped), so front passenger

seat occupants should continue to remain

seated as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag status light

is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the

front passenger seat:

●Occupant is a small adult — the air bag light

is functioning as intended. The front passen-

ger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then

this may be due to the following conditions that

may be interfering with the weight sensors:

●Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on the

seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably

extended to the floor.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person should

be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat

and the vehicle should be checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or

child restraint occupying the front passen-

ger seat.

This may be due to the following conditions

that may be interfering with the weight sen-

sors:

●Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

●The child restraint is not properly installed,

as outlined in the “Child restraints”section of

this manual.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

●An object weighing over 2.2 lbs (1 kg) hang-

ing on the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

●A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

●A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the

back of the front passenger seat.

●Forcing the front seat or seatback against an

object on the seat or floor behind it.

●An object placed under the front passenger

seat.

●An object placed between the seat cushion

and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop

when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of

the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and

wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult,

child or child restraint should be repositioned in

the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked

as soon as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger

and no objects on the front passenger seat,

the vehicle should be checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as

soon as possible.

Other supplemental front-impact air bag

precautions

WARNING

●Do not place any objects on the steering

wheel pad or on the instrument panel.

Also, do not place any objects between

any occupant and the steering wheel or

instrument panel. Such objects may be-

come dangerous projectiles and cause

injury if the front air bags inflate.

●Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will be

hot. Do not touch them; you may se-

verely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This is

to prevent accidental inflation of the

supplemental air bag or damage to the

supplemental air bag system.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or front end structure.

This could affect proper operation of

the front air bag system.

●Tampering with the front air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

Tampering includes changes to the

steering wheel and the instrument

panel assembly by placing material

over the steering wheel pad and above

the instrument panel or by installing

additional trim material around the air

bag system.

●Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing mate-

rial on the seat cushion or by installing

additional trim material, such as seat

covers, on the seat that are not specifi-

cally designed to assure proper air bag

operation. Additionally, do not stow any

objects under the front passenger seat

or the seat cushion and seatback. Such

objects may interfere with the proper

operation of the occupant classification

sensor (weight sensor).

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect the

front air bag system. Tampering with

the seat belt system may result in seri-

ous personal injury.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag. It is also recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for installation of electrical equipment.

The Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be

modified or disconnected. Unauthor-

ized electrical test equipment and prob-

ing devices should not be used on the

air bag system.

●A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified repair

facility. A cracked windshield could af-

fect the function of the supplemental air

bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the front air bag system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside of the

seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags

are located in the side roof rails in all three rows.

All of the information, cautions and warn-

ings in this manual must be followed. The

side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to

inflate in higher severity side collisions, although

they may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher severity

impact. They are designed to inflate on the side

WRS0381

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

where the vehicle is impacted. They may not

inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in

certain types of rollover collisions or near roll-

overs. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for

example, during severe off-roading) may cause

the curtain air bags to inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an

indication of proper side air bag and curtain air

bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed

by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken

not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-

dition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,

help to cushion the impact force on the chest of

the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to

cushion the impact force to the head of occu-

pants in the front and rear outboard seating po-

sitions in all rows. They can help save lives and

reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating

side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abra-

sions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain

air bags do not provide restraint to the lower

body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and passenger seated upright as far as

practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat

passengers should be seated as far away as

practical from the door finishers and side roof

rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate

quickly in order to help protect the occupants.

Because of this, the force of the side air bags and

curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of

injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,

these air bag modules during inflation. The side

air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is

over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a short

time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags op-

erate only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning

light illuminates. The supplemental air bag

warning light will turn off after about 7 sec-

onds if the system is operational.

WARNING

●Do not place any objects near the seat-

back of the front seats. Also, do not

place any objects (an umbrella, bag,

etc.) between the front door finisher

and the front seat. Such objects may

become dangerous projectiles and

cause injury if a side air bag inflates.

●Right after inflation, several side air bag

and curtain air bag system components

will be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to or

accidental inflation of the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems.

●Do not make unauthorized changes to

your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-

pension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the cur-

tain air bag systems.

1-64 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

●Tampering with the side air bag system

may result in serious personal injury.

For example, do not change the front

seats by placing material near the seat-

backs or by installing additional trim

material, such as seat covers, around

the side air bag.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag. It is

also recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-

trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the side air bag or cur-

tain air bag systems.

*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are

yellow or orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the side air bags and

curtain air bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

WARNING

●The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be replaced

together with the retractor and buckle

as a unit.

●If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not ac-

tivated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

●No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to pre-

vent damage to or accidental activation

of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with

the pretensioner system may result in

serious personal injury.

●It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical test

equipment and probing devices should

not be used on the pretensioner system.

●If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause personal

injury.

The pretensioner system may activate with the

supplemental air bag system in certain types of

collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor,

the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt

when the vehicle becomes involved in certain

types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat

occupants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the seat

belt retractor and to the seat belt anchor affixed

to the floor of the vehicle. These seat belts are

used the same way as conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65

Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a history

of a breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load limiters

allow the seat belt to release webbing (if neces-

sary) to reduce forces against the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning light is

used to indicate malfunctions in the pretensioner

system. For additional information, refer to

⬙Supplemental air bag warning light⬙in this sec-

tion. If the operation of the supplemental air bag

warning light indicates there is a malfunction,

have the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When selling your vehicle, we request that you

inform the buyer about the pretensioner system

and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections

in this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air bag warning labels

The warning labels are located on the sur-

face of the sun visor.

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental front-

impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as

shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on

a seat protected by an air bag in front of it.

If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious

injury or death.

WRS0885

1-66 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG

WARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel, moni-

tors the circuits for the air bag systems, preten-

sioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the supplemental air bag warning light

illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and preten-

sioner systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air

bag, curtain air bag or pretensioner systems may

not operate properly. They must be checked and

repaired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags

and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a

one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is

damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light

remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.

These systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-

hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be

pointed out to the person performing the mainte-

nance. The ignition switch should always be

placed in the LOCK position when working under

the hood or inside the vehicle.

WARNING

●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag

module will not function again and

must be replaced. Additionally, the acti-

vated pretensioner(s) must also be re-

placed. The air bag module and preten-

sioner(s) should be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. However, the air

bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot

be repaired.

LRS0100

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-67

●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

●If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner systems

or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect

disposal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

●If there is an impact to your vehicle from

any direction, your Occupant Classifica-

tion Sensor (OCS) should be checked to

verify it is still functioning correctly. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. The OCS should

be checked even if no air bags deploy as

a result of the impact. Failure to verify

proper OCS function may result in an

improper air bag deployment resulting

in injury or death.

1-68 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

MEMO

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-69

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel...................................2-2

Meters and gauges ................................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4

Tachometer ....................................2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-5

Fuel gauge ....................................2-6

Compass (if so equipped) ..........................2-7

Compass display ...............................2-7

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders........................................2-10

Checking lights ...............................2-10

Warning lights ................................2-11

Indicator lights ................................2-15

Audible reminders .............................2-17

Vehicle Information Display ........................2-18

How to use the vehicle information display .......2-19

Startup display ................................2-19

Resetting the trip computer .....................2-19

Settings ......................................2-19

Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators.....................................2-26

Security systems .................................2-30

Vehicle security system.........................2-30

NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............2-32

Wiper and washer switch .........................2-33

Switch operation ..............................2-33

Rear switch operation..........................2-34

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch ..................................2-35

Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-36

Headlight control switch........................2-36

Daytime running light system....................2-38

Instrument brightness control ...................2-39

Turn signal switch .............................2-39

Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-40

Horn ............................................2-40

Climate controlled seat switches (if so equipped) ....2-40

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..............2-41

Heated 2nd row seat switches (if so equipped) ......2-42

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) .......2-44

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch...........2-44

Hill descent control (HDC) switch (if so equipped) . . . 2-45

Warning systems switch (if so equipped)............2-46

Tow mode switch.................................2-46

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)................2-47

Power inverter switch (if so equipped) ..............2-47

Power outlets ....................................2-48

12v outlets ...................................2-48

120v outlet (if so equipped) ....................2-49

Extended storage switch ..........................2-50

Storage .........................................2-51

Seatback pockets .............................2-51

Storage trays .................................2-51

Glove box ....................................2-52

Console box ..................................2-52

Sunglasses holder.............................2-53

Cup holders ..................................2-54

Cargo area storage bin.........................2-56

Luggage hooks................................2-56

Roof rack (if so equipped) ......................2-57

Windows ........................................2-58

Power windows ...............................2-58

Dual panel moonroof (if so equipped) ...............2-60

Power moonroof...............................2-60

Interior lights .....................................2-62

Console light..................................2-63

Map lights ....................................2-63

Personal lights ................................2-64

Cargo light ...................................2-64

Homelink® Universal Transceiver (if so equipped) ....2-65

Programming HomeLink® ......................2-65

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers....................2-67

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ...................................2-67

Programming trouble-diagnosis .................2-67

Clearing the programmed information ............2-68

Reprogramming a single HomeLink® button......2-68

If your vehicle is stolen .........................2-68

1. Vents (P. 4-46)

2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn

signal switch (P. 2-36)

3. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-36)

4. Driver supplemental air bag (P.1-49)

Horn (P. 2-40)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-10)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-18)

6. Twin trip odometer reset switch (P. 2-4)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-33)

Rear window wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-33)

8. Control panel*

9. Center display*

Navigation system* (if so equipped)

10. Front passenger air bag status light

(P. 1-49)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag

(P. 1-49)

12. Glove box (P. 2-51)

13. Automatic heater and air conditioning

controls (P. 4-47)

14. Audio system controls*

15. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2)

16. Push-button ignition switch (P. 5-10)

LII2409

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

17. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-38)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-40)

18. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

control (P. 3-32)

19. Control panel and vehicle information

display switches (P. 2-19)

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System*

20. Hood release (P. 3-21)

21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-44)

Tow mode switch (P. 2-46)

Power liftgate main switch

(if so equipped) (P. 3-22)

Warning systems switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-46)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-44)

Power inverter switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-47)

*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-

er’s Manual (if so equipped).

Refer to the page number indicated in pa-

renthesis for operating details.

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display

Odometer

Twin trip odometer

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

LIC3597

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and

odometer. The speedometer is located on the

right side of the meter cluster. The odometer is

located within the vehicle information display.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer 䊊

1are

displayed in the vehicle information display when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance the ve-

hicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the distance of

individual trips.

LIC2255 LIC3460

2-4 Instruments and controls

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET䊊

2switch on the right side

of the instrument panel to change the display as

follows:

Trip →Trip →Odometer Mileage →

Trip

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

2for more

than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip

odometer to zero.

Average fuel economy and distance to empty

information is also available. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section. TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-

lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into

the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, reduce engine speed. Operating the

engine in the red zone may cause serious

engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-

ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the

normal range 䊊

1when the gauge needle points

within the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with the

outside air temperature and driving conditions.

LIC2219 LIC2220

Instruments and controls 2-5

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-

mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as

safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the vehicle

may seriously damage the engine. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “If your ve-

hicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual for

immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level

in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,

turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) after the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

The low fuel warning message shows in the ve-

hicle information display when the amount of fuel

in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-

ters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door is

located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

●If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips, the light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the vehicle

inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

LIC2222

2-6 Instruments and controls

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-

dicates the heading direction of the vehicle.

With the ignition placed in the ON position, press

the button as described in the charts be-

low to activate various features of the automatic

anti-glare rearview mirror.

Push and hold

the

button for about:

Feature:

(Push button again for about 1 sec-

ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

8 seconds Compass zone can be changed to

correct false compass readings

10 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

anti-glare rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving

checks and adjustments” section of this manual.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Press the button for about one second

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position to toggle the compass direction display

䊊

1on or off. The display will indicate the direction

that the vehicle is heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by

driving the vehicle in three complete circles at

less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driving

your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-

pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three

complete circles.

LIC1487

COMPASS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-7

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north and geo-

graphical north is known as variance. In some

areas, this difference can sometimes be great

enough to cause false compass readings. Follow

these instructions to set the variance for your

particular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about

8 seconds. The current zone number will

appear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.

Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to toggle

through the zone numbers until the desired

number appears in the display. Once you

have selected a zone number, the display

will show a compass direction within a few

seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with automatic

correction function. If the correct direction is not

shown, follow this procedure.

WIC0355

2-8 Instruments and controls

1. With the display turned on, press and hold

the switch for about 9 seconds. The

display will read “C.”

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle

in three complete circles at a maximum

speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the display

should return to normal.

●If the compass deviates from the correct

indication soon after repeated adjustment,

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

●The compass may not indicate the correct

compass point in tunnels or while driving up

or down a steep hill. (The compass returns

to the correct compass point when the ve-

hicle moves to an area where the geomag-

netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the op-

eration of the compass.

●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it may

cause the liquid cleaner to enter the

mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-9

or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)

warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime Overdrive OFF indicator light

or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light

Charge warning light Front fog light indicator light (if so equipped) Side light and headlight indicator light (green)

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) system warn-

ing light (if so equipped)

Front passenger air bag status light Slip indicator light

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue) TOW mode ON indicator light

Master warning light Hill descent control system ON indicator

light (if so equipped)

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Power steering warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator

light

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,

fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch

in the ON position without starting the engine.

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:

, or , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will come on

briefly and then go off:

or , , , ,

, ,

If any light does not come on or operate in a way

other than described, it may indicate a burned-

out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also displayed

on the vehicle information display between the

speedometer and tachometer. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-10 Instruments and controls

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information on warnings and indi-

cators, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates and

then turns off. This indicates the ABS is opera-

tional.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while the

engine is running or while driving, it may indicate

the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-

tion is turned off. The brake system then operates

normally but without anti-lock assistance. For

additional information, refer to “Brake system” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake and

the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on when the parking

brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-

hicle and perform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid

as necessary. For additional information, re-

fer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the

warning system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

WARNING

●Your brake system may not be working

properly if the warning light is on. Driv-

ing could be dangerous. If you judge it

to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest

service station for repairs. Otherwise,

have your vehicle towed because driv-

ing it could be dangerous.

●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

●If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake

warning light and the ABS warning light illumi-

nate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the brake system checked and, if

necessary, repaired. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Avoid

high-speed driving and abrupt braking. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-11

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,

it may indicate the charging system is not func-

tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check

the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,

missing, or if the light remains on, have the sys-

tem checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generator

belt is loose, broken or missing.

Forward Emergency Braking

(FEB) system warning light (if

so equipped)

This light comes on when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. It turns off after the

engine is started.

This light illuminates when the Forward Emer-

gency Braking system is set to OFF on the meter

display.

If the light illuminates when the Forward Emer-

gency Braking system is on, it may indicate that

the system is unavailable. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Forward Emergency Braking (FEB)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Low tire pressure warning light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire

pressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of low

tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not

functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about 1 second

and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illuminate.

A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

also appears in the vehicle information dis-

play.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust the

tire pressure of all four tires to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on the

Tire and Loading Information label located

in the driver’s door opening. The low tire

pressure warning light does not automati-

cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-

justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-

ommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning ap-

pears each time the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position as long as the low tire pressure

warning light remains illuminated.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section, “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

driving” and “In case of emergency” sections of

this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low

tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-

mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position. The light will remain on

after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service. The ⬙Tire Pressure Low — Add Air⬙

warning does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-

function.

For additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and

2-12 Instruments and controls

driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could result

in serious personal injury or death.

Check the tire pressure for all four tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the recom-

mended COLD tire pressure shown on

the Tire and Loading Information label

located in the driver’s door opening to

turn the low tire pressure warning light

off. If the light still illuminates while

driving after adjusting the tire pressure,

a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be

malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are

properly inflated, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted or a

wheel is replaced the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

●The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

●Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Instruments and controls 2-13

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, the

master warning light illuminates if any of the fol-

lowing are displayed on the vehicle information

display.

●No key warning

●Low fuel warning

●Low windshield-washer fluid warning

●Parking brake release

●Door open warning

●Check tire pressure warning

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

Power steering warning light

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the power steering warning light illumi-

nates. After starting the engine, the power steer-

ing warning light turns off. This indicates the

power steering is operational.

If the power steering warning light illuminates

while the engine is running, it may indicate the

power steering is not functioning properly and

may need servicing. Have the power steering

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illumi-

nates with the engine running, there will be no

power assist for the steering, but you will still

have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater

steering effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-

ing” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten your

seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the ON or START

position and remains illuminated until the driver’s

seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime

sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s

seat belt is securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if

the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened

when the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For

7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in

the ON position, the system does not activate the

warning light for the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat belts” in

the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Supplemental air bag warning

light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag warn-

ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then

turns off. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-

sioner seat belt systems need servicing:

●The supplemental air bag warning light re-

mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

●The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

●The supplemental air bag warning light does

not come on at all.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental

restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-

tensioner(s) may not function properly. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS)” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system” section

of this manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning light

is on, it could mean that the front air bag,

side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-

sioner systems will not operate in an acci-

dent. To help avoid injury to yourself or

others, have your vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in this section.

Front fog light indicator light (if

so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illuminates when

the front fog lights are on. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Fog light switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag status

light

The front passenger air bag status light will be lit

and the passenger front air bag will be off de-

pending on how the front passenger seat is being

used.

For additional information, refer to “Front passen-

ger air bag and status light” in the “Safety —

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight high

beams are on and goes out when the low beams

are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes on

when the passing signal is activated.

Hill descent control system

ON indicator light (if so

equipped)

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light comes on briefly and then turns

off.

The light comes on when the hill descent control

system is activated.

If the hill descent control switch is on and the

indicator light blinks, the system is not engaged.

If the indicator light does not come on when the

hill descent switch is on, the system may not be

functioning properly. Have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For additional information, refer to “Hill descent

control switch” in this section and “Hill descent

control system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks

while the engine is running, it may indicate a

potential emission control malfunction.

The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler

cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out

of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is

installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle

has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the

fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light should

turn off if no other potential emission control

system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds when the

engine is not running, it indicates that the vehicle

is not ready for an emission control system

inspection/maintenance test. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Readiness for

inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the “Tech-

nical and consumer information” section of this

manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

●MIL on steady — An emission control system

malfunction has been detected. Check the

fuel-filler cap if the LOOSE FUEL CAP

warning appears in the vehicle information

display. If the fuel-filler cap is loose or miss-

ing, tighten or install the cap and continue to

drive the vehicle. The light should turn

off after a few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service. You do not need to have your

vehicle towed to the dealer.

●MIL blinking — An engine misfire has been

detected which may damage the emission

control system. To reduce or avoid emission

control system damage:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 mph

(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo

being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady.

Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-

ing the emission control system checked

and repaired as necessary could lead to

poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,

and possible damage to the emission con-

trol system.

Overdrive OFF indicator light

The overdrive OFF indicator light illuminates

when the overdrive OFF mode is selected.

For additional information, refer to “Driving the

vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.

The blinking security indicator light indicates that

the security systems equipped on the vehicle are

operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security sys-

tems” in this section.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light illumi-

nates when the side light or headlights are on

(not including daytime running or signature

lights). If the headlight switch is in the AUTO

position, the side light and headlight indicator

light will illuminate when the headlights turn on.

For additional information, refer to “Headlight and

turn signal switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the VDC system is

operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that

the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is

nearing its traction limits.

You may feel or hear the system working; this is

normal.

The light will blink for a few seconds after the

VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.

The indicator light also comes on when

you place the ignition switch in the ON position.

The light will turn off after approximately 2 sec-

onds if the system is operational. If the light does

not come on have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

TOW mode ON indicator light

This light comes on when the tow mode function

is on.

For additional information, refer to “Tow mode

switch” in this section.

Turn signal/hazard indicator

lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal

switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned

on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the VDC OFF

switch is pushed to off. This indicates the VDC

system has been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine and the system will operate normally. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

The VDC indicator light also comes on when you

place the ignition switch in the ON position. The

light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the

system is operational. If the light stays on or

comes on along with the indicator light

while you are driving, have the VDC system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you might

feel a slight vibration or hear the system working

when starting the vehicle or accelerating, but this

is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.

When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it

makes a high pitched scraping sound when the

vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake

pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened

while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or

OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK

position with the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle.

Make sure the ignition switch is placed in the

LOCK position, and take the Intelligent Key with

you when leaving the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-

tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is

opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off or to AUTO

before leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door buzzer

(if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any one

of the following improper operations is found.

●The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors.

●Any doors are not closed securely when

locking the doors.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check both

the vehicle and the Intelligent Key. For additional

information, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”section

of this manual.

The vehicle information display is located to the

left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:

●Vehicle settings

●Trip computer information

●Drive system warnings and settings (if so

equipped)

●Blind Spot Warning (BSW) information (if

so equipped)

●Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so

equipped)

●Forward Collision Warning (FCW) (if so

equipped)

●Cruise control system information (if so

equipped)

●Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) system in-

formation (if so equipped)

●NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation informa-

tion

●Indicators and warnings

●Tire Pressure information

LIC2205

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

2-18 Instruments and controls

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be navigated

using the , , ENTER , and

buttons located on the steering wheel.

1. — select/enter the vehicle information

display menu items or to change from one

display screen to the next (i.e. trip, settings,

fuel economy)

2. — navigate through the items in the

vehicle information display

ENTER — change or select an item in the

vehicle information display

3. — go back to the previous menu

The ENTER and buttons also control audio

and control panel functions. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Steering wheel switch for audio

control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio, phone

and voice recognition systems” section of this

manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC

position the screens that display in the vehicle

information include:

●Active system status (if so equipped)

●Trip computer

●Tire pressure information

●4WD (if so equipped)

●Fuel economy

●Distance to empty

●Warnings

Warnings will only display if there are any pres-

ent. For additional information on warnings and

indicators refer to “Vehicle information display

warnings and indicators” in this section.

To control what items display in the vehicle infor-

mation display, refer to “Main menu selection” in

this section.

RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER

1. Press the button until you reach the

trip computer mode.

2. Press the button again for more than

1.5 seconds to reset average fuel consump-

tion, average speed, distance to empty, and

journey time.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the infor-

mation displayed in the vehicle information dis-

play:

●Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

●Vehicle Settings

●Main Menu Selection

●Body Color

●Maintenance

●Alarms

●Language

●Units

●Welcome Effect

●Factory Reset

LIC2245

Instruments and controls 2-19

Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

The driver assistance menu allows the user to

change the various driving aids, parking aids and

braking features.

Menu item Result

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available Driving Aids

Blind Spot Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual

Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids

Sensor Allows user to turn the parking sensor on or off

Display Allows user to turn the parking sensor display on or off

Volume Allows user to change the volume of the parking aid chimes

Range Allows user to select the range in which the parking sensors will activate

Emergency Braking (if so equipped) Displays the available emergency braking options

System Allows user to turn the emergency braking system on or off

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings menu allows the user to

change the settings for lights, wipers, locking,

keys, and other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result

Welcome Light Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off

Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle

Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off

Wiper with Speed (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off

I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn I-key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Menu item Result

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock feature on or off. When this item is turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first after the

door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is pushed to be

unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed

again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed

once.

Auto Door Unlock Displays the available auto door unlock options

OFF Doors will have to be manually unlocked

IGN Off Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off

Shift into P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park)

Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off

Remote Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the remote start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started remotely.

Battery Saver Allows user to turn the battery saver feature on or off

Exit Seat Slide (if so equipped) When the exit seat slide is on the driver’s seat will move backward for easy exit when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position, the

driver’s seat will move to the previous set position.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

Exit Steering Up (if so equipped) When the exit steering up feature is turned on, the steering wheel moves upward for easy exit when the ignition switch isinthe

OFF position and the driver’s door is opened. After getting into the vehicle and placing the ignition switch in the ACC position,

the steering wheel moves to the previous position.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of this

manual.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Main Menu Selection

The main menu selection menu allows the user to

customize the information that appears in the

vehicle information display when the ignition is

placed in the ON position.

Menu item Result

Driver Assistance (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the driver assistance display on or off

Trip Computer Allows user to turn the trip computer display on or off

Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures display on or off

4WD (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the 4WD display on or off

Audio Allows user to turn the audio display on or off

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off

Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off

Body Color

The body color menu allows the user to select the

color of vehicle that appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display

Menu item Result

Body Color Displays the available colors for the vehicle in the vehicle information display

2-22 Instruments and controls

Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to set

reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, includ-

ing tire pressure checks. For additional

information, refer to “Changing wheels

and tires”in the “Do-it-yourself”section of

this manual. Many factors including tire

inflation, alignment, driving habits and

road conditions affect tire wear and when

tires should be replaced. Setting the tire

replacement indicator for a certain driving

distance does not mean your tires will last

that long. Use the tire replacement indica-

tor as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pressure

checks could result in tire failure. Serious

vehicle damage could occur and may lead

to a collision, which could result in serious

personal injury or death.

Menu item Result

Service This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items other than the

engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. You can set or reset the

distance for checking or replacing the items. You can set or reset the distance for service type items.

For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.

Tire This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for re-

placing tires.

Other This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items other than the

engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. The distance for check-

ing or replacing the items can be set or reset.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Alarms

The alarms menu allows the user to set various

alerts.

Menu item Result

Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off

Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert for a specific interval

Language

The language menu allows the user to change the

languages displayed in the vehicle information

display.

Menu item Result

Language Displays available language options for the vehicle information display

Unit

The unit menu allows the user to customize the

information that appears in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Menu item Result

Mileage Displays available mileage options shown in the vehicle information display

Tire Pressures Displays available tire pressures options shown in the vehicle information display

Temperature Displays available temperature options shown in the vehicle information display

2-24 Instruments and controls

Welcome Effect

The welcome effect menu allows the user to

control the welcome effect feature.

Menu item Result

Welcome Effect Allows user to turn the welcome effect feature on or off

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to restore

the vehicle information display settings to factory

status.

Menu item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can

confirm or deny the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-25

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. No Key Detected

2. Key ID Incorrect

3. Key low battery

4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

5. Key Registration Complete

6. Shift to Park

7. Push Ignition to OFF

8. Push brake and start switch to drive

9. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key sys-

tem (if I-Key battery is low)

10. Release Parking Brake

11. Low Fuel

LIC3628

2-26 Instruments and controls

12. Loose Fuel Cap

13. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

14. Low Washer Fluid

15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

16. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

17. 4x4–i indicators (if so equipped)

18. 4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

19. Door Open

20. Liftgate Open

21. Timer Alert – Have a break?

22. Low Outside Temperature

23. Power will turn off to save the battery

24. Turn off the lights

25. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

26. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s Manual

(if so equipped)

27. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

28. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

29. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

30. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

31. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator (if

so equipped)

32. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

33. Transmission Shift Position indicator

34. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is

left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in

the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is

inside the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignition switch is

placed from the OFF position and the Intelligent

Key is not recognized by the system. You cannot

start the engine with an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Key low battery

This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key

battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery

with a new one. For additional information, refer

to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON

position, this light comes on for a period of time

and then turns off.

The I-Key System Error message warns of a

malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the

light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may

be impossible to start the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is running,

you can drive the vehicle. However in these

cases, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Key Registration Complete

This appears when a new Intelligent Key is regis-

tered to the vehicle.

Instruments and controls 2-27

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition switch

is in the ACC or OFF position and the shift lever

is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime

sounds when the ignition switch is in the ACC or

OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to

the P (Park) position and start the engine.

Push Ignition to OFF

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illumi-

nates, the warning will illuminate if the ignition

switch is placed in the ACC position when the

shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition

switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK

position.

Push brake and start switch to drive

This indicator appears when the shift lever is in

the P (Park) position.

This indicator also appears when the vehicle has

been started using the remote start (if so

equipped) function.

This indicator means that the engine will start by

pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal

depressed. You can start the engine from any

position of the ignition switch.

Engine start operation for Intelligent Key

system (if I-Key battery level is low)

This indicator appears when the battery of the

Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key

system and the vehicle are not communicating

normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the

Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key® battery discharge” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message area of

the vehicle information display when the parking

brake is set and the vehicle is driven.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the

fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is

convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge

reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small re-

serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel

gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is

not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been

refueled. For additional information, refer to

“Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears in the message area of the

vehicle information display if low oil pressure is

detected. This gauge is not designed to indicate

low oil level. The low oil pressure warning is

not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use

the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the windshield-

washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-

washer fluid as necessary. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Windshield-washer fluid” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire pressure

warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire

pressure is detected. The warning appears each

time the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position as long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated. If this warning appears,

stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of

all four tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label. For additional information, refer to

2-28 Instruments and controls

“Low tire pressure warning light” in this section

and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an error with

your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

4x4–i indicators (if so equipped)

These indicators show the Intelligent 4WD sys-

tem status while the engine is running.

For additional information, refer to “Intelligent

4WD” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

4WD Error: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when the 4-wheel drive

system is not functioning properly. For additional

information, refer to “Intelligent 4WD” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Door Open

This warning illuminates when a door has been

opened.

Liftgate Open

This warning illuminates when the liftgate has

been opened.

Timer Alert — Have a break?

This indicator appears when the set time is

reached. The time can be set up to 6 hours. For

additional information, refer to “Settings” in this

section of the manual.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside temperature

is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be

changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For

additional information, refer to “Settings” in this

section.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This message appears in the vehicle information

display after a period of time if the ignition switch

is in the ACC or the ON position and if the vehicle

is in P (Park). For additional information, refer to

“Push-button ignition switch positions” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Turn off the lights

This warning appears when the headlights are

left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle.

Place the headlight switch to OFF or AUTO po-

sition. For additional information, refer to “Head-

light and turn signal switch” in this section.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an error

with the system. For additional information, refer

to “Headlight and turn signal switch” in this sec-

tion.

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an error

with the system. For additional information, refer

to “Rear Sonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross

Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows when the BSW and RCTA

systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of the

following systems (if so equipped) is not func-

tioning properly:

●Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

●Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If one or more of these warning appears, have the

system checked. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

This warning appears when there is radar block-

age detected. For additional information, refer to

“Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the cruise control system

status.

When cruise control is activated, a green circle

will illuminate to indicate it is set. The vehicle

information display will also display the speed the

cruise control was set at. If you accelerate past

the set speed, the speed will blink until you either

cancel cruise control or go back to the set speed.

If cruise control is on and cancelled, the speed

will be displayed to show the speed the vehicle

will return to if the resume button his activated.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator

(if so equipped)

This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise Con-

trol (ICC) system status. The status is shown by

the color. For additional information, refer to “In-

telligent Cruise Control (ICC)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended storage

switch is not pushed in. When this warning ap-

pears, push in the extended storage switch to

turn off the warning. For additional information,

refer to “Extended storage switch” in this section.

Transmission Shift Position indicator

This indicator shows the transmission shift posi-

tion.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning illuminates when there is a problem

with the CVT system. If this warning comes on,

have the system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

●Vehicle security system

●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual and

audible alarm signals if someone opens the

doors, liftgate, or hood when the system is armed.

It is not, however, a motion detection type system

that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a

vibration occurs.

LIC2930

SECURITY SYSTEMS

2-30 Instruments and controls

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot

prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or

exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a

brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in

the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when

unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and

park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, such

as component locks, identification markers, and

tracking systems, are available at auto supply

stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer

may also offer such equipment. Check with your

insurance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.

3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock all

doors. The doors can be locked with the

Intelligent Key, door handle request switch,

or mechanical key.

4. Confirm that the security indicator

light stays on for about 30 seconds. The

vehicle security system is now pre-armed.

The vehicle security system will automati-

cally shift into the armed phase. The

security light begins to flash once every

three seconds. If during the pre-armed

phase one of the following occurs, the sys-

tem will not arm:

●Any door is unlocked with the mechanical

key, the Intelligent Key or door request

switch.

●Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON

position.

●Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate with all the doors, hood and

liftgate locked with the ignition switch

placed in the LOCK position. When

placing the ignition switch in the ACC

or ON position, the system will be re-

leased.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the following

alarm:

●The hazard lights blink (for non I-key vehicle)

or the headlights (for I-key vehicle) blink and

the horn sounds intermittently.

●The alarm automatically turns off after a pe-

riod of time. However, the alarm reactivates if

the vehicle is tampered with again. The alarm

can be shut off by unlocking the driver’s door

by pressing the button on the key fob

or placing the ignition switch in the ON or

ACC position.

The alarm is activated by:

●opening a door without using the key fob

(even if the door is unlocked by using the

inside lock knob or the power door lock

switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door or the

liftgate with the mechanical key, pressing

the button on the Intelligent Key, or push-

ing the request switch on the driver’s or passen-

ger’s door with the Intelligent Key in range of the

door handle.

Instruments and controls 2-31

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of a

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or

ACC position.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-

mobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-

functioning, the light will remain on while the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

LIC0474

2-32 Instruments and controls

If the light still remains on and/or the en-

gine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the windshield and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the windshield with the

defroster before you wash the windshield.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

LIC3028

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-33

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is inter-

rupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop

moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,

turn the wiper switch to the OFF position

and remove the snow or ice that is on and

around the wiper arms. In approximately

1 minute, turn the switch on again to oper-

ate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates when

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the

following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

can be adjusted by turning the knob toward

䊊

A(Slower) or 䊊

B(Faster). Also, the inter-

mittent operation speed varies in accor-

dance with the vehicle speed (if so

equipped). (For example, when the vehicle

speed is high, the intermittent operation

speed will be faster.)

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed operation

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed opera-

tion

Push the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep opera-

tion (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

NOTE:

The Wiper with Speed feature may be dis-

abled. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in this sec-

tion.

REAR SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-

tion may freeze on the rear window and

obscure your vision which may lead to an

accident. Warm the rear window with the

defroster before you wash the rear

window.

LIC3101

2-34 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●Do not operate the washer continuously

for more than 30 seconds.

●Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer fluid

concentrates at full strength. Some

methyl alcohol based windshield-

washer fluid concentrates may perma-

nently stain the grille if spilled while

filling the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir.

●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufactur-

er’s recommended levels before pour-

ing the fluid into the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted

by snow, etc., the wiper may stop moving to

protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper

switch to OFF and remove the snow, etc. on and

around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn

the switch on again to operate the wiper.

The rear window wiper and washer operate when

the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the

switch clockwise from the OFF position to oper-

ate the wiper.

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent operation

(not adjustable)

䊊

2Low (ON) — continuous low speed opera-

tion

Push the switch forward 䊊

3to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several times.

To defrost the rear window glass and outside

mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and

push the rear window defroster switch on. The

rear window defroster indicator light on the

switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn

the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns off

after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or dam-

age the rear window defroster.

LIC1388

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-35

NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires on

the rear window are not part of the rear

window defroster system. These wires

make up the antenna for the audio system.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position, and

the front parking, tail, license plate, and in-

strument panel lights will come on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position, and

the headlights will come on and all the other

lights remain on.

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3240

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3237

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

2-36 Instruments and controls

Autolight system (if so equipped)

The autolight system allows the headlights to turn

on and off automatically. The autolight system

can:

●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,

license plate and instrument panel lights au-

tomatically when it is dark.

●Turn off all the lights when it is light.

●Keep all the lights on for a period of time after

you place the ignition switch in the OFF

position and all doors are closed.

●Turn on the headlights if the windshield wip-

ers make four continuous passes within one

minute of the first pass (if so equipped). The

headlights remain on until the wipers are

turned off for longer that 3 seconds.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the time

delay for autolight shutoff can be adjusted.

For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

●Place the headlight switch in the AUTO po-

sition 䊊

●Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

●The autolight system automatically turns the

headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and a

door is opened and left open, the headlights

remain ON for a period of time. If another door is

opened while the headlights are on, then the

timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, place the switch

in the OFF, ,or position.

Be sure you do not put anything on top of

the autolight sensor located in the top side

of the instrument panel 䊊

1. The autolight

sensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-

ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is

dark out and the headlights will illuminate.

If this occurs while parked with the engine

off and the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, your vehicle’s battery could be-

come discharged.

LIC3188 LIC2237

Instruments and controls 2-37

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, push the

lever forward while the low beams are on.

The high beam lights come on and the

indicator light illuminates.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to return to the low beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the

headlight high beams on and off. The low

beams do not need to be on for this to

function.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position

while the headlight switch is in the

or position, the headlights will turn off after

a period of time.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-

tomatically turns off the headlights after a

period of time, you should turn the head-

light switch to the OFF position when the

engine is not running to avoid discharging

the vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM

The LED portion of the headlights automatically

illuminate at 100% intensity when the engine is

started and the parking brake released. The day-

time running lights operate with the headlight

switch in the OFF position. When you turn the

headlight switch to the position for full

illumination the LED lights switch from daytime

running lights to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine is

started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-

nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when

the parking brake is released. The daytime run-

ning lights remain on until the ignition is placed in

the OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch

on for interior controls and switches to illuminate,

as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF

position.

WARNING

When the daytime running light system is

active, tail lights on your vehicle are not

on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your

headlights. Failure to do so could cause

an accident injuring yourself and others.

LIC3250

2-38 Instruments and controls

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “+” button 䊊

Ato increase the bright-

ness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “-” button 䊊

Bto decrease the bright-

ness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is com-

pleted, the turn signal cancels automatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, to signal a lane change. Hold the lever

until the lane change is completed.

Move the lever up or down until the turn

signal begins to flash, but the lever does not

latch, and release the lever. The turn signal

will automatically flash three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal a lane

change based on road and traffic conditions.

LIC2389 LIC3252

Instruments and controls 2-39

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, rotate the headlight

switch to the position, then rotate the fog

light switch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch

in the AUTO position, the headlights must be on,

then rotate the fog light switch to the po-

sition.

To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog light

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beams

selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog

lights automatically turn off when the high beam

headlights are selected.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area of

the steering wheel. WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

climate controlled seats if you or the oc-

cupants can not monitor seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

those body parts in contact with the seat.

Use of the climate controlled seats by

such people could result in serious injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the cli-

mate control seat is operated while the

engine is not running.

LIC3256 LIC2227 SIC4334

HORN CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEAT

SWITCHES (if so equipped)

2-40 Instruments and controls

●Do not use the climate control seat for

extended periods or when no one is

using the seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

objects. This may result in damage to

the climate controlled seat.

●Any liquid spilled on the seat should be

removed immediately with a dry cloth

●The climate controlled seat has an air

filter. Do not operate the climate con-

trolled seat without an air filter. This

may result in damage to the system.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

climate controlled seat does not oper-

ate, turn the switch off and have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

The climate controlled seat warms up or cools

down the front seat by blowing warm or cool air

from under the surface of the seat. The climate

control switch is located on the center console.

The climate controlled seat can be operated as

follows:

1. Start the engine.

2. Turn the control knob 䊊

Ato the heat side 䊊

or the cool side 䊊

2. The indicator light 䊊

Bon

the control knob will illuminate.

3. Adjust the desired amount of air using the

control knob. The climate controlled seat

blower remains on low speed for approxi-

mately 60 seconds after turning the switch

on or selecting the desired temperature.

4. When the vehicle’s interior is warmed or

cooled, or before you leave the vehicle, be

sure to turn the control knob to the OFF

(center) position. The indicator light 䊊

Bon

the control knob goes off with the switch in

the OFF (center) position.

To check the air filter for the climate controlled

seat, it is recommended that you contact a

NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants cannot

monitor elevated seat temperatures or

have an inability to feel pain in body parts

that contact the seat. Use of the seat

heater by such people could result in seri-

ous injury.

LIC3037

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-41

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired. The indicator light in the switch will

illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch

to turn it off.

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use the

seat heater if you or the occupants cannot

monitor elevated seat temperatures or

have an inability to feel pain in body parts

that contact the seat. Use of the seat

heater by such people could result in seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

●The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

●Do not use the seat heater for extended

periods or when no one is using the

seat.

●Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-

ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat

may become overheated.

●Do not place anything hard or heavy on

the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar

object. This may result in damage to the

heater.

●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with a

dry cloth.

HEATED 2ND ROW SEAT SWITCHES

(if so equipped)

2-42 Instruments and controls

●When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-

lar materials.

●If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn the

switch off and have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

The 2nd row seats are warmed by built-in heat-

ers. The switches are located on the rear of the

front center console and can be operated inde-

pendently of each other.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, as

desired. The indicator light in the switch will

illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,

automatically turning the heater on and off.

The indicator light will remain on as long as

the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch

off.

LIC3037

Instruments and controls 2-43

The heated steering wheel system is designed to

operate only when the surface temperature of the

steering wheel is below 68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warm

the steering wheel after the engine starts. The

indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel is

below 68°F (20°C), the system will heat the

steering wheel and cycle off and on to maintain a

temperature above 68°F (20°C). The indicator

light will remain on as long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steering

wheel system off manually. The indicator light will

go off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switch

is turned on, the system will not heat the

steering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC sys-

tem on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC

system reduces the engine output to reduce

wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced

even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If

maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck

vehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF

switch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the

engine to turn on the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

LIC2221 LIC3344

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH

(if so equipped)

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

2-44 Instruments and controls

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle speed

when driving on steep downhill grades.

Always drive carefully when using the

hill descent control system and deceler-

ate the vehicle speed by depressing the

brake pedal if necessary. Be especially

careful when driving on frozen, muddy

or extremely steep downhill roads. Fail-

ure to control vehicle speed may result

in a loss of control of the vehicle and

possible serious injury or death.

●The hill descent control may not control

the vehicle speed on a hill under all load

or road conditions. Always be prepared

to depress the brake pedal to control

vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-

sult in a collision or serious personal

injury.

CAUTION

When the hill descent control system op-

erates continuously for a long time, the

temperature of the brake pads may in-

crease and the hill descent control system

may be temporarily disabled (the indicator

light will blink). If the indicator light does

not come on continuously after blinking,

stop using the system.

The HDC system is designed to reduce driver

workload when going down steep hills. The HDC

system helps to control vehicle speed so the

driver can concentrate on steering the vehicle.

To activate the HDC system:

●the 4WD switch must be in the LOCK posi-

tion and the vehicle speed must be under

15 mph (25 km/h)

●the hill descent control system switch must

be ON.

The HDC system ON indicator light will come on

when the system is activated. Also, the stop/tail

lights illuminate while the hill descent control

system applies the brakes to control vehicle

speed.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed

while the HDC system is on, the system will stop

operating temporarily. As soon as the accelerator

or brake pedal is released, the HDC system

begins to function again if the HDC operating

conditions are fulfilled.

The HDC system ON indicator light blinks if the

switch is on and all conditions for system activa-

tion are not met or if the system becomes disen-

gaged for any reason.

To turn off the HDC system, push the switch to

the OFF position.

For additional information, refer to “Hill descent

control system ON indicator light” in this section

and “Hill descent control system” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

LIC3435

HILL DESCENT CONTROL (HDC)

SWITCH (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-45

The warning systems switch is used to turn on

and off the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) system

that is activated using the settings menu on the

vehicle information display.

When the warning systems switch is turned off,

the indicator 䊊

1on the switch is off. The indicator

will also be off if the warning system is deacti-

vated using the settings menu.

The BSW system will turn on the side indicator

light, located next to the outside mirrors, if the

radar detects a vehicle in the detection zone. If

the turn signal is activated in the direction of the

detected vehicle, a chime sounds twice and the

side indicator light will flash. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Tow mode should be used when pulling a heavy

trailer or hauling a heavy load. Driving the vehicle

in the tow mode with no trailer/load or light

trailer/light load will not cause any damage. How-

ever, fuel economy may be reduced, and the

transmission/engine driving characteristics may

feel unusual.

Push the tow mode switch to activate tow mode.

The indicator light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates when tow mode is selected. Push the tow

mode switch again to turn tow mode OFF.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

LSD2208 LIC3343

WARNING SYSTEMS SWITCH (if so

equipped)

TOW MODE SWITCH

2-46 Instruments and controls

The E-call (SOS) system switch is used in com-

bination with a NissanConnect

Services sub-

scription to call for assistance in case of an

emergency.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid subscription)

reach a Response Specialist that will provide

assistance based on the situation described by

the vehicle’s occupant. For additional informa-

tion, or to enroll your vehicle, refer to

www.NissanUSA.com/connect or call

855–426–6628.

To use the outlets for devices that require 120v

power, place the ignition in the ON position and

push the power inverter switch.

The switch will illuminate when enabled.

CAUTION

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Do not attempt to use this while driving.

●Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory, doing so

could significantly drain the battery of

your vehicle.

LIC3357 LIC2231

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so

equipped)

POWER INVERTER SWITCH (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-47

12V OUTLETS

The power outlets are for powering electrical

accessories such as cellular telephones. They

are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.

The instrument panel and center console (if so

equipped) power outlets are powered only when

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Only certain power outlets are designed

for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do

not use any other power outlet for an

accessory lighter. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for addi-

tional information.

●Do not use with accessories that exceed

a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

●Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights, or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned off.

Instrument Panel

LIC3345

Center Console (if so equipped)

LIC3461

Cargo Area

LIC2236

POWER OUTLETS

2-48 Instruments and controls

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

120V OUTLET (if so equipped)

CAUTION

●The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

●Use power outlets with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

●Do not use double adaptors or more

than one electrical accessory.

●Avoid using power outlets when the air

conditioner, headlights or rear window

defroster is on.

●Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned off.

●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug may

overheat or the internal temperature

fuse may open.

●When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

2nd Row

LIC2407

Instruments and controls 2-49

The extended storage switch is used when the

vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is located in

the fuse panel to the left of the steering wheel on

the instrument panel. If any electrical equipment

does not operate, ensure the extended storage

switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.

LDI2758

Pulled position

LIC3266

Pushed position

LIC3268

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

2-50 Instruments and controls

SEATBACK POCKETS

There is one seatback pocket located on the

back of the driver and passenger seats. The

pockets can be used to store maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the passen-

ger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System,

please observe the following items:

●Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint/headrest.

●Do not place heavy loads heavier than

2.2 lbs. (1 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

STORAGE TRAYS

WARNING

Do not place sharp objects in the trays to

help prevent injury in an accident or sud-

den stop.

LIC2618

Front console

LIC3282

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-51

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the

master key when locking 䊊

1or unlocking 䊊

2the

glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving to

help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

To open the console box, press in on the lever 䊊

and raise the lid 䊊

To close, push the lid down until the lock latches.

Upper half

Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the

upper half of the console box.

The upper half of the console box may be used for

storage of cellular phones. An access hole is

provided at the front of the upper half of the

console box for a phone or iPod® cord routing to

the power outlet.

Rear armrest

LIC2214 LIC1176 LIC1026

2-52 Instruments and controls

Lower half

Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the

lower half of the console box. A power outlet is

located inside the console box and there is stor-

age for compact discs.

SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed while

driving to avoid obstructing the driver’s

view and to help prevent an accident.

CAUTION

●Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

LIC0702 LIC2312

Instruments and controls 2-53

CUP HOLDERS CAUTION

Do not recline the rear seatback when you

use the cup holders on the rear armrest.

Doing so may cause the beverages to spill

over, and if they are hot, they may scald

the passengers.

Front console

LIC3486

Rear door

LIC2395

2nd row

LIC2212

2-54 Instruments and controls

CAUTION

●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when

the cup holder is being used to prevent

spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it

can scald you or your passenger.

●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

CAUTION

●Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid

containers.

3rd row

LIC2242

Bottle holder — front

LIC2393

Bottle holder — rear

LIC2394

Instruments and controls 2-55

CARGO AREA STORAGE BIN

To access the floor storage area, push down 䊊

to raise the handle, then pull up on the handle to

lift the luggage board.

LUGGAGE HOOKS

When securing items using luggage hooks, lo-

cated on the back of the seat or side finisher, do

not apply a load over more than 6.5 lbs (29 N) to

a single hook.

The luggage hooks that are located on the floor

should have loads less than 110 lbs (490 N) to a

single hook.

The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo

with ropes or other types of straps.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure

cargo.

●Never allow anyone to ride in the lug-

gage area. It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle.

In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any area

of your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top tether strap is damaged.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

LIC2244 LIC2208

2-56 Instruments and controls

ROOF RACK (if so equipped)

Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are avail-

able through a NISSAN dealer.

Always distribute the luggage evenly on the cross

bars. Do not load more than 150 lb (68 kg) on the

cross bars. Observe the maximum load limit

shown on the cross bars or roof carriers when

you attach them on the roof cross bars. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

crossbar or other equipment information.

Do not apply any load directly to the roof side

rails. Cross bars must be installed before apply-

ing load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle.

Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and

rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the

F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (lo-

cated on the driver’s door pillar). For additional

information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer

to “Vehicle loading information” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of this

manual.

WARNING

●Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is

loaded at or near the cargo carrying

capacity, especially if the significant

portion of that load is carried on the

cross bars.

●Heavy loading of the cross bars has the

potential to affect the vehicle stability

and handling during sudden or unusual

handling maneuvers.

●Roof rack cross bars should be evenly

distributed.

●Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross

bars load.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,

unsecured cargo could cause personal

injury.

CAUTION

Always install the cross bars onto the roof

side rails before loading cargo of any kind.

Loading cargo directly onto the roof side

rails or the vehicle’s roof may cause ve-

hicle damage.

LIC2386

Instruments and controls 2-57

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while

it is in motion and before closing the

windows. Use the window lock switch to

prevent unexpected use of the power

windows.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or for a

period of time after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s

door is opened during this period of time, the

power to the windows is canceled.

1. Window lock button

2. Power door lock switch

3. Front passenger side switch

4. Right rear passenger side switch

5. Left rear passenger side switch

6. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped with

switches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the detent

and continue to hold down until the desired win-

dow position is reached. To close a window, pull

the switch to the detent and continue to hold up

until the desired window position is reached.

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed, only

the driver’s side window can be opened or

closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock

function.

LIC3208

WINDOWS

2-58 Instruments and controls

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates only

the corresponding passenger’s window. To open

the window partially, push the switch down 䊊

lightly until the desired window position is

reached. To close the window partially, pull the

switch up 䊊

2until the desired window position is

reached.

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or close

only the corresponding windows. To open the

window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊

1.To

close the window, pull the switch up 䊊

Automatic operation (if so equipped)

To fully open a window equipped with automatic

operation, press the window switch down to the

second detent and release it; it need not be held.

The window automatically opens all the way. To

stop the window, lift the switch up while the

window is opening.

Auto-reverse function

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

a window is closed by automatic operation.

LIC2309 LIC2663 LIC0410

Instruments and controls 2-59

Depending on the environment or driving

conditions, the auto-reverse function may

be activated if an impact or load similar to

something being caught in the window oc-

curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the window.

If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, replaced,

or jump started, the power window auto-reverse

function may not operate properly. If this occurs,

please contact the dealer to re-initialize the

power window auto-reverse system.

If the control unit detects something caught in a

window equipped with automatic operation, as it

is closing, the window will be immediately low-

ered.

When power window switch does not

operate

If the power window automatic function (closing

only) does not operate properly, perform the fol-

lowing procedure to initialize the power window

system:

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Open the window more than halfway by

operating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to

close the window, and then hold the switch

more than 3 seconds after the window is

closed.

4. Release the power window switch. Operate

the window by the automatic function to

confirm the initialization is complete. The

power window automatically opens or

closes depending on if the automatic down

or up function is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other

windows.

If the power window function does not operate

properly after performing the above procedure

have the system checked and repaired. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the ignition

switch is in the ON position. The power moonroof

is operational for a period of time, even if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC or OFF

position. If the driver’s door or the front passen-

ger’s door is opened during this period of time,

the power to the moonroof is canceled.

LIC2313

DUAL PANEL MOONROOF (if so

equipped)

2-60 Instruments and controls

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push the

switch to the open 䊊

1or close 䊊

2position and

release it; it need not be held. The roof will

automatically open or close all the way. To stop

the roof, push the switch once more while it is

opening or closing.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then push the

switch to the tilt up position 䊊

1and release it; it

need not be held. To tilt down the moonroof, push

the switch to the tilt down position 䊊

Resetting the moonroof switch

If the moonroof does not operate properly, per-

form the following procedure to initialize the

moonroof operation system.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Press and hold the moonroof tilt switch for-

ward until the moonroof stops.

3. Release the moonroof switch.

4. Press and hold the tilt up switch within

6 seconds.

5. The roof glass will tilt-down, slide-close,

slide-open, slide-close, tilt-up, tilt-down.

6. Release the switch; initialization is complete

if the moonroof operates normally.

If the moonroof does not operate properly after

performing the procedure above, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Auto-reverse function (when closing or

tilting down the moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be activated when

the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-

matic operation when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position or for a period of time

after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position. Depending on the environment or

driving conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or load

similar to something being caught in the

moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof

will immediately open backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something caught in the

moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-

mediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-

peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep

pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds

after it happens; the moonroof will fully close

gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the

moonroof.

WARNING

●In an accident you could be thrown from

the vehicle through an open moonroof.

Always use seat belts and child

restraints.

●Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out of

the moonroof opening while the vehicle

is in motion or while the moonroof is

closing.

Instruments and controls 2-61

CAUTION

●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand

from the moonroof before opening.

●Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-

ward or backward.

Power sunshade

To open the sunshade, push the switch 䊊

1to-

ward the open position.

To close the sunshade, push the switch 䊊

2to-

ward the close position.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your moonroof checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When the ON switch 䊊

1is pressed, the footwell

lights (if so equipped), step lights (if so

equipped), map lights and rear personal lights

will automatically turn on and stay on for a period

of time when:

●The doors are unlocked by the Intelligent

Key, a key or the request switch (if so

equipped) while all doors are closed and the

ignition switch is in the OFF position.

●When individually pushed.

When the OFF switch 䊊

2is pushed, the interior

lights do not illuminate.

LIC2228 LIC2302

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-62 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

The footwell lights and step lights illumi-

nate when the driver and passenger doors

are open regardless of the interior light

switch position. These lights will turn off

automatically after a period of time while

doors are open to prevent the battery from

becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT

The console light will turn on whenever the park-

ing lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjusted

with the illumination brightness control.

MAP LIGHTS

Press the button to turn the map lights on. To turn

them off, press the button again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

LIC2303 LIC2304

Instruments and controls 2-63

PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn on the personal lights, push and release

the switch 䊊

To turn off the personal lights, push and release

the switch 䊊

CARGO LIGHT

The cargo light on the overhead trim has a three-

position switch. To operate, push the switch to

the desired position.

䊊

1ON: The light is illuminated.

䊊

2DOOR: The light illuminates when the lift-

gate is opened. The light turns off when the

liftgate is closed.

䊊

3OFF: The light does not illuminate regardless

of liftgate position or lock status.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could result

in a discharged battery.

LIC1413 SIC2063A

2-64 Instruments and controls

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver provides

a convenient way to consolidate the functions of

up to three individual hand-held transmitters into

one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

●Will operate most radio frequency devices

such as garage doors, gates, home and of-

fice lighting, entry door locks and security

systems.

●Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-

nected, HomeLink® will retain all program-

ming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming proce-

dures (Example: new vehicle purchases).

Upon sale of the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver buttons

should be erased for security purposes. For

additional information, refer to “Program-

ming HomeLink®” in this section.

WARNING

●Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards be-

came effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-

rage door opener which cannot detect

an object in the path of a closing garage

door and then automatically stop and

reverse, does not meet current federal

safety standards. Using a garage door

opener without these features in-

creases the risk of serious injury or

death.

●During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people or

objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

●Your vehicle’s engine should be turned

off while programming the HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver. Do not breathe

exhaust gases; they contain colorless

and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon

monoxide is dangerous. It can cause

unconsciousness or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to

the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion when programming HomeLink®. It is

also recommended that a new battery be

placed in the hand-held transmitter of the

device being programmed to HomeLink®

for quicker programming and accurate

transmission of the radio frequency.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-65

1. Position the end of your hand-held transmit-

ter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from the

HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button and

hand-held transmitter button. DO NOT re-

lease until the HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

flashes slowly and then rapidly. When the

indicator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. (The rapid flashing indi-

cates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted in

“Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers” in this sec-

tion.

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the indica-

tor light.

●If the indicator light 䊊

1is

solid/continuous, programming is

complete and your device should acti-

vate when the HomeLink® button is

pressed and released.

●If the indicator light 䊊

1blinks rapidly for

2 seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code device.

A second person may make the following

steps easier. Use a ladder or other device.

Do not stand on your vehicle to perform

the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage door

opener motor in the garage, locate the

“learn” or “smart” button (the name and color

of the button may vary by manufacturer but it

is usually located near where the hanging

antenna wire is attached to the unit). If there

is difficulty locating the button, reference the

garage door opener’s manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” but-

ton.

LIC2365 LIC2366

2-66 Instruments and controls

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press and

hold the trained HomeLink® button for

2 seconds and release. Repeat the

“press/hold/release” sequence up to three

times to complete the training process.

HomeLink® should now activate your rolling

code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having diffi-

culty programming your HomeLink® but-

tons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND

GATE OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmit-

ter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several

seconds of transmission – which may not be long

enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal

during training. Similar to this Canadian law,

some U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having difficulties

training a gate operator or garage door opener

by using the “Training” procedures, replace

“Programming HomeLink®” Step 2 with the fol-

lowing:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,

etc., unplug the device during the “cycling”

process to prevent possible damage to the

garage door opener components.

1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this sec-

tion.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button and the

hand-held transmitter button. During train-

ing, your hand-held transmitter may auto-

matically stop transmitting. Continue to

press and hold the desired HomeLink® but-

ton while you press and re-press (“cycle”)

your hand-held transmitter every 2 seconds

until the frequency signal has been learned.

The HomeLink® indicator light will flash

slowly and then rapidly after several seconds

upon successful training. DO NOT release

until the HomeLink® indicator light flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator

light flashes rapidly, both buttons may be

released. The rapid flashing indicates suc-

cessful training.

Proceed with “Programming HomeLink®”

step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the pro-

gramming procedure, remember to plug it

back in when programming is completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after it is

programmed, can be used to activate the pro-

grammed device. To operate, simply press and

release the appropriate programmed

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button. The

amber indicator light will illuminate while the sig-

nal is being transmitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the

device may also be used at any time.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

●replace the hand-held transmitter batteries

with new batteries.

Instruments and controls 2-67

●position the hand-held transmitter with its

battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

●press and hold both the HomeLink® and

hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-

ruption.

●position the hand-held transmitter1-3in

(26 - 76 mm) away from the HomeLink®

surface. Hold the transmitter in that position

for up to 15 seconds. If HomeLink® is not

programmed within that time, try holding the

transmitter in another position – keeping the

indicator light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having difficulty

programming your HomeLink® buttons, refer to

the HomeLink® web site at: www.homelink.com

or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the programmed

information from both buttons. Individual buttons

cannot be cleared. However, individual buttons

can be reprogrammed. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Reprogramming a single

HomeLink® button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins to

flash in approximately 10 seconds. Do not

hold for longer than 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming mode

and can be programmed at any time beginning

with “Programming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but-

ton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash after

20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact HomeLink®

at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515

(except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver button

has now been reprogrammed. The new device

can be activated by pushing the HomeLink®

button that was just programmed. This procedure

will not affect any other programmed HomeLink®

buttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the

codes of any non-rolling code device that has

been programmed into HomeLink®. Consult the

Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-

facturer or dealer of those devices for additional

information.

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Univer-

sal Transceiver with your new transmitter

information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

2-68 Instruments and controls

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Instruments and controls 2-69

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® . .......................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys .........3-4

Doors ............................................3-5

Locking with key................................3-5

Locking with inside lock knob ....................3-6

Locking with power door lock switch . . . ..........3-6

Automatic door locks ...........................3-6

Child safety rear door lock.......................3-7

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ...........................3-7

Operating range................................3-9

Door locks/unlocks precaution ...................3-9

NISSAN Intelligent Key® Operation .............3-10

How to use the remote keyless entry

function ......................................3-13

Warning signals ...............................3-17

Troubleshooting guide .........................3-17

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...............3-19

Remote engine start operating range . . . .........3-19

Remote starting the vehicle .....................3-19

Extending engine run time ......................3-20

Canceling a remote start .......................3-20

Conditions the remote start will not work .........3-20

Hood ...........................................3-21

Liftgate..........................................3-22

Operating the manual liftgate

(if so equipped) ...............................3-22

Operating the power liftgate (if so equipped) .....3-22

Hands-Free Liftgate (if so equipped).............3-25

Power liftgate main switch ......................3-27

Liftgate release................................3-28

Liftgate position setting ........................3-29

Fuel-filler door ...................................3-29

Opening the fuel-filler door .....................3-29

Fuel-filler cap .................................3-30

Steering wheel ...................................3-32

Manual operation (if so equipped) ...............3-32

Automatic operation (if so equipped).............3-32

Sun visors .......................................3-33

Vanity mirrors .................................3-34

Mirrors ..........................................3-34

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ...............................3-34

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ...............................3-35

Outside mirrors ...............................3-36

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) ..........3-37

Memory storage function .......................3-37

Entry/exit function .............................3-38

Setting memory function........................3-39

System operation..............................3-39

1. Two Intelligent Keys

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent

Keys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-

ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-

hicle Immobilizer System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys

must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to

use with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since

the registration process requires erasing all

memory in the Intelligent Key components when

registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent

Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.

Record the key number and keep it in a safe place

(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose

your keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key

number. NISSAN does not record key numbers

so it is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you have

lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate

from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated

without knowing the key number.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD0350

Type B (if so equipped)

WPD0427

Type C (if so equipped)

LPD2279

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 60°C (140°F).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lock

knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into

the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to

the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the

driver’s door and glove box.

Type D (if so equipped)

LPD2052 SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installed

in the Intelligent Key slot.

For additional information, refer to “Doors” in this

section and “Storage” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet, give

them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-

chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being opened

during valet hand-off, follow the procedure be-

low.

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechanical key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and

keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to “Storage” in

the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the master

or valet keys which are registered to the NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your

vehicle. These keys have a transponder chip in

the key head.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

To protect your belongings when you leave a key

with someone, give them the Intelligent Key only,

not the mechanical key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can

be duplicated without knowing the key number.

As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System keys can be used with one vehicle. You

should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for

registration. This is because the registration pro-

cess will erase the memory of all key codes

previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System. After the registration pro-

cess, these components will only recognize keys

coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem during registration. Any key that is not given

to the dealer at the time of registration will no

longer be able to start your vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system key,

which contains an electrical transponder,

to come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect system function.

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be opened

using the inside or outside door handles. The

doors must be unlocked to open the doors.

WARNING

●Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front 䊊

1of the vehicle

locks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊

2of the

vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,

returning the key to neutral 䊊

3(where the key can

only be removed and inserted) and turning it

toward the rear again 䊊

4within 5 seconds un-

locks all doors.

Opening and closing windows

The driver’s door key operation allows you to

open and close windows equipped with auto-

matic operation at the same time.

●To open the windows, turn the driver’s door

key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is unlocked.

●To close the windows, turn the driver’s door

key toward the front of the vehicle for longer

than 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

NOTE:

When the window lock button is pressed

the key will not operate the window open or

close function.

Driver’s side

LPD0461

DOORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK

KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the inside

lock knob to the lock position 䊊

1, then close the

door.

To unlock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the door

lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to

the lock position 䊊

1. When locking the door this

way, be certain not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s

side) to the unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection

When the power door lock switch is moved to the

lock position and any door is open, all doors will

lock and unlock automatically. With the Intelligent

Key left in the vehicle and any door open, all doors

will unlock automatically and a chime will sound

after the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelligent

Key from being accidentally locked inside the

vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle

speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).

●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-

nition is placed in the OFF position.

Inside lock

LPD2092 LPD2093

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors

from being opened accidentally, especially when

small children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on the

edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the LOCK position, the

door can be opened only from the outside.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and communi-

cation systems. Do not operate the In-

telligent Key while on an airplane. Make

sure the buttons are not operated unin-

tentionally when the unit is stored for a

flight.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all the

door locks using the remote control function or

pushing the request switch on the vehicle without

taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The

operating environment and/or conditions may af-

fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using the

Intelligent Key system.

CAUTION

●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with

you when operating the vehicle.

●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating with

the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-

ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.

Environmental conditions may interfere with the

operation of the Intelligent Key system under the

following operating conditions:

●When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted, such as

a TV tower, power station and broadcasting

station.

●When in possession of wireless equipment,

such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a

CB radio.

●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or

covered by metallic materials.

●When any type of radio wave remote control

is used nearby.

LPD2049

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an

electric appliance such as a personal com-

puter.

●When the vehicle is parked near a parking

meter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditions

before using the Intelligent Key function or use

the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies depending

on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is

approximately two years. If the battery is dis-

charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an indi-

cator illuminates in the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving

radio waves, if the key is left near equipment

which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-

nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-

tery life may become shorter.

For additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-

tered and used with one vehicle. For information

about the purchase and use of additional Intelli-

gent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelligent

Key:

●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply

against another object.

●Do not change or modify the Intelligent

Key.

●Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where tem-

peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a

key holder that contains a magnet.

●Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment and

personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-

gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the

unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate

the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing

procedure, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range from the request switch 䊊

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

strong radio waves are present near the operat-

ing location, the Intelligent Key operating range

becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may

not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm)

from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,

handle or rear bumper, the request switches may

not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even someone

who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the

request switch to lock/unlock the doors.

DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

●Do not push the door handle request switch

with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as

illustrated. The close distance to the door

handle will cause the Intelligent Key system

to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-

gent Key is outside the vehicle.

●After locking with the door handle request

switch, verify the doors are securely locked

by testing them.

LPD2103

WPD0375

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left

inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the

Intelligent Key with you and then lock the

doors.

●Do not pull the door handle before pushing

the door handle request switch. The door

will be unlocked but will not open. Release

the door handle once and pull it again to

open the door.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without taking

the Intelligent Key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you

can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door

handle request switch within the range of opera-

tion.

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position,

place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion and make sure you carry the Intelligent

Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch while

carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the rear liftgate will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and

the outside buzzer sounds once.

LPD2104 LPD2465

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

●Request switches for all doors and lift-

gate can be deactivated when the I-Key

Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in

the vehicle settings of the vehicle infor-

mation display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

●Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch while the ignition switch

is not in the LOCK position.

●Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is

open. However, doors lock with the

mechanical key even if any door is

open.

●Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch with the Intelligent Key

inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to

warn you. However, when an Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be

locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

●After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the doors

have been securely locked by operating

the door handles or the rear liftgate

opener switch.

●When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

●The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-

dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection

is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doors

are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put

inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;

the lock will automatically unlock and the door

buzzer sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-

ating the request switch to lock the door.

Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or

your other hand.

LPD2106

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not function

under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch.

3. The hazard indicator lights flash once and

the outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch again

within 1 minute to unlock all doors.

For power liftgate opening:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Press the power liftgate request switch.

NOTE:

Request switches for all doors and liftgate

can be deactivated when the I-Key Door Lock

setting is switched to OFF in the vehicle

settings of the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the

doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning

the door handle to its original position will unlock

the door. If the door does not unlock after return-

ing the door handle, push the door handle re-

quest switch to unlock the door.

LPD2465 LPD2106

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

1 minute after pushing the request switch.

●Opening any door.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a period of

time when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following operations:

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the remote control.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

●Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF

position in vehicle settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls”section of this

manual.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can operate all

door locks using the remote keyless function of

the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function

can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away

from the vehicle. The operating distance de-

pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-

tion under the following conditions:

●When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

●When the doors or the rear liftgate are open

or not closed securely.

●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice and

the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

WPD0359

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-

gent Key, be sure that the doors have been

securely locked by operating the door

handles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The hazard indicator lights flash once.

3. Press the button again within 5 sec-

onds to unlock all doors.

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be changed in

Selective door unlock in the vehicle set-

tings of the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

All doors will be locked automatically unless one

of the following operations is performed within

1 minute after pressing the button:

●Opening any doors.

●Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of time

when a door is unlocked and the room light

switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting by

performing one of the following operations:

●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-

tion.

●Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.

●Switching the room light switch to the OFF

position.

●Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the OFF

position in vehicle settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls”section of this

manual.

WPD0360

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Opening windows

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultaneously

open windows equipped with automatic opera-

tion.

●To open the windows, press the but-

ton on the Intelligent Key for longer than

3 seconds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressing

the button on the Intelligent Key.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the Intelligent Key.

Releasing the rear liftgate (if so

equipped)

The rear liftgate can be opened and closed by

performing the following:

●Press the button for longer than

0.5 seconds to open the rear liftgate.

●Press the button again for longer than

0.5 seconds to close the rear liftgate.

When the button is pressed during the

open or close process, the liftgate motors will

stop. When the button is pressed again,

the liftgate will reverse direction.

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,

you may activate the panic alarm to call attention

by pressing and holding the button on the

Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for a

period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

●It has run for a period of time, or

●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.

●The request switch on the driver or passen-

ger door is pushed and the Intelligent Key is

in range of the door handle.

WPD0414 LPD2271

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Linking the key fob to automatic drive

positioner memory (if so equipped)

If the vehicle is equipped with automatic drive

positioner, the key fob can be linked to a memory

setting.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in this section.

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature can be

deactivated using the Intelligent Key. When it is

deactivated and the LOCK button is

pushed, the hazard indicator lights flash twice.

When the UNLOCK button is pushed, nei-

ther the hazard indicator lights nor the horn op-

erates.

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the Intelligent Key,

the vehicle information display screen will

show the current mode after the ignition

switch has been cycled from the OFF to the

ON position. The vehicle information dis-

play screen can also be used to change the

answer back horn mode.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three times to

confirm that the answer back horn feature has

been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds once

more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once and the

horn will sound once to confirm that the horn

beep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-

lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WPD0362

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-

pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent

Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being

stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and

outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in

the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is

displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the

Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to the “Trouble-

shooting guide” in this section and “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are

programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent

Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle

system may respond differently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engine

The Shift to Park warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

When shifting the shift lever to the P (Park)

position

The Push ignition to OFF warning appears

in the display.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get out

of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears on the

display and the inside warning chime

sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door after getting out of

the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears on

the display, the outside chime sounds three

times and the inside warning chime sounds

for approximately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The Shift to Park warning appears on the

display and the outside chime sounds

continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC position

and the shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position

and place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door with the inside lock

knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approximately

3 seconds and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle request

switch or the LOCK button on the Intelli-

gent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approximately

2 seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to start

the engine

The Intelligent Key battery indicator appears

on the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one. For

additional information, refer to “Battery re-

placement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

The No Key Detected warning appears on

the display, the outside chime sounds three

times and the inside warning chime sounds

for approximately 3 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the ignition switch

The Intelligent Key system warning mes-

sage in the vehicle information display

appears.

It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent

Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The button will be on the NISSAN Intelli-

gent Key® if the vehicle has remote engine start.

This feature allows the engine to start from out-

side the vehicle.

The following features may be affected when the

remote start feature is used:

●Vehicles with manual or automatic climate

control systems will default to the last used

heating or cooling mode. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Remote start logic” in the

“Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems” section of this manual.

●Vehicles equipped with heated seats may

have this feature come on during a remote

start. For additional information, refer to

“Heated seats” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Laws in some local communities may restrict the

use of remote starters. For example, some laws

require a person using remote start to have the

vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any

requirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of the

Remote Engine Start feature. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Conditions the remote start will

not work” in this section.

Other conditions can affect the performance of

the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional in-

formation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

The remote engine start function can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the speci-

fied operating range from the vehicle.

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or

other strong radio waves sources are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent Key

operating range becomes narrower, and the In-

telligent Key may not function properly.

The remote engine start operating range is ap-

proximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the remote start feature to start the engine

perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the LOCK button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold the

remote start button until the turn signal lights

flash and the tail lamps turn on. If the vehicle

is not within view press and hold the

remote start button for at least 2 seconds.

The following events will occur when the engine

starts:

●The parking lights will turn on and remain on

as long as the engine is running.

●The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.

●The engine will continue to run for 10 min-

utes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for

an additional 10 minutes. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Extending engine run

time” in this section.

LPD2060

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

Depress and hold the brake then press the push-

button ignition switch to the ON position before

driving. For additional information, refer to “Driv-

ing the vehicle” in the “Starting and driving” sec-

tion of this manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The remote start feature can be extended one

time by performing the steps listed in “Remote

starting the vehicle” in this section. Run time will

be calculated as follows:

●The first 10 minute run time will start when

the remote start function is performed.

●The second 10 minutes will start immedi-

ately when the remote start function is per-

formed again. For example, if the engine has

been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes

are added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

●Extending engine run time will count towards

the two remote start limit.

A maximum of two remote starts, or a single start

with an extension, are allowed between ignition

cycles.

The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON

position and then back to the OFF position be-

fore the remote start procedure can be used

again.

CANCELING A REMOTE START

To cancel a remote start, perform one of the

following:

●Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle and

press until the parking lights turn off.

●Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

●Cycle the ignition switch ON and then OFF.

●The extended engine run time has expired.

●The first 10 minute timer has expired.

●The engine hood has been opened.

●The shift lever is moved out of park.

●The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the

vehicle.

●The ignition switch is pushed without an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

●The ignition switch is pushed with an Intelli-

gent Key in the vehicle but the brake pedal is

not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE START

WILL NOT WORK

The remote start will not operate if any of the

following conditions are present:

●The ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition.

●The hood is not securely closed.

●The hazard indicator lights are on.

●The engine is still running. The engine must

be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 sec-

onds if the engine goes from running to off.

This is not applicable when extending en-

gine run time.

●The remote start button is not pressed

and held for at least 2 seconds.

●The remote start button is not pressed

and held within 5 seconds of pressing the

lock button.

●The brake is pressed.

●The doors are not closed and locked.

●The liftgate is open.

●The I–Key indicator message is displayed in

the vehicle information display.

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

●The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the

vehicle.

●Two remote vehicle starts, or a single remote

start with an extension, have already been

used.

●The vehicle is not in P (Park).

●There is a detected registered key already

inside of the vehicle.

●The remote start function has been switched

to the OFF position in vehicle settings of the

vehicle information display. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

The remote engine start may display a warning or

indicator in the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle informa-

tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

1located

below the driver side instrument panel. The

hood will spring up slightly.

2. Push the lever 䊊

2at the front of the hood to

the side as illustrated with your fingertips

3. Raise the hood 䊊

4. Remove the support rod and insert into the

slot 䊊

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and make

sure it locks into place.

WARNING

●Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. Fail-

ure to do so could cause the hood to fly

open and result in an accident.

●If you see steam or smoke coming from

the engine compartment, to avoid injury

do not open the hood.

LPD2268

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

WARNING

●Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from open-

ing while driving.

●Do not drive with the liftgate open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Exhaust

gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren, people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your

vehicle. Additionally, the temperature

inside a closed vehicle on a warm day

can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

●Always be sure that hands and feet are

clear of the door frame to avoid injury

while closing the liftgate.

OPERATING THE MANUAL

LIFTGATE (if so equipped)

The power door lock system allows you to lock or

unlock all doors including the liftgate simultane-

ously.

To open the liftgate, press the request switch 䊊

and pull up on the handle.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-

curely.

OPERATING THE POWER LIFTGATE

(if so equipped)

WARNING

●Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle be-

fore closing the liftgate.

●Do not leave children unattended inside

the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-

tivate switches or controls. Unattended

children could become involved in seri-

ous accidents.

LPD2274

LIFTGATE

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

To open, close or reverse the power liftgate,

the shift lever must be in P (Park). Also, the

power liftgate will not operate if battery

voltage is low.

Power Open:

The power liftgate automatically moves from the

fully closed position to the fully open position in

approximately5–8seconds. The power open

feature can be activated by the switch on the key

fob, the instrument panel switch or the liftgate

open switch. A chime sounds to indicate the

power open sequence has been started.

●When the vehicle is locked, the liftgate can

be opened by the instrument panel switch,

key fob or liftgate opener switch 䊊

A(with key

fob in liftgate range). The liftgate will indi-

vidually unlock and open. Once the liftgate is

closed, the vehicle will remain in the unlock

status.

●The key fob button must be held for 0.5 sec-

onds before the liftgate opens.

●The liftgate must be unlocked to open it with

the liftgate opener switch 䊊

Aand without

key fob in liftgate range.

●The switch on the liftgate 䊊

Acan only be

used to open the liftgate if the MAIN switch

(located in the Instrument panel) is in the ON

position.

A warning chime will sound if the shift lever is

moved out of P (Park) during a power open

operation.

Instrument panel switch

LPD2212

Liftgate opener switch

LPD2109

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

Power Close:

The power liftgate automatically moves from the

fully open position to the secondary position.

When the liftgate reaches the secondary posi-

tion, the cinching motor engages and pulls the

liftgate to its primary latch position. Power close

takes approximately7–10seconds. The power

close feature can be activated by the switch on

the key fob, the instrument panel or the liftgate

switch 䊊

B. A chime sounds to indicate the power

close sequence has been started.

●If the liftgate opener switch 䊊

Ais activated

while the cinching motor is engaged, the

cinching motor will disengage and release

the latch.

●The key fob button must be held for 0.5 sec-

onds before the liftgate closes.

●The switch on the liftgate 䊊

Bcan only be

used to close the liftgate if the power liftgate

main switch is in the ON position.

Stop - Reverse:

During an open/close movement, the liftgate can

be stopped, if the Intelligent Key, instrument

panel or liftgate switch (䊊

Aor 䊊

B) is pressed. The

liftgate can be reversed if the Intelligent Key,

instrument panel or liftgate switch (䊊

Aor 䊊

B)is

pressed again.

Auto Reverse:

If an obstacle is detected during power open or

power close, a warning chime will sound and the

liftgate will reverse direction and return to the full

open or full close position. If a second obstacle is

detected, the liftgate motion will stop and the

liftgate will enter manual mode.

A pinch strip is mounted on each side of the

liftgate. If an obstacle is detected by a pinch strip

during power close, the liftgate will reverse direc-

tion and return to the full open position.

NOTE:

If the pinch strip is damaged or removed,

the power close function will not operate.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-

ately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., inside

the vehicle before closing the liftgate.

LPD2275

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Manual Mode:

If power operation is not available, the liftgate

may be operated manually. Power operation may

not be available if the power liftgate main switch

is in the ON position, if multiple obstacles have

been detected in a single power cycle, or if

battery voltage is low.

If the power liftgate opener switch 䊊

Ais pushed

during power open or close, the power operation

will be canceled and the liftgate can be operated

manually.

To open the liftgate manually, press the liftgate

opener switch 䊊

Aand lift the liftgate.

To close, lower and push the liftgate down se-

curely.

HANDS-FREE LIFTGATE (if so

equipped)

The liftgate can be opened/closed using a foot

kicking motion when it is locked or unlocked. Two

sensors along the rear bumper (center area) can

detect a forward kicking motion 䊊

B. The Intelli-

gent Key must be present within 3 ft (1 m) of the

liftgate to allow using the hands free feature to

open/close the liftgate.

LPD2274 LPD2455

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

NOTE:

To achieve proper motion activation, kick

within the kicking zone 䊊

A2 ft (60 cm).

Improper kicking either from side to side

䊊

Cor at angles 䊊

Dwill not open/close the

liftgate.

CAUTION

Before performing the kicking motion,

steady your stance to prevent any loss off

balance. Also, while making the kicking

motion, take caution around hot exhaust

system parts. Otherwise, there may be

danger of injury.

While positioned at the rear of the vehicle (cen-

ter) at arms’ length distance away, begin making

the forward kicking motion. Kick the foot under

the rear bumper then immediately return the foot

back to standing position. The kicking motion

should be straight, smooth and consistent. Your

leg does not need to touch the bumper surface

but be within 3/4 inch (2 cm) to 4 inches (10 cm)

of the bumper surface. After your kick motion is

completed step back to allow the liftgate to

open/close. The liftgate should begin moving

within 1–2 seconds after the kick. This time is

needed to verify the Intelligent Key and to validate

Example of a proper kick

LPD2484

Proper kicking zone and method

LPD2485

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

the kick motion. Kicking again within this time

frame (1–2 seconds) could cause the liftgate to

reverse or stop.

WARNING

Prevent unintentional liftgate

opening/closing. There may be conditions

when opening/closing the liftgate is not

desired. Keep the Intelligent Key out of

the range of the liftgate (3 ft or 1 m), when

washing or working around the back of

the vehicle.

CAUTION

Interference or malfunction can be caused

by parking in close proximity to radio or

satellite towers.

POWER LIFTGATE MAIN SWITCH

The power liftgate operation can be turned on or

off by the power liftgate main switch on the

instrument panel.

When the power liftgate main switch is pushed to

the OFF position, the power operation is not

available by the power liftgate switch on the

liftgate and liftgate opener switch.

Power operation is available when in the OFF

position by the instrument panel switch and the

key fob button.

Improper kicking methods

LPD2486 LPD2277

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

Hands-Free Liftgate (if so equipped) will not

function when the power liftgate main switch is

pushed in the OFF position.

LIFTGATE RELEASE

WARNING

●Always be sure the liftgate has been

closed securely to prevent it from open-

ing while driving.

●Do not drive with the liftgate open. This

could allow dangerous exhaust gases

to be drawn into the vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Exhaust

gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

●To avoid personal injury, do not attempt

to activate the power liftgate if one or

both of the liftgate struts are removed.

CAUTION

●If the power liftgate does not stay open

or if the liftgate unexpectedly closes at

any time while a continuous warning

chime sounds, do not operate the lift-

gate. There may be a pressure loss in

one or both of the liftgate struts. It is

recommended that you have the liftgate

inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Do not activate the power liftgate if one

or both of the liftgate struts are re-

moved. Damage to the liftgate or power

liftgate mechanisms may occur.

●Keep the power liftgate main switch in

the OFF position when washing or

working around the back of the vehicle

(with Intelligent Key) to prevent inad-

vertent opening/closing.

Manual liftgate release (if so equipped)

If the liftgate cannot be locked or unlocked with

the door lock switch or the key fob due to a

discharged battery, follow these steps:

1. Remove the cover 䊊

Aon the inside of the

liftgate.

2. Move the lever 䊊

Bas illustrated to open the

liftgate.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible for repair.

SPA2778

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Power liftgate release (if so equipped)

If the liftgate cannot be opened with the instru-

ment panel switch, liftgate opener switch or key

fob due to a discharged battery, follow these

steps:

1. Remove the cover 䊊

Aon the inside of the

liftgate.

2. Move the lever 䊊

Bas illustrated to open the

liftgate.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible for repair.

LIFTGATE POSITION SETTING

The liftgate can be set to open to a specific height

by performing the following:

1. Open the liftgate using the request switch or

the Intelligent Key.

2. Pull the liftgate down to the desired position

and hold the liftgate (the liftgate will have

some resistance when being manually ad-

justed).

3. While holding the liftgate in position, press

and hold the liftgate switch located

on the liftgate for approximately 5 seconds

or until three beeps are heard.

The liftgate will open to the selected position

setting. To change the position of the liftgate,

repeat Steps 1-3 for setting the position of the

liftgate.

OPENING THE FUEL-FILLER DOOR

The fuel-filler door automatically unlocks when

the driver’s door is unlocked.

1. Unlock the fuel-filler door using one of the

following operations:

●Unlock the driver’s door with the key fob.

●Unlock the driver’s door with the key.

●Push the power door lock switch to the

unlock position.

●Push the door handle request switch

(with the key fob in range).

SPA2778 LPD2110

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

2. To open the fuel-filler door, push the right

side of the fuel-filler door to release.

To lock, close the fuel-filler door securely and

lock the doors.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

●Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seriously

injured if it is misused or mishandled.

Always stop the engine and do not

smoke or allow open flames or sparks

near the vehicle when refueling.

●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling may

cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel

spray and possibly a fire.

●Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a

built-in safety valve needed for proper

operation of the fuel system and emis-

sion control system. An incorrect cap

can result in a serious malfunction and

possible injury. It could also cause

the Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL) to come on.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to

attempt to start your vehicle.

●Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable fuel

containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are fill-

ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-

tainers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. For additional information, re-

fer to “Fuel recommendation” in the

“Technical and consumer information”

section of this manual.

●The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning mes-

sage will be displayed/warning will ap-

pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly

tightened. It may take a few driving trips

for the message to be displayed. Failure

to tighten the fuel-filler cap properly

after the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

message is displayed/warning appears

may cause the Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

●Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL) to illuminate.

If the light illuminates because

the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,

tighten or install the cap and continue

to drive the vehicle. The light

should turn off after a few driving trips.

If the light does not turn off after a

few driving trips, have the vehicle in-

spected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to

remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊

while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-

filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning

The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the

vehicle information display when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has

been refueled. It may take a few driving trips for

the message to be displayed. To turn off the

warning, perform the following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon

as possible. For additional information, refer

to “Fuel-filler cap” in this section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

3. Press the button 䊊

Aon the steering

wheel for about 1 second to turn off the

LOOSE FUEL CAP warning 䊊

Bafter tight-

ening the fuel-filler cap.

LPD2082 LPD2066

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

WARNING

●Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

●Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and comfort.

The driver’s air bag inflates with great

force. If you are unrestrained, leaning

forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-

tion in any way, you are at greater risk of

injury or death in a crash. You may also

receive serious or fatal injuries from the

air bag if you are up against it when it

inflates. Always sit back against the

seatback and as far away as practical

from the steering wheel. Always use the

seat belts.

MANUAL OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

Pull the lock lever 䊊

1down:

●Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired position.

●Adjust the steering wheel forward or back-

ward in direction 䊊

3to the desired position.

Push the lock lever 䊊

1up firmly to lock the

steering wheel in place.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if so

equipped)

Tilt and telescopic operation

To adjust the steering wheel move the switch 䊊

in the following directions:

●Adjust the steering wheel up or down in

direction 䊊

2to the desired tilt position.

●Adjust the steering wheel forward or back-

ward in direction 䊊

3to the desired tele-

scopic position.

LPD2111 LPD2410

STEERING WHEEL

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

CAUTION

For vehicles with automatic drive posi-

tioner: Failure to reset the tilt and tele-

scoping functions of the steering wheel,

after the vehicle’s battery has been dis-

charged, may prevent the steering wheel

position from being adjusted.

For vehicles with automatic drive positioner: Both

the tilt and telescopic steering operation must be

reset after the vehicle’s battery has been dis-

charged in order to prevent the tilt and telescopic

operation from locking in one position. When the

battery has been recharged or replaced, perform

the following:

●For tilt operation: Adjust the switch 䊊

1so

the steering wheel moves to the highest

position 䊊

2that can be reached.

●For telescopic operation: Adjust the switch

䊊

1so the steering wheel moves to the most

forward and backward position 䊊

3that can

be reached.

Performing these operations resets the range of

the steering wheel’s tilt and telescopic function.

Entry/Exit function (if so equipped)

The automatic drive positioner system will make

the steering wheel move up automatically when

the driver’s door is opened and the ignition

switch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driver

get into and out of the seat more easily. The

steering wheel moves back into position when

the driver’s door is closed and the ignition switch

is pushed.

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in this section.

WPD0297

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

1. To block glare from the front, swing down

the sun visor 䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun

visor from the center mount and swing the

visor to the side 䊊

3. Slide the extension 䊊

3sun visor in or out as

needed.

CAUTION

●Do not store the sun visor before return-

ing the extension to its original

position.

●Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-

ibly downward. VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor

down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity

mirrors are illuminated (if so equipped) and turn

on when the mirror cover is open.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position 䊊

1to reduce glare from

the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in daylight

hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.

LPD2067 WPD0126

MIRRORS

3-34 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-

cally dims during night time conditions and ac-

cording to the intensity of the headlights of the

vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare

feature is activated when the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensors

䊊

1or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.

Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the

sensors, resulting in improper operation. Type A and Type B (if so equipped)

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when the

automatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

●the O button for inside mirrors without

compass.

●the button for inside mirrors with

compass.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,

press:

●the | button for inside mirrors without

compass.

●the button for inside mirrors with

compass.

The indicator light will turn on.

For additional information on HomeLink® Univer-

sal Transceiver (if so equipped) operation, refer

to “HomeLink® Universal Transceiver” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this manual.

For additional information on the compass dis-

play 䊊

3(if so equipped), refer to “Compass dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” section of

this manual.

Type A - Without compass (if so equipped)

LPD0469

Type B - With compass (if so equipped)

LPD2419

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-35

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operate

only when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the left or right

mirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired position

using the large switch 䊊

WARNING

●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on

the passenger side are closer than they

appear. Be careful when moving to the

right. Using only this mirror could cause

an accident. Use the inside mirror or

glance over your shoulder to properly

judge distances to other objects.

●Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

You could lose control of your vehicle

and cause an accident.

Manual folding outside mirrors

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if so

equipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn both out-

side mirror surfaces downward to provide better

rear visibility close to the vehicle when the mirror

control switch is in either the L or R position.

The mirrors automatically return to their original

position when you shift out of R (Reverse).

LPD2452 LPD2112

3-36 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The outside mirror surfaces will return to their

original position when one of the following con-

ditions has occurred:

●The shift lever is moved to any position other

than R (Reverse).

●The outside mirror control switch is set to the

neutral or center position.

●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in the

“center” position, the mirror surface will

NOT turn downward when the shift lever is

moved to R (Reverse).

For additional information, refer to “Automatic

drive positioner” in this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,

defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Rear window and

outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch”

in the “Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

The automatic drive positioner system has two

features:

●Memory storage function

●Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering col-

umn (if so equipped), and outside mirrors can be

stored in the automatic drive positioner memory.

Follow these procedures to use the memory sys-

tem.

1. Place the ignition in the ON or ACC position

(the vehicle should be stopped while setting

the memory).

2. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column (if

so equipped), and outside mirrors to the

desired positions by manually operating

each adjusting switch. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Seats” in the “Safety—

LPD2508

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (if

so equipped)

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-37

Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual, and

“Tilt/Telescopic Steering” and “Outside mir-

rors” in this section.

3. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,

push the memory switch (1 or 2).

4. The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come ON and stay ON for ap-

proximately 5 seconds.

5. The chime will sound if the memory has been

stored.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

same memory switch, the previous memory

position will be overwritten by the new

stored position.

Confirming memory storage

Push the SET switch.

●If a memory position has not been stored in

the switch (1 or 2) the indicator light for the

respective switch will come ON for approxi-

mately 0.5 seconds.

●If a memory position has been stored in the

switch (1 or 2) then the indicator light for the

respective switch will stay ON for approxi-

mately 5 seconds.

Linking a key fob to a stored memory

position

Each key fob can be linked to a stored memory

position (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-

ing procedure.

1. Follow steps 1-3 in the “Memory Storage

Function” section for storing the memory

position.

2. The indicator light for the pushed memory

switch will come ON. While the indicator

light is ON for 5 seconds, press the

button on the key fob. The indicator light of

the linked memory switch will blink. After the

indicator light goes off, the key fob is linked

to that memory setting.

Once it is linked, when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position, pressing the

button on the key fob will move the driver’s seat,

steering wheel and outside mirrors to the linked

memory switch position.

NOTE:

If a NEW memory position is stored in the

linked memory switch, then the key fob will

link the NEW position and overwrites the

previous position.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seat

and automatic operation steering column will au-

tomatically move when the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position. This allows the driver to get into

and out of the driver’s seat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and the

steering column will move up:

●When the driver’s door is opened with the

ignition switch placed in the OFF position.

●When the ignition switch is changed from

ACC to OFF with the driver’s door open.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return to

the previous position:

●When the ignition switch is changed from

ACC or ON while the shift lever is in the P

(Park) position.

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-

celed through the vehicle settings in the vehicle

information display by performing the following:

●Switch the Exit Seat Slide from ON to OFF.

3-38 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

●Switch the Exit Steering UP from ON to

OFF.

Restarting the entry/exit function

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse

opens, the stored memory positions will be lost

and some of the functions will be restricted:

1. Drive the vehicle over 25 mph (40 km/h).

2. Open and close the driver’s door more than

two times with the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.

SETTING MEMORY FUNCTION

The position of the following settings can be

linked to the Intelligent Key and the memorized

settings can be available for each Intelligent Key.

●Climate control system

●Navigation system (if so equipped)

●Audio system

To use the memory function, set the climate,

navigation and audio systems to the driver’s pre-

ferred settings. Lock the doors with the Intelligent

Key. Each Intelligent Key may be set with the

driver’s individual preferences. When a new In-

telligent Key is used, “Connection with the key

has been done” will be displayed on the screen

and the memorized settings are available.

To engage the memorized settings, perform the

following:

1. Carry the Intelligent Key that is linked to the

memorized settings.

2. Unlock the doors by pushing the driver’s

door handle request switch or the

UNLOCK button on the Intelligent

Key.

3. Place the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion. The settings linked to the Intelligent Key

will start.

For additional information, refer to “Heater and air

conditioner (automatic)” in the “Monitor, climate,

audio, phone and voice recognition systems”

section of this manual.

For additional information on using the Naviga-

tion System, refer to the separate Navigation

System Owner’s Manual.

For additional information on using the Audio

system, refer to “Audio system” in the “Monitor,

climate, audio, phone and voice recognition sys-

tems” section of this manual.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The automatic drive positioner system will not

work or will stop operating under the following

conditions:

●When the vehicle speed is above 0 mph

(0 km/h) or 4 mph (7km/h) for some limited

functions such as linking a key fob to the

meter when the power source is turned on

from off or during the Exit function.

●When any of the memory switches are

pushed while the automatic drive positioner

is operating.

●When the adjusting switch for the driver’s

seat and steering column is turned on while

the automatic drive positioner is operating.

●When the seat has already been moved to

the memorized position.

●When no seat position is stored in the

memory switch.

●When the shift lever is moved from P (Park)

to any other position.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-39

MEMO

3-40 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice

recognition systems

Safety Precautions.................................4-4

Center Multi-Function Control Panel .................4-5

Control panel ..................................4-6

Multi-function controller .........................4-7

Steering wheel switch...........................4-8

Touch Panel Operation..........................4-9

Operating menu screens .......................4-11

Scrolling list or message .......................4-11

Selecting item.................................4-11

Adjusting settings .............................4-12

Character (letters and numbers) input

screen .......................................4-12

System status screen ..........................4-13

Information and Settings ..........................4-14

Information screen .............................4-14

Settings screen ...............................4-15

RearView Monitor (if so equipped)..................4-20

RearView Monitor system operation .............4-21

How to read the displayed lines .................4-21

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-22

How to park with predicted course lines..........4-23

Adjusting the screen ...........................4-25

How to turn on and off predicted course

lines .........................................4-25

RearView Monitor system limitations .............4-25

System maintenance...........................4-26

Around View® Monitor (if so equipped) .............4-27

Around View® Monitor system operation.........4-28

Difference between predicted and actual

distances .....................................4-31

How to park with predicted course lines..........4-33

How to switch the display ......................4-34

Adjusting the screen ...........................4-35

Around View® Monitor system limitations ........4-35

System maintenance...........................4-37

Camera Aiding Sonar (parking sensor)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-38

Sonar System Operation .......................4-39

Turning ON and OFF the sonar function..........4-39

Sonar System Limitations.......................4-40

System Maintenance...........................4-41

Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) ....4-42

MOD system operation.........................4-43

Turning MOD on and off........................4-44

MOD system limitations ........................4-44

System maintenance...........................4-45

Vents ...........................................4-46

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-47

Automatic operation ...........................4-48

Manual operation ..............................4-49

Operating tips.................................4-49

Rear automatic air conditioning system. . .........4-50

Servicing air conditioner...........................4-53

Audio system ....................................4-53

Audio operation precautions ....................4-53

Names and functions of audio control

buttons.......................................4-67

Antenna ......................................4-69

Audio main operation ..........................4-69

Radio ........................................4-71

Compact Disc (CD) player .....................4-75

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port ......4-77

iPod® player..................................4-79

Bluetooth® streaming audio ....................4-82

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player...............4-85

Auxiliary (AUX) devices.........................4-87

Mobile entertainment system (MES)

(if so equipped) ..................................4-88

Precautions ...................................4-88

Technical information ..........................4-89

Connecting rear media interface.................4-97

Remote controller and headphones..............4-98

Activating rear displays........................4-102

Operations on rear displays....................4-103

Settings and information.......................4-104

Controlling the rear system on the front

display ......................................4-106

Operating tips................................4-107

Care and maintenance ........................4-108

Audio settings................................4-108

Disc/USB memory device care and cleaning.....4-112

Gracenote® end user license agreement........4-112

Car phone or CB radio ...........................4-113

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ............4-114

Regulatory information ........................4-116

Phone.......................................4-117

Hands-free text messaging assistant............4-120

Phone and text message settings...............4-125

Bluetooth® information .......................4-129

NissanConnect

Mobile Apps ...................4-130

NissanConnect

Mobile Apps overview........4-130

Using applications ............................4-130

Vehicle Apps.................................4-131

Mobile Apps (if so equipped) ..................4-137

Voice Recognition System........................4-139

Using Voice Recognition system ...............4-139

Before starting ...............................4-139

Giving voice commands .......................4-139

Voice recognition settings .....................4-148

Troubleshooting guide ...........................4-148

Customer assistance .........................4-148

System unit ..................................4-149

Audio system ................................4-150

Bluetooth® hands-free phone system...........4-155

Voice Recognition ............................4-157

Additional system information .....................4-159

Additional help ...............................4-160

WARNING

●Do not adjust the heater and the air

conditioner controls or audio controls

while driving so that full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

●Do not use this system if you notice any

abnormality, such as a frozen screen or

lack of sound. Continued use of the

system may result in accident, fire or

electric shock.

●If you notice any foreign objects enter-

ing the system hardware, spilled liquid

on the system, or notice smoke or

fumes coming out from the system, or

any other unusual operation is ob-

served, stop using the system immedi-

ately. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for service. Ignoring

such conditions may lead to an acci-

dent, fire or electric shock.

●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-

tem. If you do, it may lead to an acci-

dent, fire, or electric shock.

●Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake to view the im-

ages on the front center display screen.

CAUTION

Do not use the system when the engine is

not running for extended periods of time

to prevent battery discharge.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Models with navigations system

JNB0461X

CENTER MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROL

PANEL

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

CONTROL PANEL

䊊

1CLIMATE button

For additional information, refer to “Heater

and air conditioner” in this section.

䊊

2CAMERA button (models with Around

View® Monitor)

Push to display Around View® Monitor.

For additional information, refer to “Around

View® Monitor” in this section.

Push and hold the CAMERA button to turn

the display on and off.

button (models without Around

View® Monitor):

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® hands-free phone system” in

this section.

䊊

3APPS button

For additional information, refer to “Nissan-

Connect

Apps” in this section.

䊊

4NAVI button

For additional information, refer to the Navi-

gation System Owner’s Manual.

䊊

5Multi-function controller

Push to select an item on the screen, select

the highlighted item, or scroll the map on the

screen.

For additional information, refer to “Multi-

function controller” in this section.

䊊

6STATUS button

Push to display the current setting of the

vehicle information, air conditioner, audio

and navigation route information.

Models without navigation system

LHA4297

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

䊊

7INFO button

Push to display the information menu. For

additional information, refer to “Information

screen” in this section.

䊊

8/OFF button, +/–buttons

Push the / OFF button to

switch the display brightness to the daytime

mode or the nighttime mode, and to adjust

the display brightness level using the multi-

function controller while the indicator is dis-

played at the bottom of the screen. Push and

hold the / OFF button to turn

the display on and off.

The display brightness can also be adjusted

using the +button or -button.

䊊

9AUDIO button

Push to operate the audio system.

For additional information, refer to “Audio

main operation” in this section.

䊊

10 BACK button

Push to return to the previous screen. In a

settings screen, this button is also used to

apply the setting.

䊊

11 MAP button

For additional information, refer to the Navi-

gation System Owner’s Manual.

䊊

12 SETTING button

Push to access the system settings.

䊊

13 VOICE button

For additional information, refer to the Navi-

gation System Owner’s Manual.

MULTI-FUNCTION CONTROLLER

䊊

1ENTER button

Push to select the highlighted item on the

screen.

䊊

2Main directional buttons

Use to select an item on the screen or adjust

a setting (volume, brightness, etc.).

䊊

3Additional directional buttons (models with

navigation system)

Use to select an item on the character input

screen.

JNB0085X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

䊊

4Center dial

Turn to highlight an item on the screen or

adjust a setting.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH

䊊

1ENTER button

Tilt to highlight an item on the screen or

adjust a setting. Push to select the high-

lighted item.

䊊

2button

Push this switch to go back to the previous

screen or cancel the selection if it is not

completed.

NOTE:

You are unable to operate the display of

NissanConnect

using the buttons on the

steering wheel switch whenever the meter

shows the setting display.

䊊

3+ - button

Use to adjust the volume. These buttons

have the same function as that of the VOL

button on the audio system.

For additional information, refer to “Steering

wheel switch for audio control” in this sec-

tion.

䊊

4SOURCE button

Use to switch the audio mode (source).

For additional information, refer to “Steering

wheel switch for audio control” in this sec-

tion.

䊊

5(TALK) button

Push to start a voice recognition session.

During a voice recognition session, pushing

this button cancels the voice guidance and

you can speak a voice command immedi-

ately.

Push and hold this button to end a voice

recognition session.

JNB0462X

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

䊊

6button

Push to display the phone mode screen.

For additional information, refer to

“Bluetooth® hands-free phone system” in

this section.

䊊

7button

This button is used for the vehicle informa-

tion display operation.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display⬙in the ⬙Instruments and

controls⬙section of this manual.

TOUCH PANEL OPERATION

This system is mainly operated with the touch

panel screen.

CAUTION

●The glass screen on the display screen

may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp

object. If the glass screen breaks, do

not touch it. Doing so could result in an

injury.

●To clean the display, use a soft, dry

cloth. If additional cleaning is neces-

sary, use a small amount of neutral de-

tergent with a soft cloth. Never use a

rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or

any kind of solvent or paper towel with

a chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or deteriorate the panel.

●Do not splash any liquid such as water

or car fragrance on the display. Contact

with liquid will cause the system to

malfunction.

WARNING

●ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving.

●Avoid using vehicle features that could

distract you. If distracted, you could

lose control of your vehicle and cause

an accident.

Screen illustrations

WARNING

●The illustrations in this manual are rep-

resentatives of various models and may

not be identical with the design and

specifications of your vehicle.

●Icons and menu items displayed on the

screen may be abbreviated or omitted

from the screen illustrations when ap-

propriate. The omitted icons and menu

items are described as dotted lines as

illustrated.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

●Touch

Select and execute the selected key on the

screen.

●Swipe

Menu screen pages will skip to the next page.

●Drag

Drag scroll bar up or down to scroll the menu

screen.

JNB0463X

JNB0464X JNB0465X

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

OPERATING MENU SCREENS

䊊

1Touch the “<” key to scroll to the previous

page.

䊊

2Touch the preferred icon to execute a func-

tion and display the next screen.

䊊

3Indicates the position of the currently dis-

played page out of the total number of avail-

able pages.

䊊

4Touch the “>” key to scroll to the next page.

A swipe gesture can also be used to move

quickly between pages.

SCROLLING LIST OR MESSAGE

䊊

1Drag the scroll bar up or down to scroll the

message or list up or down.

䊊

2Touch the preferred item.

䊊

3If a listed item name is not completely dis-

played (due to length), touch the “>” key to

display the hidden part of the name.

䊊

4Touch the “ ” key or the “ ” key to

scroll the message or list one item at a time.

Touch the “ ” key or the “ ” key to

skip to the next page.

SELECTING ITEM

When an item is touched, it is executed and the

next screen is displayed.

Touch the “ ” key to return to the previous

screen.

JNB0439X JNB0451X JNB0466X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

ADJUSTING SETTINGS

Level of volume, brightness, etc. can be adjusted.

Touch the adjustment keys, such as the “+/-”

keys or the “L/R” keys, etc., to adjust each item.

Each time a key is touched, the indicator moves

along the bar.

CHARACTER (letters and numbers)

INPUT SCREEN

Alphanumeric characters are entered using the

keyboard screen.

䊊

1Touch a character on the displayed key-

board. The selected character is entered.

䊊

2Entered characters are displayed here.

䊊

3Touch the “Delete” key to delete the last

character entered.

Touch and hold the “Delete” key to delete all

the characters entered.

䊊

4The symbol keys are displayed by touching

the “Symbols” key. The alphabet keys are

displayed by touching the “A-Z” keys.

䊊

5Touch the “Space” key to enter a space.

䊊

6Touch the “OK” key or “List” key to finalize

your input.

INFO:

●Touch the “CAPS” key to toggle uppercase

and lowercase characters on the keyboard

screen.

●Touch the “ ”key or the “ ”

key to move the character input position.

JNB0467X 5GH0587X

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SYSTEM STATUS SCREEN

By pushing the STATUS button, the current sta-

tus of the system can be displayed.

INFO:

There are different status screens displayed de-

pending on various factors, such as the currently

active mode, whether a destination has been set

or not, etc.

When a route to the destination is set and the

audio system is on, a screen similar to the one

above appears.

Touching the “</>” keys can switch the display

among fuel economy information, navigation

route information (if so equipped) and air condi-

tioner status.

When no route is set, a compass and the direc-

tion of travel is displayed instead of the route

information.

JNB0443X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

INFORMATION SCREEN

The information screen sets or displays various

information that is helpful for using the vehicle.

Available items include the vehicle information,

traffic information, current location information

and navigation software version.

Push the INFO button to display the information

menu.

The displayed items vary depending on the ve-

hicle model.

Menu item Result

“Fuel Economy” key Displays the Fuel Economy screen.

The current and average fuel economy and the distance to empty (“Range” key) can be confirmed.

“History” key The Fuel Economy history screen can be scrolled.

Displays the Fuel Economy history screen. Touch the “</>” keys to display an older history or the newest history.

“Reset” key Resets the average Fuel Economy.

The average for the Reset-to-Reset period is stored as a fuel economy history.

When reset average Fuel Economy is on the screen, the average fuel consumption on the trip computer is also reset

at the same time.

“Eco Drive Report” key Displays the Eco Drive Report for “Start”/“Cruise”/“Deceleration”.

“History” key The Eco Drive Report History screen can be scrolled.

Displays the Eco Drive Report History screen. Touch the “</>” keys to display an older history or the newest history.

“Reset” key Resets the Eco Drive Report screen.

The average for the Reset-to-Reset period is stored as an Eco Drive Report history.

“Traffic Information” key Allows traffic information setup.

For additional information, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

“Map Information” key Displays the map version, software version and Navi ID.

“NissanConnect Services” key Displays the NissanConnect

Services menu.

For additional information, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

“SXM Info” key Displays the SiriusXM Travel Link Information menu.

For additional information, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

INFO:

●A SiriusXM Travel Link or SiriusXM Traffic subscription is necessary to receive SiriusXM information services.

●Use of NissanConnectSM Services features is dependent upon a valid subscription and the telematics device being in operative condition, as well as

cellular connectivity, navigation map data and GPS satellite signal reception being available.

INFORMATION AND SETTINGS

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SETTINGS SCREEN

The system can be customized to make it easier

for you to use.

The displayed items vary depending on the

equipped options.

The order of the displayed items can be sorted.

Step Menu Item Result

Push the SET-

TING button. “Bluetooth” key Sets the Bluetooth® Audio and Phone.

For additional information, refer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this section.

“Phone/Mail” key Displays the Phone/Mail setting screen.

For additional information, refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this section.

“Navigation” key Displays the Navigation setting screen.

For additional information, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

“Audio” key Displays the Audio setting screen.

For additional information, refer to “Audio settings” in this section.

“Screen” key Sets the Screen display to the preferred settings.

For additional information, refer to “Screen settings” in this section.

“Volume Adjustment” key Sets the Volume Adjustment.

For additional information, refer to “Volume settings” in this section.

“Clock” key Sets the Clock to your preferred settings.

For additional information, refer to “Clock settings” in this section.

“NissanConnect Services” key Sets NissanConnect

Services to your preferred settings.

For additional information, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.

“Voice Recognition” key Sets Minimize Voice Feedback to on/off and the audio setting for voice recognition use.

“Camera/Sonar” key Sets the Camera/Sonar to your preferred settings.

For additional information, refer to “Camera/Sonar settings” in this section.

“Other” key “Language” key Sets the language to your preferred settings.

For additional information, refer to “Language setting” in this section.

“Keyboard Type” key Sets the Keyboard Type to “ABC” key or “QWERTY” key.

“Low on Fuel Alert” key Sets the fuel low notification to on/off.

“Software Information” key Displays the Software Information.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

Clock Settings

This changes the clock settings.

Step Menu item Action

1. Push the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Clock” key.

“On-Screen Clock” key Sets the clock display on/off. When this item is on, the

clock display appears.

“Daylight Savings Time” key Toggles the setting for daylight saving time between ON or

OFF.

“Clock Format (24h)” key Toggles the clock format between 12–hour and 24–hour

times. When the indicator light illuminates, the clock is set

to the 24–hour format.

“Time Zone” key Selects an appropriate time zone from the list. When se-

lecting the “AUTO” key, the system selects the time zone

automatically.

“Offset Adjustment” key Adjusts the offset value (hour and minutes).

5GH0283X

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Language Setting

This changes the display language used in the

system.

Step Setting item Action

1. Push the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Other” key.

3. Touch the “Language” key.

“System Language” key Selects the language of the display.

INFO:

●Do not push the ignition switch while changing the language.

●If the selected language is also supported in the vehicle information display, a confirmation message asking if you would like to also change how the

meter language is displayed. Select the “Yes” key to change the language in the meter.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

Volume Settings

This turns on and off, as well as adjusts, the

volume for various functions including audio,

phone (ringer, incoming, and outgoing volumes),

navigation voice guidance, and system beeps.

Step Setting item Action

1. Push the SETTING button

2. Touch the “Volume Adjustment” key

“Audio Volume” key Adjusts the volume of the audio system.

“Voice Guidance” key Toggles the voice guidance on and off.

“Guidance Volume” key Adjusts the volume level of guidance volume .

“Ringtone Volume” key Adjusts the volume level of the ringtone.

“Incoming Call Vol.” key Adjusts the incoming call volume.

“Outgoing Call Vol.” key Adjusts the outgoing call volume.

“NissanConnect Svcs. Vol.” key Adjusts the volume level of the NissanConnect

Services

information channel.

“Sonar Volume” key Adjusts the volume level of the sonar warning volume.

“Button Beep sound” key Toggles the button beep sound and alarm for a prohibited

operation to on and off.

5GG0052X

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Screen Settings

This menu turns the display on and off and ad-

justs the image quality of the display.

Step Setting item Action

1. Push the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Screen” key.

“Display Settings” key “Brightness” key Adjusts the brightness.

“Contrast” key Adjusts the contrast.

“Black Level” key Adjusts the black level.

“Display OFF” key Turns the screen on or off.

Push and hold the CAMERA or

button for more than 2 seconds to turn the

display on.

“Day/Night” key Adjusts the display brightness. Toggle the

map color between the day screen and the

night screen.

“Change Map Color” key Toggle the map color between the day

screen and the night screen.

“Reset Settings” key This restores the display settings to the

default settings.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

1. CAMERA button (if so equipped) WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in se-

rious injury or death.

●RearView Monitor is a convenience fea-

ture and is not a substitute for proper

backing. Always turn and look out the

windows and check mirrors to be sure

that it is safe to move before operating

the vehicle. Always back up slowly.

LHA3756

REARVIEW MONITOR (if so

equipped)

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in showing large stationary ob-

jects directly behind the vehicle, to help

avoid damaging the vehicle.

●The distance guide line and the vehicle

width line should be used as a reference

only when the vehicle is on a level

paved surface. The distance viewed on

the monitor is for reference only and

may be different than the actual dis-

tance between the vehicle and dis-

played objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The RearView Monitor system automatically

shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift

lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position or

when the CAMERA button (if so equipped) is

pressed. The radio can still be heard while the

RearView Monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor

system uses a camera located just above the

vehicle’s license plate 䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press

the CAMERA button to operate the RearView

Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width

and distances to objects with reference to the

vehicle body line 䊊

Aare displayed on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

●Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

LHA3757 LHA1196

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when backing up.

The predicted course lines will be displayed on

the monitor when the shift lever is in the R (Re-

verse) position and the steering wheel is turned.

The predicted course lines will move depending

on how much the steering wheel is turned and

will not be displayed while the steering wheel is in

the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width of the

predicted course lines are wider than the actual

width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-

ing objects will be actually located at distances

different from those displayed in the monitor rela-

tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you

are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the ve-

hicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

LHA3763 LHA3764

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit

the object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course line and the actual

course line.

●If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly. If

this occurs, please perform the follow-

ing procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock to

lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

●When the steering wheel is turned with

the ignition switch in the ACC position,

the predicted course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

LHA1201 LHA3525

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is moved

to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines 䊊

Benter the parking space 䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Dparallel to the

parking space 䊊

Cwhile referring to the pre-

dicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

LHA1197 LHA1198

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,

Color, Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

Monitor, press the SETTING button with the

RearView Monitor on, touch the Camera or

Camera/Sonar key and then select the “Display”

key. Select one of the items and change the value

by touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the

NISSAN controller.

NOTE:

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,

Contrast and Black Level of the RearView

Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make

sure the parking brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF

PREDICTED COURSE LINES

To toggle on and off the predicted course lines

while in the P (Park) position:

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Touch the Camera or Camera/Sonar key.

3. Touch the Camera key.

4. Touch the Predicted Course Lines key to

turn the feature on or off.

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show ev-

ery object.

●Underneath the bumper and the corner

areas of the bumper cannot be viewed

on the RearView Monitor because of its

monitoring range limitation. The system

will not show small objects below the

bumper, and may not show objects

close to the bumper or on the ground.

●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance because

a wide-angle lens is used.

●Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

●Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle

position, road conditions and road

grade.

●Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

●Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

LHA4243

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

●When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-

function or cause damage resulting in a

fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and do not

represent a system malfunction:

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not clearly display ob-

jects.

●When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the

screen. This is due to strong reflected light

from the bumper.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-

tor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a

dark environment.

●There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

●If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the cam-

era, the RearView Monitor may not display

objects clearly. Clean the camera.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a

dry cloth.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera

䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not display ob-

jects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a

cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.

LHA3757

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. CAMERA button

LHA3758

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR (if so

equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for the proper use of the

Around View® Monitor system could

result in serious injury or death.

●The Around View® Monitor is a conve-

nience feature and is not a substitute

for proper vehicle operation because it

has areas where objects cannot be

viewed. The four corners of the vehicle

in particular, are areas where objects do

not always appear in the bird’s-eye,

front, or rear views. Always check your

surroundings to be sure that it is safe to

move before operating the vehicle. Al-

ways operate the vehicle slowly.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the

camera.

The Around View® Monitor system is designed

as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot

parking or parallel parking.

The monitor displays various views of the position

of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all

views are available at all times.

Available views:

●Front View

An approximately 150–degree view of the

front of the vehicle.

●Rear View

An approximately 150–degree view of the

rear of the vehicle.

●Bird’s-Eye View

The surrounding views of the vehicle from

above.

●Front-Side View

The view around and ahead of the front

passenger’s side wheel.

To display the multiple views, the Around View®

Monitor system uses cameras located in the front

grille, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and one

just above the vehicle’s license plate 䊊

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position, move

the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press

the CAMERA button to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

When the camera is first activated with the bird’s-

eye view in the display, a red icon (if so equipped)

will flash on the screen. This indicates that the

sonar system is activated. For additional informa-

LHA3759

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

tion on the rear sonar system, refer to “Rear

Sonar System (RSS)” in the “Starting and driv-

ing” section of this manual.

The screen displayed on the Around View®

Monitor will automatically return to the previous

screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has

been pressed with the shift lever in a position

other than the R (Reverse) position.

Available views

WARNING

●The distance guide lines and the vehicle

width lines should be used as a refer-

ence only when the vehicle is on a

paved, level surface. The apparent dis-

tance viewed on the monitor may be

different than the actual distance be-

tween the vehicle and displayed

objects.

●Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-

eye view as a reference. The lines and

the bird’s-eye view are greatly affected

by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel

level, vehicle position, road condition

and road grade.

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

and the bird’s-eye view may be dis-

played incorrectly.

●When driving the vehicle up a hill, ob-

jects viewed in the monitor are further

than they appear. When driving the ve-

hicle down a hill, objects viewed in the

monitor are closer than they appear.

●Objects in the rear view will appear vi-

sually opposite compared to when

viewed in the monitor and outside

mirrors.

●Use the mirrors or actually look to prop-

erly judge distances to other objects.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course lines and the actual

course line.

●The vehicle width and predicted course

lines are wider than the actual width

and course.

●The displayed lines will appear slightly

off to the right, because the rearview

camera is not installed in the rear center

of the vehicle.

Front and rear view

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate ve-

hicle width and distance to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare displayed on

the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body:

●Red line 䊊

1: approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

●Yellow line 䊊

2: approximately 3 ft (1 m)

●Green line 䊊

3: approximately 7 ft (2 m)

●Green line 䊊

4: approximately 10 ft (3 m)

Front view

SAA1840

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the approximate vehicle width when

backing up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

Indicate the predicted course when operating the

vehicle. The predicted course lines will be dis-

played on the monitor when the steering wheel is

turned. The predicted course lines will move de-

pending on how much the steering wheel is

turned and will not be displayed while the steer-

ing wheel is in the straight-ahead position.

The front view will not be displayed when the

vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).

NOTE:

When the monitor displays the front view

and the steering wheel turns about 90 de-

grees or less from the straight-ahead posi-

tion, both the right and left predicted

course lines 䊊

6are displayed. When the

steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or

more, a line is displayed only on the oppo-

site side of the turn.

Bird’s-eye view

The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of

the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle po-

sition and the predicted course to a parking

space.

The vehicle icon 䊊

1shows the position of the

vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between

objects viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ

somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.

The areas that the cameras cannot cover 䊊

2are

indicated in black.

Rear view

SAA1896 LHA3730

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The non-viewable area 䊊

2is highlighted in yellow

for several seconds after the bird’s-eye view is

displayed. It will be shown only the first time after

the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The driver can check the approximate direction

and angle of the tire on the display by the tire icon

䊊

3when driving the vehicle forward or backward.

WARNING

●Objects in the bird’s-eye view will ap-

pear further than the actual distance.

●Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,

may be misaligned or not displayed at

the seam of the views.

●Objects that are above the camera can-

not be displayed.

●The view of the bird’s-eye view may be

misaligned when the camera position

alters.

●A line on the ground may be misaligned

and is not seen as being straight at the

seam of the views. The misalignment

will increase as the line proceeds away

from the vehicle.

●Tire angle display does not indicate the

actual tire angle.

Front-side view

Guiding lines

Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width

and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on

the monitor.

The front-of-vehicle line 䊊

1shows the front part

of the vehicle.

The side-of-vehicle line 䊊

2shows the approxi-

mate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.

The extensions 䊊

3of both the front 䊊

1and side

䊊

2lines are shown with a green dotted line.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN

PREDICTED AND ACTUAL

DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their locations on

the ground are for approximate reference only.

Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or project-

ing objects will be actually located at distances

different from those displayed in the monitor rela-

tive to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you

are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to

view the positioning of objects behind the ve-

hicle.

LHA2652

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-

tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown closer than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is further than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide

lines are shown farther than the actual distance.

Note that any object on the hill is closer than it

appears on the monitor.

Backing up near a projecting object

The predicted course lines 䊊

Ado not touch the

object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit

the object if it projects over the actual backing up

course.

LHA3763 LHA3764 LHA1201

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Backing up behind a projecting object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the position

䊊

Bin the display. However, the position 䊊

Cis

actually at the same distance as the position 䊊

The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to

the position 䊊

Aif the object projects over the

actual backing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES

WARNING

●If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

●On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between the

predicted course line and the actual

course line.

●If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted course

lines may be displayed incorrectly. If

this occurs, please perform the follow-

ing procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock to

lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

●When the steering wheel is turned with

the ignition switch in the ACC position,

the predicted course lines may be dis-

played incorrectly.

1. Visually check that the parking space is safe

before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on

the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is moved

to the R (Reverse) position.

LHA3525 LHA1197

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the

steering wheel so that the predicted course

lines 䊊

Benter the parking space 䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make the

vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Dparallel to the

parking space 䊊

Cwhile referring to the pre-

dicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the P

(Park) position and apply the parking brake.

HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY

With the ignition switch in the ON position, press

the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position to operate the Around

View® Monitor.

The Around View® Monitor displays different

split screen views depending on the position of

the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to

switch between the available views.

If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the

available views are:

●Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Rear view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the P (Park) position, the

available views are:

●Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen

●Front view/front-side view split screen

If the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position, the

only available view is front view/front-side view

split screen.

The display will switch from the Around View®

Monitor screen when:

●The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and

the vehicle speed increases above approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h)

●A different screen is selected.

LHA1198

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

To adjust the Display ON/OFF, Brightness, Tint,

Color, Contrast and Black Level of the Around

View® Monitor, press the SETTING button with

the monitor on and select the “Display” key. Se-

lect one of the items and change the value by

touching the “+” or “-” key or by turning the

NISSAN controller.

NOTE:

Do not adjust the Brightness, Tint, Color,

Contrast and Black Level of the Around

View® Monitor while the vehicle is moving.

Make sure the parking brake is firmly ap-

plied.

AROUND VIEW® MONITOR

SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LHA4212

LHA3760

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

Around View® Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these sys-

tem limitations could result in serious in-

jury or death.

●Do not use the Around View® Monitor

with the outside mirrors in the stored

position, and make sure that the liftgate

is securely closed when operating the

vehicle using the Around View®

Monitor.

●The apparent distance between objects

viewed on the Around View® Monitor

differs from the actual distance.

●The cameras are installed on the front

grille, the outside mirrors and above the

rear license plate. Do not put anything

on the vehicle that covers the cameras.

●When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the cameras. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing wa-

ter condensation on the lens, a mal-

function, fire or an electric shock.

●Do not strike the cameras. They are

precision instruments. Doing so could

cause a malfunction or cause damage

resulting in a fire or an electric shock.

There are some areas where the system will not

show objects and the system does not warn of

moving objects. When in the front or rear view

display, an object below the bumper or on the

ground may not be viewed 䊊

1. When in the

bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam 䊊

2of

the camera viewing areas will not appear in the

monitor.

The following are operating limitations and do not

represent a system malfunction:

●There may be a delay when switching be-

tween views.

●When the temperature is extremely high or

low, the screen may not display objects

clearly.

●When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

●The screen may flicker under fluorescent

light.

●The colors of objects on the Around View®

Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual

color of objects.

●Objects on the Around View® Monitor may

not be clear and the color of the object may

differ in a dark environment.

●There may be differences in sharpness be-

tween each camera view of the bird’s-eye

view.

●Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off

any wax with a clean cloth that has been

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

System temporarily unavailable

When the “!” icon is displayed on the screen,

there are abnormal conditions in the Around

View® Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving

operation but the system should be inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When the “[X]” icon is displayed on the screen,

the camera image may be receiving temporary

electronic disturbances from surrounding de-

vices. This will not hinder normal driving opera-

tion but the system should be inspected if it

occurs frequently. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the cameras as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras 䊊

1, the Around View® Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wip-

ing with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild

cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3591 LHA3592 LHA3759

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the sonar function

as outlined in this section could result in

serious injury or death.

●The sonar is a convenience feature. It is

not a substitute for proper parking.

●This function is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large stationary

objects to help avoid damaging the

vehicle.

●The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other

maneuvers.

●Always look around and check that it is

safe to move before parking.

●Read and understand the limitations of

the sonar as contained in this section.

The sonar function helps to inform the driver of

large stationary objects around the vehicle when

parking by issuing an audible and visual alert. 1. Center display

2. CAMERA button

3. SETTING button

LHA4261

CAMERA AIDING SONAR (parking

sensor) (if so equipped)

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SONAR SYSTEM OPERATION

The system gives the tone for rear objects when

the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position.

When the camera image is shown on the center

display, the system shows the sonar indicator

regardless of the shift lever position.

The system is deactivated at speeds above

6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

The colors of the sonar indicators and the dis-

tance guide lines in the front and rear views

indicate different distances to the object.

When the objects are detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone sounds

intermittently. When the vehicle moves closer to

the object, the color of the indicator turns yellow

and the rate of the blinking and the rate of the

tone increase. When the vehicle is very close to

the object, the indicator stops blinking and turns

red, and the tone sounds continuously.

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 seconds

when an object is detected by only the corner

sonar and the distance does not change.

The tone will stop when the object is no longer

near the vehicle.

TURNING ON AND OFF THE

SONAR FUNCTION

When the Sonar key is selected, the indicator 䊊

will turn off and the sonar will be turned off

temporarily. The Moving Object Detection

(MOD) system will also be turned off at the same

time. For additional information, refer to “Moving

Object Detection (MOD) in this section. When

the Sonar key is selected again, the indicator will

turn on and the sonar will turn back on.

In the below cases, the sonar will be turned back

on automatically:

●When the shift lever is placed in the “R”

(Reverse) position.

●When the CAMERA button is pressed and a

screen other than the camera view is shown

on the display.

●When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h).

●When the ignition switch is placed in the

“OFF” position and turned back to the “ON”

position again. To prevent the sonar system

from activating altogether, use the “Camera”

menu. For additional information, refer to

“Sonar function settings” in this section.

LHA4246 LHA4247

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

Sonar function settings

To set up the sonar function to your preferred

settings, press the SETTING button, select the

“Others”key and then select the “Camera”key on

the center display.

Designs and items displayed on the screen

may vary depending on the models.

Sonar Volume: Adjust the volume of the buzzer.

Sonar: When this item is turned ON, the rear

sonar is activated. When this item is turned OFF

(indicator turns off), the rear sonar is deactivated.

The amber markers are displayed at the corners

of the vehicle icon. The next time the ignition

switch is placed in the “ON” position, “sonar is

OFF” is displayed briefly.

Towing mode: When this item is turned ON,

only the rear sonar is OFF. The amber markers are

displayed at the rear corners of the vehicle icon.

Show Camera when Sonar Activate: When

this item is turned ON, the camera view is auto-

matically shown on the display in the case that

the distance to the objects measured by the

sonar is becoming short.

Sonar Sensitivity: Adjust the sensitivity level of

the sonar higher (right) or lower (left).

SONAR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the sonar function. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car wash,

a trucks’s compressed-air brakes or a

pneumatic drill may affect the function

of the system, including reduced perfor-

mance or a false activation.

●The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

●The system will not detect small objects

below the bumper, and may not detect

objects close to the bumper or on the

ground.

●The system may not detect the follow-

ing objects:

– Fluffy objects such as snow, cloth,

cotton, grass or wool.

– Thin objects such as rope, wire or

chain.

– Wedge-shaped objects.

●If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

jects or false alarms.

CAUTION

Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window) will

interfere with the tone and it may not be

heard.

System temporarily unavailable

When the amber markers are displayed at the

corners of the vehicle icon and the function can-

not be activated from the Camera setting menu

(the setting items are grayed out), the sonar

system may be malfunctioning.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

Keep the surface of the sonar sensors

(located on the front and rear bumper fas-

cia) free from accumulations of snow, ice

and dirt. Do not scratch the surface of the

sonar sensors when cleaning. If the sen-

sors are covered, the accuracy of the sonar

function will be diminished.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

1. CAMERA button

LHA3758

MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD)

(if so equipped)

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Moving

Object Detection system could result in

serious injury or death.

●The MOD system is not a substitute for

proper vehicle operation and is not de-

signed to prevent contact with objects

surrounding the vehicle. When maneu-

vering, always use the outside mirrors

and rearview mirror and turn and check

the surroundings to ensure it is safe to

maneuver.

●The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated

at lower speeds.

●The MOD system is not designed to

detect surrounding stationary objects.

The MOD system can inform the driver of moving

objects near the vehicle when backing out of

garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other

such instances.

The MOD system detects moving objects by

using image processing technology on the image

shown in the display.

MOD SYSTEM OPERATION

The MOD system will turn on automatically under

the following conditions:

●When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position.

●When the CAMERA button is pressed to

activate the camera view on the display.

●When vehicle speed decreases below ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h) and the camera

screen is displayed.

The MOD system operates in the following con-

ditions when the camera view is displayed:

●When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N

(Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped,

the MOD system detects moving objects in

the bird’s-eye view. The MOD system will

not operate if the outside mirrors are moving

in or out, in the stowed position, or if either

front door is opened.

●When the shift lever is in the D (Drive) posi-

tion and the vehicle speed is below approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD system

detects moving objects in the front view.

Front and bird’s-eye views

LHA4190

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

●When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse)

position and the vehicle speed is below ap-

proximately 6 mph (10 km/h), the MOD sys-

tem detects moving objects in the rear view.

The MOD system will not operate if the

liftgate is open.

The MOD system does not detect moving ob-

jects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not

displayed on the screen when in this view.

When the MOD system detects moving objects

near the vehicle, a yellow frame will be displayed

on the view where the objects are detected.

While the MOD system continues to detect mov-

ing objects, the yellow frame continues to be

displayed.

NOTE:

While the RCTA chime (if so equipped) is

beeping, the MOD system does not chime.

In the bird’s-eye view, the yellow frame 䊊

1is

displayed on each camera image (front, rear,

right, left) depending on where moving objects

are detected.

The yellow frame 䊊

2is displayed on each view in

the front view and rear view modes.

A blue MOD icon 䊊

3is displayed in the view

where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD

icon is displayed in the view where the MOD

system is not operative.

If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD icon 䊊

is not displayed.

TURNING MOD ON AND OFF

1. Press the SETTING button on the control

panel

2. Touch the Camera/Sonar key

3. Select Camera

4. Touch “Moving Object Detection” to switch

between ON and OFF.

MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in

accordance with these system limitations

could result in serious injury or death.

●Do not use the MOD system when tow-

ing a trailer. The system may not func-

tion properly.

Rear and bird’s-eye views

LHA4191

Rear and front-side views

LHA4193

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume or open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

●The MOD system performance will be

limited according to environmental con-

ditions and surrounding objects such

as:

– When there is low contrast between

background and the moving objects.

– When there is a blinking source of

light.

– When strong light such as another

vehicle’s headlight or sunlight is

present.

– When camera orientation is not in its

usual position, such as when a mirror

is folded.

– When there is dirt, water drops or

snow on the camera lens.

– When the position of the moving ob-

jects in the display is not changed.

●The MOD system might detect flowing

water droplets on the camera lens,

white smoke from the muffler, moving

shadows, etc.

●The MOD system may not function

properly depending on the speed, direc-

tion, distance or shape of the moving

objects.

●If your vehicle sustains damage to the

parts where the camera is installed,

leaving it misaligned or bent, the sens-

ing zone may be altered and the MOD

system may not detect objects properly.

●When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not display

objects clearly. This is not a

malfunction.

NOTE:

The blue MOD icon will change to orange if

one of the following has occurred

●When the system is malfunctioning.

●When the component temperature reaches

a high level (icon will blink).

●When the Rear View camera has detected a

blockage (icon will blink). :

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

●Do not damage the camera as the moni-

tor screen may be adversely affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the

cameras 䊊

1, the MOD system may not operate

properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and

then wiping with a dry cloth.

LHA3759

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

Adjust air flow direction for the center vents 䊊

driver’s and passenger’s side vents 䊊

2, rear cen-

ter console vents 䊊

3, and rear passenger com-

partment vents 䊊

4by moving the vent slide

and/or vent assemblies.

Open or close the vents using the dial. Move the

dial toward the to open the vents or toward

the to close them.

LHA4178

VENTS

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Air recirculation button

2. A/C (air conditioner) ON-OFF button

3. MODE (manual air flow control) button

4. REAR (ON-OFF) button

5. DUAL (passenger’s side temperature

control) ON-OFF button/Temperature

control dial (passenger’s side)

6. Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

7. ON-OFF button/ (fan speed con-

trol) dial

8. Front defroster button

9. AUTO (automatic) climate control ON-

OFF button/Temperature control dial

(driver’s side)

WARNING

●The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the interior

air to become stale and the windows to

fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls to

activate the air conditioner.

NOTE:

●Odors from inside and outside the vehicle

can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor

can enter the passenger compartment

through the vents.

LHA4179

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic)(if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

●When parking, set the heater and air condi-

tioner controls to turn off air recirculation to

allow fresh air into the passenger compart-

ment. This should help reduce odors inside

the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating

(AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as the

system automatically works to keep a constant

temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed

are also controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on. (The indicator on

the button will illuminate and AUTO will be

displayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left

or right to set the desired temperature.

●Adjust the temperature display to about

75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

●A visible mist may be seen coming from the

vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is

cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

3. You can individually set the driver’s and front

passenger’s side temperature using each

temperature control dial. When the DUAL

button or passenger’s side temperature dial

is turned, the DUAL indicator will come on.

To turn off the passenger’s side temperature

control, press the DUAL button.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate. When you

need to heat only, use this mode.

1. If the air conditioner is on, press the A/C

button. The A/C indicator will turn off.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

●The temperature of the passenger compart-

ment will be maintained automatically. Air

flow distribution and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Otherwise, the sys-

tem may not work properly.

●Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Press the front defroster button on.

(The indicator light on the button will come

on.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the

windows, use the fan speed control

dial to set the fan speed to maximum.

●As soon as possible after the windshield is

clean, press the AUTO button to return to

the automatic mode.

●When the front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will automati-

cally be turned on at outside temperatures

above 36°F (2°C). The air recirculate mode

automatically turns off, allowing outside air

to be drawn into the passenger compart-

ment to further improve the defogging per-

formance.

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Remote start logic (if so equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate con-

trols and remote start function may go into auto-

matic heating or cooling mode when remote start

is activated depending on outside and cabin tem-

peratures. During this period, the climate control

display and buttons will be inoperable until the

ignition switch is turned on.

Voice Recognition logic (if so

equipped)

When the climate control system is on, the front

and rear fan speeds may be automatically low-

ered so that commands are more easily recog-

nized. Fan speed can be adjusted using the fan

speed decrease and increase buttons, if desired.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Turn the fan speed control dial to manually

control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to automatic

control of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to recir-

culate interior air inside the vehicle.

The air recirculation cannot be activated when

the air conditioner is in the front defogging

mode.

Automatic intake air control

In the AUTO mode, the intake air will be con-

trolled automatically. To manually control the in-

take air, press the air recirculation button.

To return to the automatic control mode, press

and hold the air recirculation button for

about 2 seconds. The indicator light will flash

twice, and then the intake air will be controlled

automatically.

Air flow control

Pressing the MODE button manually controls air

flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system off

Press the ON/OFF button to turn the system off.

Press the ON/OFF button when the heater or air

conditioner is off. The system will turn on with the

settings that were used immediately before the

system was turned off.

CLIMATE button

Press the CLIMATE button on the multi-function

control panel to display the screen for front air

conditioner operations.

Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear window

and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS

●When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flow

from the foot outlets may not operate for a

maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is

not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-

ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets

will operate normally.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

The sunload sensor, located on the top driver’s

side of the instrument panel, helps the system

maintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-

thing on or around this sensor.

REAR AUTOMATIC AIR

CONDITIONING SYSTEM

1. A/C button

2. REAR (ON-OFF) button

3. ON-OFF button/ (fan speed) control

dial

4. AUTO button/temperature control dial (driv-

er’s side)

To turn on the rear automatic air conditioning

system with the front air conditioner control

panel, press the REAR ON-OFF button.

The rear automatic air conditioning system can

be adjusted with the front air conditioner control

panel when the Rear Climate screen is displayed.

Touch the Rear Climate key displayed on the

screen When the rear automatic air conditioning

system is on, the front display will switch to the

Rear Climate screen.

To adjust the front air conditioning system, press

the CLIMATE button on the center multi-function

control panel.

LHA2473

Front Controls

LHA4180

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Automatic operation

1. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator

will illuminate in the display.

2. Temperature can be controlled using the

display screen. Touch the keys to set

the desired temperature.

Manual operation

●Temperature control

Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

●Fan speed control

Turn the (fan speed) control dial to

manually control the fan speed. Fan speed

can also be controlled using the display

screen. Touch the or key to set

the desired fan speed.

Rear Heating (A/C off)

1. To control the rear automatic air condition

system, press the CLIMATE button on the

center multi-function control panel. When

the display shows front climate control,

touch the Rear Climate key displayed on the

screen.

2. Press the AUTO button. The AUTO indicator

will illuminate in the display. Or, using the

touch-screen display, touch the right side

arrow key to display additional keys; touch

the AUTO key on the display and the feature

will activate.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to set the

desired temperature.

●Do not set the temperature lower than the

outside air temperature. Doing so may cause

the temperature to not be controlled prop-

erly.

Turning the system off

1. Press the REAR ON-OFF button on the

front control panel and the indicator light will

turn off.

2. Press the ON-OFF button/ fan speed

control dial. The rear climate controls will

turn OFF.

LHA4258 LHA4219

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

Turning the system off using the display

screen

1. Press the CLIMATE button on the center

multi-function control panel until the Rear

Climate screen is displayed.

2. Touch the ON/OFF key to turn off the

rear controls using the front display screen.

Rear control buttons

1. OFF button

2. (fan speed increase) button

3. AUTO button

4. (temperature increase) button

5. (temperature decrease) button

6. Display

7. — (fan speed decrease) button

The rear seat passengers can adjust the rear

automatic air conditioning system using the con-

trol switches at the rear of the center console.

The rear control buttons do not function when the

Rear Air-conditioning screen is shown on the

front display. To activate the rear control buttons,

press the CLIMATE button and the screen will

return to Front Climate control. This will enable

the second row Rear Climate controls.

●OFF button Turns rear automatic air condi-

tioning system off.

●Fan speed increase and decrease but-

tons Adjusts the rear fan speed up or down.

Rear Controls

LHA2134

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●AUTO button Turns rear automatic air con-

ditioning system on, AUTO mode on.

●Temperature increase and decrease

buttons Adjusts the rear temperature up or

down.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-

hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with

the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-

quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-

tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants

will cause severe damage to your air conditioner

system. For additional information, refer to “Air

conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommen-

dations” in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

to service your “environmentally friendly” air con-

ditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains refrig-

erant under high pressure. To avoid per-

sonal injury, any air conditioner service

should be done only by an experienced

technician with proper equipment.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

WARNING

●The driver must not attempt to operate

the audio system while the vehicle is in

motion, so that full attention may be

given to the vehicle operation.

●Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking brake before operat-

ing the audio system and playing mov-

ies (where fitted).

CAUTION

●Operate the audio system only when

the vehicle engine is running. Operating

the audio system for extended periods

of time with the engine turned off can

discharge the vehicle battery.

●Do not allow these systems to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-

uids may cause the system to

malfunction.

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

Radio

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position before turning on the radio. If you listen

to the radio when the engine is not running, the

ignition switch should be pushed to ACC posi-

tion.

Radio reception is affected by station signal

strength, distance from the radio transmitter,

buildings, bridges, mountains, and other external

influences. Intermittent changes in reception

quality are normally caused by these external

influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle

may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your radio system is equipped with state-of-the-

art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception.

These circuits are designed to extend reception

range, and to enhance the quality of that recep-

tion.

However there are some general characteristics

of both FM and AM radio signals that can effect

radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even

when the best quality equipment is used. These

characteristics are completely normal in a given

reception area, and do not indicate any malfunc-

tion in your radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-

cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,

signal distance and interference from other ve-

hicles can adversely affect ideal reception. De-

scribed below are some of the factors that can

affect radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to come

from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-

vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-

nate the noise.

FM radio reception

Maximum Signal Distances

●FM: 25 to 30 miles (40 to 48 km)

●AM: 60 to 130 miles (97 to 209 km)

Range: FM range in normally limited to 25 to

30 miles (40 to 48 km) with monaural (single

station) FM having slightly more range than ste-

reo FM. External influences may sometimes inter-

fere with FM station reception even if the FM

station is within the 25 miles (40 km). The

strength of the FM signal is directly related to the

distance between the transmitter and receiver.

FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting

SAA0306

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

many of the same characteristics as light. For

example they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from

a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade

and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference from

buildings, large hills or due to antenna position,

usually in conjunction with an increased distance

from the station transmitter, static or flutter can

be heard. This can be reduced by lowering the

treble setting to reduce the treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflective

characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected

signals reach the receiver at the same time. The

signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-

mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM radio reception

AM signals, because of their low frequency, can

bend around objects and skip along the ground.

In addition, the signals can bounce off the iono-

sphere and be bent back to earth. Because of

these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-

ject to interference as they travel from transmitter

to receiver.

Fading: This occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas with

many tall buildings. It can also occur for several

seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in

areas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

HD Radio™ Technology reception (for

U.S.)

HD Radio™ Technology reception needs to be

activated to receive HD Radio broadcasts. For

additional information, refer to “Audio settings” in

this section.

This enables you to receive radio broadcasts

digitally (where available), providing a better

quality sound with clear reception. When this

feature is not activated or HD Radio broadcasts

are not available, you will receive analog radio

(AM/FM) broadcasts.

Satellite radio reception

When the satellite radio is used for the first time

or the battery has been replaced, the satellite

radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-

function. Wait more then 10 minutes with the

satellite radio on and the vehicle outside of any

metal or large building for the satellite radio to

receive all of the necessary date.

The satellite radio requires an active SiriusXM

Satellite Radio subscription. The satellite service

is available only to those at least 18 and older in

the 48 contiguous United States.

The satellite radio performance may be affected if

the cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite

radio signal.

If possible, do not put cargo near the satellite

antenna.

The build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna

can affect satellite radio performance. Remove

the ice to restore satellite radio reception.

Trademarks

HD Radio Technology manufactured under li-

cense from iBqiuity Digital Corporation. U.S. and

Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD

Radio, and “ARC” logos are proprietary trade-

marks of iBiquity Digital; Corp.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

Compact Disc (CD) player

●Do not force a compact disc into the CD

insert slot. This could damage the CD and/or

CD player.

●Trying to load a CD with the CD door closed

could damage the CD and/or CD player.

●During cold or rainy weather, the player may

malfunction due to the humidity. If this oc-

curs, remove the CD and dehumidify or ven-

tilate the player completely.

●The player may skip while driving on rough

roads.

●The CD player sometimes cannot function

when the passenger compartment tempera-

ture is extremely high. Decrease the tem-

perature before use.

●Only use high quality 4.7 in. (12 cm) round

discs that have the “COMPACT disc DIGI-

TAL AUDIO” logo on the disc or packaging.

●Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.

●CDs that are of poor quality, are dirty,

scratched, or covered with fingerprints, or

that have pin holes may not work properly.

●The following CDs may not work properly:

– Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

– Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

– Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

●Do not use the following CDs as they may

cause the CD player to malfunction.

– 3.1 in (8 cm) discs

– CDs that are not round

– CDs with a paper label

– CDs that are warped, scratched, or have

abnormal edges

●This audio system can only play prerecorded

CDs. It has no capabilities to record or burn

CDs.

●If a CD cannot be played, one of the follow-

ing messages will be displayed.

[Disc read error:]

Indicates a CLV/Focus, TOC or Access er-

ror. Check and re-insert the CD. Make sure

that it is inserted correctly.

[Eject disc, please:]

Indicates a mechanism error. If the CD can

be ejected, eject and re-insert the CD. If the

CD cannot be ejected, it is recommended

that you contact a NISSAN dealer.

[Unplayable error:]

Indicates that no readable files are found on

the inserted CD. Check the data on your CD.

SAA0480

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compressed audio files (MP3/WMA/

AAC)

Explanation of terms:

●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well known compressed digital audio

file format. This format allows for near “CD

quality⬙sound, but at a fraction of the size of

normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an

audio track can reduce the file size by ap-

proximately a 10:1 ratio (sampling: 44.1 kHz,

bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep-

tible loss in quality. The compression re-

duces certain parts of the sound that seem

inaudible to most people.

●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a

compressed audio format created by Micro-

soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA

codec offers greater file compression than

the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more

digital audio tracks in the same amount of

space when compared to MP3s at the same

level of quality.

●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of

bits per second used by a digital music file.

The size and quality of a compressed digital

audio file is determined by the bit rate used

when encoding the file.

●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency

is the rate at which the samples of a signal

are converted from analog to digital (A/D

conversion) per second.

●Multisession — Multisession is one of the

methods for writing data to media. Writing

data once to the media is called a single

session, and writing more than once is called

a multisession.

●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that

contains information about the digital music

file such as song title, artist, album title,

encoding bit rate, and track time duration,

etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the

Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are regis-

tered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Cor-

peration in the United States of America and/or

other countries.

Playback order:

䊊

ARoot folder

䊊

BFolder

䊊

CAudio file

NAA984

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

●The folder names of folders not containing

compressed audio files are not shown on the

display.

●If there is a file in the top level of a disc/USB,

the root folder is displayed.

●The playback order is the order in which the

files were written by the writing software, so

the files might not play in the desired order.

●The music playback order of compressed

audio files is as illustrated.

Specification chart for CD:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1 Audio Layer3, MPEG2 Audio Layer3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3

Sampling frequency MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3: 8kHz, 11.025kHz, 12kHz

MPEG2 Audio Layer3: 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz

MPEG1 Audio Layer3: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9.1, WMA9.2

Bit rate / Sampling frequency Bit rate: Ver7, Ver8: 32–192kbps Ver9, Ver9.1, Ver9.2: 32–192kbps, VBR

Sampling frequency: Ver7, Ver8: 8k/11.025k/16k/22k/32k/44.1k Ver9, Ver9.1, Ver9.2: 8k/11.025k/16k/22k/32k/44.1k/

48 kHz

AAC*4 Bit rate / Sampling frequency Bit rate: 8–320 kbps, VBR

Sampling frequency: 11.025–48kHz

ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)

Tag information (Song title, Artist name and Album name) WMA Tag (WMA only)

AAC Tag (AAC only)

Folder levels CD, CD-R, CD-RW: Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 510 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Displayable character codes*3 01: SHIFT-JIS, ASCII, ISO–8859–1, UTF-8, UTF-16 BOM, UTF-16 Big Endian, UTF-16 Little Endian, 02: UNICODE,

03: UTF-16

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.

*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions, and information are going to be displayed.

*4 Made by iTunes.

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Windows Media Player:

This product is protected by certain intellectual

property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of

such technology outside of this product is pro-

hibited without a license from Microsoft.

USB/iPod® connection port

The USB/iPod® connection port is located in the

center console and consists of the USB connec-

tors.

䊊

1USB/iPod® connection port

Connect to play media from an iPod®,

iPhone®, or a USB memory device. When

using NissanConnect

Apps with an

iPhone®, connect via a USB cable. Refer to

the device manufacturer’s owner informa-

tion regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or upside down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly into

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

LHA4259

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

“Made for iPod®” and “Made for iPhone®” mean

that an electronic accessory has been designed

to connect specifically to iPod® or iPhone®,

respectively, and has been certified by the devel-

oper to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this

device or its compliance with safety and regula-

tory standards. Please note that the use of this

accessory with iPod® or iPhone® may affect

wireless performance.

Apple, the Apple logo, iPhone®, iPod®, iPod

classic®, iPod nano®, and iPod® touch are

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.

and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of

Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple

Inc.

This vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.

USB devices should be purchased separately as

necessary.

This system cannot be used to format a USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a personal

computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front

seats plays only sound without images for regu-

latory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB memory de-

vices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some

USB devices may not be supported by this sys-

tem.

●Partitioned USB devices may not play cor-

rectly.

●Some characters used in other languages

(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear

properly in the display. Using English lan-

guage characters with a USB device is rec-

ommended.

General notes for USB use:

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

Notes for iPod® use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in

the U.S. and other countries.

●Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause

a check-mark to be displayed on and off

(flickering). Always make sure that the

iPod® is connected properly.

●An iPod nano® (1st generation) may remain

in fast forward or rewind mode if it is con-

nected during a seek operation. In this case,

please manually reset the iPod®.

●An iPod nano® (2nd generation) will con-

tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-

nected during a seek operation.

●An incorrect song title may appear when the

Play Mode is changed while using an iPod

nano® (2nd generation).

●Audiobooks may not play in the same order

as they appear on an iPod®.

●Large video files cause slow responses in an

iPod®. The vehicle display may momentarily

black out, but will soon recover.

●If an iPod® automatically selects large video

files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle

display may momentarily black out, but will

soon recover.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Specification chart for USB

Supported media USB2.0

Supported file systems FAT32

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 512 (including the root folder), Files: 5000

Format Sampling rate Supported/Not supported

MPEG1 Layer-1 - Not supported

Layer-2 - Not supported

Layer-3 44.1, 48, 32 kHz Supported (32–320 kbps)

MPEG2 Layer-1 - Not supported

Layer-2 - Not supported

Layer-3 22.05, 24, 16 kHz Supported (16–160 kbps)

MPEG2.5 Layer-1 - Not supported

Layer-2 - Not supported

Layer-3 11.025, 12, 8 kHz Supported (16–160 kbps)

WMA*1 32, 44.1, 48 kHz Supported VER.7/8 (48–192 bps)

VER.9/9.1/9.2 (48–320 bps)

AAC (MPEG4)*2

(Extension “m4a” only)

8, 11.025, 12, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz Supported (16–320 kbps)

*1 Professional (voice, lossless, multichannel) is not supported.

*2 AAC (MPEG-2) is not supported.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

Bluetooth ® Audio player

The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are regis-

tered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

and any use of such marks by DENSO

CORPORATION is under license. Other trade-

marks and trade names are those of their respec-

tive owners.

●Some Bluetooth® streaming audio devices

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

audio system.

●It is necessary to set up the wireless con-

nection between a compatible Bluetooth®

streaming audio device and the in-vehicle

Bluetooth® module before using the

Bluetooth® streaming audio.

●The Bluetooth® streaming audio may be

stopped under the following conditions:

– When receiving a hands-free call

– When checking the connection to the

hand-free phone

– When connecting the hands-free phone

or audio device

– When downloading a phonebook

memory from a connected cellular phone

●Do not place a Bluetooth® streaming

audio device in an area surrounded by

metal or far away from the in-vehicle

Bluetooth® module to prevent tone qual-

ity degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While an audio device is connected

through Bluetooth® wireless connection,

the battery of the device may discharge

quicker than usual.

●This system supports the Bluetooth® Ad-

vanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP)

and Audio/Video Remote Control Profile

(AVRCP).

●Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the

Bluetooth® functions share the same fre-

quency band (2.4 GHz). Using the

Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN func-

tions at the same time may slow down or

disconnect the communication and

cause undesired noise. It is recom-

mended that you turn off the wireless LAN

(Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® func-

tions.

Regulatory Information

La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las

siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que

este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia

perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe

aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que

pueda causar su operación no deseada.

FCC Regulatory Information

FCC ID: HYQDNNS086

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-

posure limits set forth for uncontrolled environ-

ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure Guidelines. This equipment has very

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply

without maximum permissive exposure evaluation

(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-

stalled and operated with at lease 20cm and

more between the radiator and person’s body.

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

IC Regulatory Information

The antenna cannot be removed (and changed)

by the user.

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license–exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) This device may or may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with IC radiation expo-

sure limits set forth for uncontrolled environment

and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency

(RF) exposure rules. This equipment has very low

levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply

without maximum permissive exposure evaluation

(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-

stalled and operated with at least 20cm and more

between the radiator and person’s body.

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all require-

ments of the Canadian Interference Causing

Equipment Regulations.

L’antenne ne peut être enlevé (et modifié par

l’utilisateur).

NOTE:

Le préent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisé aux deux condi-

tions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas

produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de

l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage ra-

dioéectrique subi, mêe si le brouillage est

susceptible d’en compromettre le fonction-

nement.

The Bluetooth® word

mark and logos are

registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use

of such marks by

DENSO

CORPORATION is

under license. Other

trademarks and trade

names are those of

their respective

owners.

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player

●The technology protected by the U.S. patent

and other intellectual property rights owned

by Macrovision Corporation and other right

holders is adopted for this system.

●This copyright protected technology cannot

be used without a permit from Macrovision

Corporation. It is limited to be for personal

use, etc., as long as the permit from Macro-

vision Corporation is not issued.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

●Modifying or disassembling is prohibited.

●Dolby digital is manufactured under license

from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

●Dolby and the double D mark are

trademarks of Dolby Laboratories, Inc.

●DTS is a registered trademark DTS, Inc. and

DTS 2.0 “ ” is a trademark of DTS, Inc.

Parental level (parental control):

DVDs with the parental control settings can be

played with this system. Please use your own

judgement to set the parental control with the

system.

Disc selection:

You can play the following disc formats with the

DVD drive:

●DVD-Video

●Video-CD

●DTS-CD

Use DVDs with the region code “ALL” or the code

applicable to your DVD player. (The region code

䊊

Ais displayed as a small symbol printed on the

DVD 䊊

B.) This vehicle-installed DVD player can

only play DVDs with an applicable region code.

Do not use the following DVDs as they may

cause the DVD player to malfunction:

●3.1 in (8 cm) discs

●DVDs with incompatible region code

●DVDs that are not round

●DVDs with a paper label

●DVDs that are warped, scratched, or

have unequal edges

The following DVDs may not work properly:

●Recordable digital video discs (DVD-R)

●Rewritable digital video discs (DVD-RW)

LHA0484

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Specification chart for DVD

Playable media:

The following media can be played on the system.

●DVD+RW

●DVD+R

●DVD+R DL

●DVD-RW (corresponds to CPRM)

●DVD-R (corresponds to CPRM)

●DVD-R DL (corresponds to CPRM)

●DVD-ROM

●Duel DISC (not guaranteed)

Video codec:

The following video codecs are supported by the

system.

Video file format

DVD Video

DVD-VR with CPRM

VIDEO CD Ver. 1.0

Ver. 1.1

Ver. 2.0

DTS CD

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

Audio codec:

The following combinations of audio codecs sup-

port video formats.

Sound format DVD-Video DVD-VR VIDEO-CD DTS-CD

LPCM Supported Supported Not supported Not supported

Dolby Digital Supported Supported Not supported Not supported

Dolby Digital EX Supported with limited output *1 Not supported Not supported Not supported

Dts Supported Not supported Not supported Supported

dts-ES Supported with limited output *2 Not supported Not supported Not supported

dts 96/24 Supported with limited output *3 Not supported Not supported Not supported

MPEG1 Layer3 Supported Supported Supported Not supported

MPEG2 Layer3 Supported with limited output *4 Supported with limited output Not supported *5 Not supported

*1: A back surround channel is assigned to the LS and RS channels and output.

*2: A surround center channel is assigned to the LS and RS channels and output.

*3: Output in 48kHz/24bit.

*4: A back surround channel of DVD-Video and DVD-VR/MPEG2 is assigned to the LS and RS channels and output.

*5: MPEG2 Layer3 of VIDEO CD indicates SVCD. SVCD may play but its performance is not guaranteed. The 2ch output is utilized for the audio output of

SVCD.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF

AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS

Main audio buttons

䊊

1button

Push to eject a disc.

䊊

2Disc slot:

Insert a disc with the label side facing up.

䊊

3Radio memory buttons

Up to six preferred stations can be regis-

tered in the preset list for each band.

䊊

4VOL/ON•OFF button

Push to turn the audio system on/off.

Turn to adjust the volume.

䊊

5RADIO button

Push to switch to the radio mode. The radio

band will switch between AM, FM and SXM

(SiriusXM) each time the button is pushed.

䊊

6SCAN button

Scans at each broadcasting station/channel

for 5 seconds. Pushing the button again will

stop SCAN tuning and the radio will remain

tuned to that station/channel.

䊊

7RPT RDM button

Changes the play mode.

䊊

8DISC button

Plays the CD or DVD.

䊊

9SEEK•CAT button

Functions to seek radio stations or to skip

and fast-forward /rewind through tracks.

JVH1387X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

䊊

10 TRACK button

Functions to seek radio stations or to skip

and fast-forward through tracks.

䊊

11 MEDIA button

Each time the button is pushed, a different

audio source (iPod®, USB, Bluetooth®

streaming audio, AUX or Rear Display) will

be selected.

䊊

12 TUNE/FOLDER AUDIO button

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be

adjusted by pushing this button and turning

the knob to select the item to adjust.

Steering Wheel Switch for Audio

Control

The audio system can be operated using the

controls on the steering wheel.

1. Tuning switch/ENTER button

2. (back) switch

3. SOURCE switch

4. Volume control switch

SOURCE switch

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-

tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio

system on.

Push the SOURCE switch to change the mode.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase or

decrease the volume.

Tuning switch/ENTER

button

While the display is showing a MAP, STATUS or

Audio screen, tilt the Tuning switch upward or

downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.

For most audio sources, tilting the switch

up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a

different function than tilting up/down for less

than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

seek up or down to the next station.

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

go to the next or previous category.

LHA3170

4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod®

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number (if

playing compressed audio files).

DVD

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the title number.

USB

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the folder number.

Bluetooth® Audio

●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

(back) switch

Press the (back) switch to return to the

previous screen or cancel the current selection.

NOTE:

You are unable to operate the display of the

NissanConnect

using the buttons on the

steering switch whenever the meter shows

the setting display.

ANTENNA

The antenna cannot be shortened, but can be

removed. When you need to remove the antenna,

turn the antenna rod counterclockwise.

To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna rod

clockwise and hand tighten.

CAUTION

●Always properly tighten the antenna

rod during installation or the antenna

rod may break during vehicle operation.

●Be sure that the antenna is removed

before the vehicle enters an automatic

car wash.

Window antenna

The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear

window.

CAUTION

●Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal

parts to it. This may cause poor recep-

tion or noise.

●When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

AUDIO MAIN OPERATION

Turning audio system on/off

The ignition switch must be in the ACC or ON

position to turn on the audio system. Push the

ON•OFF button on the steering wheel to turn on

the last audio source which was playing immedi-

ately before the system was turned off. To turn off

the audio system, push the ON•OFF button on

the steering wheel again.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69

Displaying Audio screen

Push the AUDIO button on the control panel to

display the current audio screen.

Selecting audio source

1. Turn on the audio source menu screen by

touching the “Source” key on the upper left

corner of the audio screen.

2. Select an item from the audio source menu

screen.

●Pushing the RADIO,DISC,MEDIA or

SOURCE button on the steering switch can

also change the audio source. For additional

information, refer to “Main audio buttons” in

this section.

●If the audio system has been turned off while

one of the audio sources was playing, turn-

ing the audio system back on will play the

audio source that was playing when the sys-

tem was turned off.

●The audio source can also be changed with

the source bar on top of the audio screen.

Audio source bar

The audio source can be changed with the

source bar on top of the audio screen. The

source bar display can be turned on/off.

Turning source bar on/off

You can select whether the source bar on top of

the audio screens is displayed or not.

1. Touch the “Source” key on the upper left

corner of the audio screen.

2. Touch the “Show Source Bar” key to turn the

indicator on/off.

Editing source bar

The audio sources to be displayed on the source

bar can be changed.

1. Touch the “Source” key on the upper left

corner of the audio screen.

2. Touch the “Edit Source Bar” key.

3. Touch one of the keys on the source bar and

then touch one of the audio sources from the

source list to register the audio source in the

source bar.

5GA0025X

4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

RADIO

How to view radio operation screen

*For models with radio status indicator and

reception information display.

The radio screen can be viewed and operated on

the display.

䊊

1Radio mode indicator: The current radio

mode is displayed.

䊊

2“Source” key: Touch to switch to the source

select screen. For additional information, re-

fer to “Selecting audio source” in this sec-

tion.

䊊

3“Control” key: Touch to display the control

screen. For additional information, refer to

“Radio controls” in this section.

䊊

4HD Radio reception status indicator (for AM

and FM):

The icon is displayed when the HD Radio

digital signal is received. The icon flashes

when the radio is acquiring the digital signal

but the sound output is not yet in the HD

mode.

䊊

5Radio band indicator: The currently selected

radio band (AM, FM or SXM) is displayed.

䊊

6Reception information display: Reception in-

formation available at the time such as fre-

quency, station/channel name, etc. are dis-

played.

On the SXM screen, touch the area to dis-

play the category list.

䊊

736 stations/channels can be registered in

the preset list.

For additional information, refer to “Preset-

ting” in this section.

NAA1716

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71

NOTE:

HD Radio reception needs to be activated to

receive HD Radio broadcasts. This enables you

to receive radio broadcasts digitally (where avail-

able), providing a better quality sound with clear

reception. When this feature is not activated or

HD Radio broadcasts are not available, you will

receive analog radio (AM/FM broadcasts).

Radio source control

There are 2 elements used in the preset list area

that are associated with radio source:

䊊

1Highlight for multi-function controller opera-

tion.

䊊

2(With triangle) Indicator of current selected

preset station.

Radio operation

Radio activation and band selection

Push the RADIO button or select the preferred

radio band (AM, FM or SXM) from the audio

source list to turn on the radio. Each time the

RADIO button is pushed, the radio band will

change. For additional information, refer to “Se-

lecting audio source” in this section.

NOTE:

When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,

the radio will automatically change from

stereo to monaural reception.

Seeking stations/channels

AM and FM radio

Push the SEEK•CAT button or TRACK button to

tune from low to high or high to low frequencies

and to stop at the next broadcasting station.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio

Push the SEEK•CAT button or TRACK button to

tune to the first channel of the next or previous

category.

Scan tuning

To tune the stations/channels, touch the “Con-

trol” key on the display and touch the “Scan” key.

The stations will be turned from low to high

frequencies and stop at each broadcasting sta-

tion for 5 seconds. Touching the “Scan”key again

during this 5 second period will stop scan tuning

and the radio will remain tuned to that station.

Pushing the SCAN button can also scan tune.

NAA1717

4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Presetting

Up to 36 stations/channels can be registered for

AM, FM or SXM in the preset list.

1. Select a radio band (AM, FM or SXM)

2. Tune to the station/channel you wish to store

in the preset list.

3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in

the preset list.

NOTE:

Only 1 to 6 can store using radio memory

buttons.

Push and hold the desired station/channel

preset button (1 – 6).

4. The information such as frequency

(AM/FM), channel number (SXM), etc. will

be displayed on the preset list.

To change the preset station/channel, touch and

hold one of the preset numbers. You can select

whether to change the station/channel or to de-

lete the preset setting.

Alert notification (SXM only)

Favorite artists and songs can be registered to

receive an alert notice when a song of the regis-

tered conditions is on the radio. To tune to the

respective channel, touch the “Listen to be con-

sistent” key. The alert can be ignored by touching

the “Cancel” key.

Satellite Radio:

●The satellite mode requires an active

SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription. The

satellite service is available only to those at

least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous

United States.

●It may take some time to receive the activa-

tion signal after the initiation of the SiriusXM

Satellite Radio subscription. After receiving

the activation signal, an available channel list

will automatically be updated in the radio.

Switch the Ignition switch from LOCK to

ACC to update the SiriusXM channel list.

Radio controls

Touch the “Control” key on the AM, FM or SXM

screen to display the control screen.

The following items are available:

FM/AM

●“Station list” key

Touch to display the available station list.

While listening to FM radio, Auto Update is

not preformed.

●“Scan” key

Touch to scan tune the stations. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Radio operation”

in this section.

●“HD radio mode” key

When this item is turned on, the analog and

the digital reception switches automatically.

When this item is turned off, the reception is

fixed in the analog mode.

●“HD radio Info” key

Touch to display the HD Radio Information

such as name of song, artist and album.

This item is available when “RDS-Info” key is

not active.

●“Tag” key (HD Radio Broadcasts only)

Touch to register the tag information for

ITunes® Tagging. If an iPod® is plugged in

after the registration, the tag information can

be stored in an iPod® and be used to pur-

chase the song via ITunes.

●“RDS-Info” key (FM only)

Touch to display the RDS information.

This item is available only when the “HD

Radio Info” key is not active.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73

SXM

●“Categories” key

Touch to display the categories list.

●“Direct Tune” key

Touch to display the keypad to enter the

frequency and directly tune to the channel.

●“Scan” key

Touch to scan tune the channels.

For additional information refer to, “Radio

operation” in this section.

●“Instant replay” key

Up to 30 minutes of the broadcast of the

channel that has been tuned in to can be

replayed.

Touch to select

from , , ,

and .

●“Tag” key

Touch to register the tag information for

iTunes® tagging. If an iPod® is plugged in

after the registration, the tag information can

be stored in an iPod® and be used to pur-

chase the song via ITunes®.

●“Other” key — “Favorite Artists” key

Touch to set a favorite artists alert notifica-

tion. Up to 8 artists can be registered. While

a song of your favorite artists is playing,

touch the list and touch the “Add/Update”

key. To receive the alert notification, select

the “Notify Alert ON” key.

●“Other” key — “Favorite Songs” key

Touch to set a favorite songs alert notifica-

tion. Up to 8 songs can be registered. While

a song of your favorite artists is playing,

touch the list and touch the “Add/Update”

key. To receive the alert notification, select

the “Notify Alert ON” key.

●“Other” key — “Customize Channel List” key

Touch to customize the channel list. Only

selected channels will be tuned in when you

seek or scan the channels. You can select

each item or touch the “Select/Deselect All”

key.

●“Other”key — “Favorite Artists Now Playing”

key

Touch to display the artist list for an alert

notice.

●“Other” key — “Favorite Songs Now Play-

ing” key

Touch to display the song list for an alert

notice.

●“Other” key — “Favorite Alert Settings” key

Touch to turn on/off the alert notice for the

registered favorite artists and songs.

●“Other” key — “Channel Locking Settings”

key

Touch to select or unselect the channel that

you wish to lock out. A passcode is required

to change the settings. The default pass-

code is 1234.

4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER How to view CD operation screen

䊊

1“Source” key

Touch to switch to the source list screen. For

additional information, refer to “Selecting au-

dio source” in this section.

䊊

2“Scan” key

Touch to play the first 10 seconds of the

tracks. Touch again to stop scanning.

䊊

3Track information

Track information such as the song title, art-

ist name, and album name is displayed.

䊊

4Audio source indicator

Indicates that CD is currently selected.

䊊

5Play time

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

6Track number

This indicates the current track number and

the total number of tracks.

䊊

7CD menu

CD menu items are displayed. Touch an icon

to display the list or to change the setting.

●“Track” key

●“Folder” key (for MP3, WMA, AAC)

●“Play Mode” key

䊊

8Play Mode indicator

This indicates the current play mode. Touch

to change the play mode.

䊊

9Folder number (for MP3, WMA, AAC)

This indicates the folder number when a CD

with compressed audio files is loaded.

NAA1718

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75

For CDs without compressed audio files

Mode Screen display

Disc Repeat

Disc

1 Track Repeat

1 Track

Disc Random

Disc

For CDs with compressed audio files

Mode Screen display

Disc Repeat

Disc

1 Folder Repeat

1 Folder

1 Track Repeat

1 Track

Disc Random

Disc

1 Folder Random

1 Folder

CD player operation

Insert the CD into the slot with the label side

facing up. The CD will be guided automatically

into the slot and starts playing.

After loading the CD, the CD screen will appear

on the display.

Activation and playing

The CD mode can be selected from the source

list or by pushing the DISC button with a CD

loaded to play the CD. For additional information,

refer to “Selecting audio source” and “Main audio

buttons” in this section.

If the system has been turned off while the CD

was playing, pushing the VOL/ON•OFF button

will start the Audio system set to the CD screen.

Selecting track/folder

Touch the “Track” key or “Folder” key in the CD

menu and select a preferred track or folder from

the list.

Push the SEEK•CAT button or TRACK button to

move to the next or previous track.

For CDs with compressed audio files, turn the

TUNE/FOLDER AUDIO button to move to the

next or previous folder. For additional information,

refer to “Main audio buttons” in this section.

Fast-forwarding

Push and hold the TRACK button to fast-forward

the track. Release the TRACK button to play the

track at normal speed.

Scanning

Touch the “Scan” key on the display or push the

SCAN button to scan the tracks in the CD. While

scanning, the CD will play the first 10 seconds of

each track and move on to the next track. Pushing

the “Scan” key again within the 10 seconds will

stop scanning.

Changing play mode

Touch the “Play Mode” key or the play mode

icon or to select the play mode.

Pushing the RPT RDM button can also change

the play mode.

Ejecting CD

Push the button to eject the CD. If the

CD is ejected and left unremoved, it will be re-

loaded into the slot to protect the CD.

4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT

Connecting USB memory device

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

USB device while driving. Doing so can be

a distraction. If distracted, you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

CAUTION

●Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or upside down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

USB device is connected correctly to the

USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB device

out of the port. This could damage the

port and the cover.

●Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

Two USB connection ports are located on the

center console box. For additional information,

refer to “USB/iPod® connection port” in this

section.

When compatible storage devices are plugged

into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-

age devices can be played through the vehicle’s

audio system.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77

How to view USB operation screen

䊊

1“Source” key

Touch to switch to the source list screen. For

additional information, refer to “Selecting au-

dio source” in this section.

䊊

2Play time

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

3Track information

Track information such as the song title, art-

ist name and folder name is displayed.

䊊

4Audio source indicator

Indicates which of the two USB memory

devices is selected.

䊊

5“USB1” key/“USB2” key

Touch to switch to the other connected USB

memory device.

䊊

6Album artwork (if so equipped)

An image of the CD cover is displayed when

available.

䊊

7Track number

This indicates the track number and the total

number of tracks.

䊊

8“” key/“ ” key

Touch to play or pause the track.

䊊

9USB menu

USB menu items are displayed. Touch an

icon to display the list or to change the

setting.

●“Folder/Track” key

●“Artists” key

●“Albums” key

●“Previous List” key

●“Scan” key

●“Play Mode” key

NAA1719

4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

䊊

10 Play mode indicator

This indicates the current play mode. Touch

to change the play mode.

Mode Screen display

All Track Repeat

All

1 Folder Repeat

1 Folder

1 Track Repeat

1 Track

All Random

All

1 Folder Random

1 Folder

䊊

11 Folder number

This indicates the folder, artist or album num-

ber and the total number of folders/lists.

USB memory device player operation

Activation and playing

USB memory device mode can also be activated

from the audio source list and the audio source

bar by the touch panel operation or by pushing

the MEDIA button. For additional information,

refer to “Selecting audio source” and “Main audio

buttons” in this section.

To play the USB memory device, touch the

“” key and, to pause the USB memory,

touch the “ ” key on the USB operation

screen.

Selecting play list

Select a play list by touching an icon on the USB

menu.

●Folder/Track (List)

●Artist (List)

●Album (List)

●Previous (List)

Skipping tracks/folders

Push the SEEK•CAT button or TRACK button to

skip to the next or previous track.

To skip to the next or previous folder, turn the

TUNE/FOLDER AUDIO button.

Fast-forwarding

Push and hold the TRACK button to fast-forward

the track. Release the TRACK button to play the

track at normal speed.

Scanning

Touch the “Scan” key on the display or push the

SCAN button to scan the tracks in the USB

memory device. While scanning, the USB

memory device will play the first 10 seconds of

each track and move on to the next track. Touch-

ing the “Scan” key again within the 10 seconds

will stop scanning.

Changing play mode

Touch the “Play Mode” key on the display to

select the play mode.

Only one of the two connected USB memory

devices can be operated by the voice recognition

system.

iPod® PLAYER

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate the

iPod® while driving. Doing so can be a

distraction. If distracted, you could lose

control of your vehicle and cause an acci-

dent or serious injury.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79

CAUTION

●Do not force the iPod® device into the

USB port. Inserting the iPod® cable

tilted or upside down into the port may

damage the port. Make sure that the

iPod® cable is connected correctly to

the USB port.

●Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the iPod®

cable out of the port. This could damage

the port and the cover.

●Do not leave the iPod® cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the port.

Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner infor-

mation regarding the proper use and care of the

device.

Two USB (iPod®) connection ports are located

on the center console box. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “USB/iPod® connection port” in

this section.

The battery of the iPod® will be charged while

the device is connected to the vehicle if the

iPod® supports USB connection charging.

Depending on the model and firmware version of

the iPod®, the display on the iPod® shows a

NISSAN or Accessory Attached screen when the

connection is completed. When the iPod® is

connected to the vehicle, the iPod® music library

can only be operated using the vehicle audio

controls.

Compatibility:

Made for

●iPod touch® (5th generation)

●iPod touch® (4th generation)

●iPod touch® (3rd generation)

●iPod touch® (2nd generation)

●iPod touch® (1st generation)

●iPod touch®

●iPod® with video

●iPod classic®

●iPod nano® (7th generation)

●iPod nano® (6th generation)

●iPod nano® (5th generation)

●iPod nano® (4th generation)

●iPod nano® (3rd generation)

●iPod nano® (2nd generation)

●iPod nano® (1st generation)

●iPhone® 5S

●iPhone® 5

●iPhone® 4S

●iPhone® 4

●iPhone® 3GS

●iPhone® 3G

●iPhone®

The iPod touch® may not respond quickly with

the system in some cases.

Make sure that the iPod® firmware is updated.

The Lightning

connector works with iPhone®

5, iPhone® 5S, iPod touch® (5th generation)

and iPod nano® (7th generation).

The 30–pin connector works with iPhone® 4S,

iPhone® 4, iPhone® 3GS, iPhone® 3G,

iPhone®, iPod touch® (1st through 4th genera-

tion), iPod classic® and iPod nano® (1st

through 6th generation).

USB works with iPhone® 5, iPhone® 4S,

iPhone® 4, iPhone® 3GS, iPhone® 3G,

iPhone®, iPod touch® (1st through 5th genera-

tion), iPod classic® and iPod nano® (1st

through 7th generation).

4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

How to view iPod® operation screen

䊊

1Search condition indicator

This indicates the current search condition.

䊊

2“Source” key

Touch to switch to the source list screen. For

additional information, refer to “Selecting au-

dio source” in this section.

䊊

3Play time

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

4Track information

Track information such as the song title, art-

ist name and album name is displayed.

䊊

5Audio source indicator

This indicates that the iPod® is currently

selected.

䊊

6Album artwork (if so equipped)

An image of the album artwork is displayed

when available.

䊊

7Track number

This indicates the current track number and

the total number of tracks.

䊊

8Shuffle mode indicator

Touch to change the shuffle mode.

Mode Screen display

Shuffle albums

Albums

All songs

Songs

Shuffle Off

Off

䊊

9“ ” key/ “ ” key

Touch to play or pause the track.

䊊

10 iPod® menu

NAA1633

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81

●“Previous List” key

●“Playlists” key

●“Artists” key

●“Songs” key

●“Albums” key

●“Genres” key

●“Composers” key

●“Podcasts” key

●“Audiobooks” key

●“Shuffle” key

●“Repeat” key

䊊

11 Repeat mode indicator

Touch to change the repeat mode.

Mode Screen display

All Track Repeat

All

1 Track Repeat

1 Track

Repeat Off

Off

iPod® player operation

Activation and playing

Inserting the iPod® cable into the connection

port will activate the iPod® mode.

iPod® can also be selected from the audio

sources list and the source bar by touch panel

operation or by pushing the MEDIA button. For

additional information, refer to “Selecting audio

source” and “Main audio buttons” in this section.

To play and pause the iPod®touch the

“Key/Pause” key in the, iPod® menu.

Selecting search method

A list of search methods is displayed in the

iPod®menu. Touch and select an item to play the

iPod® in your preferred settings.

Fast-forwarding

Push and hold the TRACK button to fast-forward

the song. Release the TRACK button to play the

song at normal speed.

Changing play mode

Touch “Shuffle” key or “Repeat” key from the

iPod® menu to select the play mode.

Skipping songs:

Push the SEEK•CAT button or TRACK button to

skip to the next or previous song.

Even when iPod®s or iPhone®s are inserted into

both of the two USB connection ports, the sys-

tem recognizes only one of the connected

iPod®s or iPhone®s at a time.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®

streaming audio.

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® device with

streaming audio (A2DP profile), you can set up a

wireless connection between your Bluetooth®

device and the in-vehicle audio system. This con-

nection allows you to listen to the audio from the

Bluetooth® device using your vehicle speakers.

It may also allow basic control of the device for

playing and skipping audio files using the AVRCP

Bluetooth® profile. Not all Bluetooth® devices

have the same level of controls for AVRCP.

Please consult the manual for your Bluetooth®

device for more details.

Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth® func-

tions share the same frequency band (2.4 GHz).

Using the Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN

functions at the same time may slow down or

disconnect the communication and cause unde-

sired noise. It is recommended that you turn off

the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the

Bluetooth® functions.

4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Connecting Bluetooth® streaming

audio device

Bluetooth® streaming audio device must be

connected to the vehicle before operation. For

additional information, refer to “Connecting

Bluetooth® device” in this section.

How to view Bluetooth® streaming

audio operation screen

䊊

1“Source” key

Touch to switch to the source list screen. For

additional information, refer to “Selecting au-

dio source” in this section.

䊊

2Track information

Track information such as the song title, art-

ist name and folder name is displayed.

NAA1634

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83

䊊

3Audio source indicator

This indicates that Bluetooth® streaming

audio is currently selected among other

sources.

䊊

4Play time

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

5“Control” key

Touch to display the control screen. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Bluetooth®

streaming audio operation” in this section.

䊊

6Track number

This indicates the track number.

䊊

7Repeat mode indicator

Touch to change the repeat mode.

Mode Screen display

All Repeat

All

1 Folder Repeat

1 Folder

1 Track Repeat

1 Track

Repeat Off

Off

䊊

8Bluetooth® streaming audio menu

●“Play” key

●“Pause” key

●“Folder/Track” key

●“Repeat” key

●“Random” key

䊊

9Random mode indicator

Touch to change the random mode.

Mode Screen display

All Random

All

1 Folder Random

1 Folder

Random Off

OFF

Depending on the audio device that is connected

to the vehicle, track information may not be dis-

played.

Bluetooth® streaming audio operation

The ability to pause, change tracks, fast-forward,

rewind, randomize and repeat music may be dif-

ferent between devices. Some or all of these

functions may not be supported on each device.

●Depending on the Bluetooth® streaming

audio device that is connected, it may not be

possible to perform audio operations.

●Depending on the Bluetooth® streaming

audio device that is connected, a time lag

may occur before music is played back.

●Depending on the application except for the

native audio application that is played on the

Bluetooth® streaming audio device, incor-

rect behavior (information lacking, timer

skipping, etc.) may occur.

Activation and playing

Bluetooth® streaming audio device can be se-

lected from the audio sources list by touching the

“Source” key or by pushing the MEDIA button.

For additional information, refer to “Selecting au-

dio source” and “Main audio buttons” in this

section.

To play the Bluetooth® streaming audio device,

touch the “Play”key and to pause the Bluetooth®

streaming audio device, touch the “Pause” key in

the Bluetooth® streaming audio menu.

Selecting folder/track

Touch the “Folder/Track” key to select a

folder/track.

4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Changing play mode

Touch the “Repeat” key or “Random” key in the

Bluetooth® streaming audio menu to change the

play mode.

Fast-forwarding

Push and hold the TRACK button to fast-forward

the song. Release the TRACK button to play the

song at normal speed.

Skipping songs/folders

Push the SEEK•CAT button or TRACK button to

skip to the next or previous song.

To skip to the next or previous folder, turn the

TUNE/FOLDER AUDIO button.

Bluetooth® streaming audio controls

Touch the “Control” key on the Bluetooth® Audio

operation screen to display the control screen.

“Select Audio Device” key Touch to select a different

Bluetooth® streaming

audio device from a list of

registered Bluetooth®

devices. For additional

information, refer to

“Bluetooth® settings” in

this section.

“Connect Device” key Touch to connect a new

Bluetooth® device.

DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)

PLAYER

Touch screen display

䊊

1Title/chapter number:

This indicates the DVD title/chapter number

currently selected.

䊊

2Play time:

The play time of the track is displayed.

䊊

3DVD operation menu:

DVD menu items are displayed. Touch a key

to operate the DVD.

●“Play/Pause” key

●“Stop” key

●“Skip <<” key

●“Skip >>” key

●“” key

●“CM <<” key

●“CM >>” key

●“Top Menu” key

●“Title List” key

●“Title Menu” key

●“10 Key Search” key

●“Select No.” key

●“Previous Title” key

●“Next Title” key

●“Default Position” key

●“Display Settings” key

●“Play Mode” key

䊊

4Play mode indicator

This indicates the current play mode.

NAA1618

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85

Mode Screen display

1 Disc Repeat

Disc

1 Chapter Repeat

1 Chapter

●The DVD menu list will appear when the

screen is touched while a movie is play-

ing.

●The availability of the DVD menu items

depend on the type of DVD.

DVD player operation

Precautions

●Use DVDs with the region code “ALL” or the

code applicable to the DVD player. (The

region code is displayed as a small symbol

printed on the top of the DVD). This vehicle-

installed DVD player can only play DVDs

with the applicable region code.

●Images cannot be displayed when the igni-

tion switch is in the ON position.

●Some VIDEO-CD functions may not be sup-

ported with this system.

●Displaying items may vary depending on the

type of disc.

Insert the DVD into the slot with the label side

facing up. The DVD will be guided automatically

into the slot and start playback.

When a DVD is loaded, the DVD operation

screen is displayed on the display.

Activation and playing

Inserting the DVD into the slot will activate the

DVD mode. The DVD mode can also be selected

from the source list by pushing the DISC button

with a DVD loaded. For additional information,

refer to “Selecting audio source” and “Main audio

buttons” in this section.

Touch the “Play” key in the DVD menu to start

playing. Touch the “Pause” key to pause and

touch the “Stop” key to stop playing the DVD.

Skipping

Touch the “Skip <<” key or “Skip >>” key in the

DVD menu to skip to the next or previous

track/chapter.

Displaying keys

Touch the “Key” key in the DVD menu to display

operation keys such as the “Enter” key or “Re-

turn” key, etc.on the display.

Skipping commercial messages

Touch the “CM <<” key or “CM >>” key in the

DVD menu to skip commercials.

Displaying top menu

Touch the “Top Menu” key in the DVD menu to

display the top menu specific to each disc. For

additional information, refer to the disc instruc-

tions.

Displaying title list

Touch the “Title List” key in the DVD menu to

display the title list.

Displaying title menu

Touch the “Title Menu” key in the DVD menu to

display the title menu specific to each disc. For

additional information, refer to the disc instruc-

tions.

Selecting track/chapter

Touch the “10 Key Search” key in the DVD menu

to display the keyboard screen. Enter the

track/chapter you wish to play.

Selecting track/chapter/menu number

Touch the “10 Key Search” key or “Select No.”

key in the DVD menu to display the keyboard

screen. Enter the track/chapter or menu number

you wish to play.

Viewing from default list

Touch the “Default Position”key in the DVD menu

to view from the default list.

Adjusting the display

Touch the “Display Settings” key in the DVD

menu to adjust the display settings of the display.

4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

“Brightness” key Adjusts the display bright-

ness

“Contrast” key Adjusts the display con-

trast

“Black Level” key Adjusts the display black

level

“Tint” key Adjusts the tint level

“Color” key Adjusts the color

“Reset Settings” key Resets all the display set-

tings to default

AUXILIARY (AUX) DEVICES

Connecting auxiliary devices

The auxiliary input jacks are located in the center

console box.

The auxiliary audio input jack accepts any stan-

dard analog audio input such as from a portable

cassette player, CD player or MP3 player.

A video player can be connected to the auxiliary

video input jack to play movies.

INFO:

Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in the

audio input jack. If a cable with a mono plug is

used, the audio output may not function normally.

How to view AUX screen

Touch the “Display Settings” key to adjust the

display settings on the upper display.

AUX operation

Activation and playing:

Turn on an AUX device.

Connecting an AUX device into the jack will

activate the AUX mode.

AUX can be selected from the other audio

sources by touching the “Source”key or by push-

ing the “MEDIA” button.

INFO:

Movies are displayed on the upper display while

the audio information is displayed on the lower

display.

JVH1415X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87

If your vehicle is equipped with the Mobile Enter-

tainment System, you can enjoy playing audio

and movie files on the rear displays with images

and sound.

A DVD and an AUX device inserted/connected to

the audio system for the front seat audio unit as

well as the devices connected to the rear media

interface (USB and HDMI ports for the rear dis-

plays) can be played on the rear displays.

The front and left/right rear displays can show

different sources individually.

CD/DVD slot is on the instrument panel. For

additional information, refer to “Names and func-

tions of audio control buttons” in this section.

AUX jacks are located inside the center console

box.

The rear media interface (USB and HDMI con-

nection ports) is located behind the center con-

sole box. For additional information, refer to

“Connecting rear media interface” in this section.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the

Mobile Entertainment System while driv-

ing so full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

CAUTION

●Do not attempt to use the system in

extremely high or low temperature con-

ditions [below -4°F (-20°C) or above

158°F (70°C)].

●To avoid draining the vehicle battery

(12V battery), do not operate the system

for more that 15 minutes without start-

ing the engine.

The front display is designed not to show

images during driving, as the driver’s at-

tention must be given to vehicle operation

for safety. Sounds are still audible. To

show images on the front display, stop the

vehicle in a safe location, move the shift

lever to the “P” (Park) position and apply

the parking brake.

PRECAUTIONS

Start the engine when using the Mobile Enter-

tainment System.

WARNING

The driver must not attempt to operate the

Mobile Entertainment System or wear the

headphones while the vehicle is in motion

so that full attention may be given to ve-

hicle operation.

Park the vehicle in a safe location and

apply the parking break to view the im-

ages on the front center display screen

using the DVD player.

CAUTION

●Only operate the Mobile Entertainment

System while the engine is running. Op-

erating the Mobile Entertainment Sys-

tem for extended periods of time with

the engine turned off can discharge the

vehicle battery (12V battery).

●Do not allow the system to get wet.

Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-

uids may cause the system to

malfunction.

●While playing VIDEO-CD media, this

DVD player does not guarantee com-

plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD

formats.

MOBILE ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

(MES) (if so equipped)

4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TECHNICAL INFORMATION

USB media support

Supported USB media

USB 1.1 Low Speed (1.5 Mbps), Full

Speed (12 Mbps)

USB 2.0 Low Speed (1.5 Mbs), Full

Speed (12 Mbps), High

Speed (480 Mps)

Mass Storage Support

The Mobile Entertainment System recognizes the

connected USB media as a mass storage device.

Supported file systems and partition

The first partition of the following file systems are

supported.

●NTFS

●FAT32

●FAT16

●HFS+

Supported folder structure

Folders 1,000 folders maximum

Files 10, 000 files maximum

Pass length 3072 characters

Full name length 232 characters

Folder levels 11 levels maximum (when

route is regarded as level 0)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89

Supported format and decode

Video codec

Codec Profile Maximum Resolution/Frame Rate Notes

DivX DivX 3.11/4/5/6 SD (720 x 576)/30 Only single-instance playback is supported

for DivX 3.11.

Flash - 1080 p/30 -

H.263 - 1080 p/30 -

H.264 BP/MP/HP 1080 p/30 Extended file not supported.

MPEG-1 - 1080 p/30 -

MPEG-2 MP@ML 1080 p/30 -

MPEG-4 SP/ASP 1080 p/30 -

Real Video RV8/9/10 1080 p/30 -

XviD - SD (720 x 576)/30 -

WMV7/8 - D1/30 HD version not provided.

Only single instance playback is supported

for WMV7/8

WMV9/VC-1 SP/MP/AP 1080 p/30 Complex Profile not supported.

4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio codec

Codec Supported Bitrates Sampling Frequency Channels Codec Features Supported

AAC (MPEG4 AAC-LC) 8 kbps - 320 kbps 8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 24,

32, 44.1, 48 KHz

Mono/Stereo/ 5.1 -> Stereo

Downmixing

- Complies with ISO/IEC 13818-7

- ADTS/ADIF Output

- Modes: Mono, Stereo, Dual Mono, Joint Stereo (Intensity

Stereo (IS) and Mid-side Stereo (MS))

- All tools of 13818-7 LC + PNS supported

- CRC check supported

- Header formats: AAC, ADIF, ADTS

AAC+ (ENHANCED

AAC+)

Up to 264 kbps Up to 48 KHz Mono/Stereo - Modes: Mono, Stereo, Dual Mono

- Header formats: ADIF, ADTS

Linear PCM - Up to 48 KHz Stereo Max 16bit only

RealAudio (3, 6, 9, 10) 6 to 96 kbps 8, 11.025, 22.05, 44.1 KHz Mono/Stereo Downmixing is not supported.

Dolby Digital 64 to 640 kbps 48 KHz Mono/Stereo/ 5.1 -> Stereo

Downmixing

Modes: Mono, Stereo, 5.1 -> Stereo Downmixing

MP3 32 to 320 kbps

(MPEG-1 Layer 1,2,3)

8 to 160 kbps

(MPEG-2 Layer 1,2,3)

8/11.025/12 KHz

(MPEG-2.5)

16/22.05 /24 KHz

(MPEG-2)

32/44.1/48 KHz (MPEG-1)

Mono/Stereo - Complies with ISO 11172-3 and ISO 13818-3

- Modes: Mono, Stereo, Dual Mono, Joint Stereo (Intensity

Stereo (IS) and Mid-side Stereo (MS))

- CRC check supported

OGG Vorbis Up to 128 kbps 8 to 48 KHz Mono/Stereo -

WMA v9 (std)

WMA v10 (std)

Up to 384 kbps Up to 48 KHz Mono/Stereo - Decodes WMA streams generated using encoder v2, v7,

v8, v9, v10 content.

- Supports all L1, L2, and L3 profiles.

Depending on the combination of video codec, audio codec, and format, some files cannot be played with the Mobile Entertainment System.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91

Combinations of video/audio codecs and playable file extensions

Video Audio Codec Extenstion

H.263 AAC “.3gp”, “.3g2”

H.264 AAC “.avi”, “.3gp”, “.3g2”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

AAC+ “.avi”, “.3gp”, “.3g2”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

Linear PCM “.avi”, “.divx”

Dolby Digital “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”, “.m2ts”, “.mts”

MP3 “.avi”, “.flv”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

WMA “.avi”, “.divx”

Divx AAC “.avi”, “.divx”

Linear PCM “.avi”, “.divx”

Dolby Digital “.avi”, “.divx”

MP3 “.avi”, “.divx”

WMA “.avi”, “.divx”

XviD AAC “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

AAC+ “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

Linear PCM “.avi”, “.divx”

Dolby Digital “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

MP3 “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

WMA “.avi”, “.divx”

MPEG-1 AAC “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

AAC+ “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

Linear PCM “.avi”, “.divx”

Dolby Digital “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.mpg”, “.divx”, “.mov”

MP3 “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.mpg”, “.mpeg”, “.divx”, “.mov”

WMA “.avi”, “.divx”

4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Video Audio Codec Extenstion

MPEG-2 AAC “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”

AAC+ “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”

Linear PCM “.avi”, “.divx”

Dolby Digital “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.mpg”, “.divx”

MP3 “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.mpg”, “.divx”

WMA “.avi”, “.divx”

MPEG-4 AAC “.avi”, “.3gp”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

AAC+ “.avi”, “.3gp”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

Linear PCM “.avi”, “.divx”

Dolby Digital “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

MP3 “.avi”, “.mp4”, “.m4v”, “.divx”, “.mov”

WMA “.avi”, “.divx”

WMV7/8 AAC “.avi”, “.divx”

Linear PCM “.avi”, “.divx”

Dolby Digital “.avi”, “.divx”

MP3 “.avi”, “.divx”

WMA “.avi”, “.wmv”, “.divx”

WMV9/VC-1 Linear PCM “.avi”, “.divx”

Dolby Digital “.avi”, “.divx”

MP3 “.avi”, “.divx”

WMA “.avi”, “.wmv”, “.divx”

Flash MP3 “.flv”

Real Video Real Audio “.rmvb”, “.rm”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93

Video Audio Codec Extenstion

Without Picture (Audio only) AAC “.m4a”, “.aac”

AAC+ “.m4a”, “.aac”

Linear PCM “.wav”, “.aiff”

Dolby Digital “.m4a”, “.ac3”

MP3 “.mp3”, “.m4a”

Ogg Vorbis “.ogg”

WMA “.wma”

4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Apple support

When an iPhone®, iPad®, or iPod® is con-

nected, the MES will play music with the iPod

technology and initiate quick charging (up to 2.1

A). The following Apple products are supported:

●iPhone® 5s (iOS 7.0.4)

●iPhone® 5c (iOS 7.1)

●iPhone® 5 (iOS 6.1.4)

●iPhone® 4S (iOS 5.1.1)

●iPhone® 4 (iOS 7.1)

●iPhone® 3GS (iOS 6.1.6)

●iPhone® 3G (iOS 4.2.1)

●iPad® (4th generation) (iOS 7.0.4)

●iPad® (3rd generation) (iOS 6.0)

●iPad® (2nd generation) (iOS6.0)

●iPad® (1st generation) (iOS 5.1.1)

●iPad Air® (iOS 7.0.4)

●iPad mini

(2nd generation) (iOS 7.0.4)

●iPad mini

(1st generation) (iOS 7.0.4)

●iPod touch® (5th generation) (iOS 6.1.3)

●iPod touch® (4th generation) (iOS 6.1.3)

●iPod touch® (3rd generation) (iOS 5.1.1)

●iPod touch® (2nd generation) (iOS 4.2.1)

●iPod touch® (1st generation) (iOS 3.1.3)

●iPod nano® (7th generation) (Firmware ver-

sion 1.0.2)

●iPod nano® (6th generation) (Firmware ver-

sion 1.2)

●iPod nano® (5th generation) (Firmware ver-

sion 1.0.2)

●iPod nano® (4th generation) (Firmware ver-

sion 1.0.3)

●iPod nano® (3rd generation) (Firmware ver-

sion 1.1.2)

●iPod nano® (2nd generation) (Firmware ver-

sion 1.1.3)

●iPod nano® (1st generation) (Firmware ver-

sion 1.3.1)

●iPod classic® (160 GB) (End 2009) (Firm-

ware version 2.0.4)

●iPod classic® (120 GB) (Firmware version

2.0.1)

●iPod classic® (Firmware version 1.1.2)

“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”, and “Made

for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has

been designed to connect specifically to iPod,

iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been cer-

tified by the developer to meet Apple perfor-

mance standards. Apple is not responsible for

the operation of this device or its compliance with

safety and regulatory standards. Please note that

the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone, or

iPad may affect wireless performance.

iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod

touch, and Retina are trademarks of Apple Inc.,

registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPad

Air and iPad mini are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Licenses

Dolby:

Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora-

tories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trade-

marks of Dolby Laboratories.

DivX:

This DivX Certified® device has passed rigorous

testing to ensure it plays DivX® video.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95

To play purchased DivX movies, first register your

device at vod.divx.com. Find your registration

code in the DivX VOD section of your device

setup menu.

DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logos

are trademarks of DivX, LLC and are used under

license.

Covered by one or more of the following U.S.

patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;

8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.

DivX Certified® to play DivX® video, including

premium content.

DivX®, DivX Certified®

and associated logos are

trademarks of DivX, LLC

and are used under

license.

RMVB:

Portions of this software are included under li-

cense from RealNetworks, Inc. Copyright

1995–2011, RealNetworks, Inc. All rights re-

served.

HDMI:

The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Mul-

timedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are trade-

marks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licens-

ing LLC in the United States and other countries.

MPEG4–AVC (H.264):

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE

AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE

PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERICIAL USE

OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN

COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD

(“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC

VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CON-

SUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND

NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS

OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LI-

CENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LI-

CENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED

FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFOR-

MATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,

L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

VC-1:

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE

VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE

PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE

OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN

COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD

(“VC-1 VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1

VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CON-

SUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND

NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS

OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LI-

CENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LI-

CENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED

FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFOR-

MATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA,

L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

MPEG-4 VISUAL:

USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER

THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUAL

STANDARD IS PROHIBITED, EXCEPT FOR

USE BY A CONSUMER ENGAGING IN PER-

SONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVI-

TIES.

MP3:

MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology li-

censed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.

WMA/WMV:

This product includes technology owned by Mi-

crosoft Corporation and under a license from

Microsoft Licensing, GP. Use or distribution of

such technology outside of this product is pro-

hibited without a license from Microsoft

Corporation and/or Microsoft Licensing, GP as

applicable.

4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Natune surround sound:

Le son surround Natune

est un terme général pour

la famille de la dernière

technologie de traitement

de signal acoustique

produite par DiMAGIC

Co., Ltd.

CONNECTING REAR MEDIA

INTERFACE

Ports for the USB 䊊

1and HDMI 䊊

2interface are

located at the rear of the center console box.

Compatible devices connected to the ports can

be played on the rear displays. Turn off the power

of the portable device before connecting to the

port.

LHA4288

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97

REMOTE CONTROLLER AND

HEADPHONES

Remote controller

A remote controller is provided with the Mobile

Entertainment System.

The remote controller is for the rear display op-

eration and cannot be used to control portable

devices.

The following buttons/switches are on the re-

mote controller.

䊊

1button

The rear displays can be activated or deac-

tivated individually.

䊊

2HOME button

Push to display the HOME screen. Select

the media from the DVD, AUX, USB and

HDMI interface device.

䊊

3buttons (select

buttons)

Push the select buttons to select the items

displayed on the rear screens.

䊊

4BACK button

Push to go back to the previous screen

䊊

5Keypad

Push the keys below for operations.

button Push play or pause the movie

button Push to stop playing the

movie

button Push to select the next chap-

ter. Push and hold to fast-forward the chap-

ter.

button Push once to return to the

beginning of the current chapter. Push again

to select the previous chapter. Push and

hold to rewind the current chapter.

button Push to fast forward skipping

a number of seconds (for DVD-VIDEO).

JVH1388X

4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

button Push to rewind skipping a

number of seconds (for DVD-VIDEO).

䊊

6SPEAKER button

Push to turn on all of the in-vehicle speakers.

䊊

7Volume control button +-

Push to adjust the speaker volume.

䊊

8DISPLAY SELECT button

Slide the switch to the side corresponding to

the screen you wish to operate (L or R).

䊊

9MENU button

Push to display the operation screen for the

source that is being played. For additional

information, refer to “Menus” in this section.

䊊

10 ENTER button

Push to execute the selected item.

䊊

11 SET UP button

Push to display the rear seat display set-

tings. For additional information, refer to

“Settings and information” in this section.

䊊

12 HEADPHONE button

Push to turn on the sound from the head-

phones and turn off the speakers

䊊

13 button

Push to turn on the backlighting of the re-

mote controller buttons.

Battery replacement:

CAUTION

●An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●When changing the batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the components.

NOTE:

Change the batteries of the remote control-

ler when it does not function properly.

To replace the battery:

1. Open the lid as illustrated above.

2. Replace both batteries with new ones.

●Recommended battery: Size AA x 2

●Be careful not to touch the battery terminal.

●Make sure that the and ends on

the batteries match the markings inside the

compartment.

JVH0246X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99

3. Close the lid securely.

●If you will not be using the remote controller

for long periods of time, remove the batteries

●Replacement of the batteries is needed

when the remote controller only functions at

extremely close distances to the Mobile En-

tertainment System or when is does not

function at all.

Headphones

Two wireless headphones are provided with the

Mobile Entertainment System. The headphones

can only be used in the rear seats.

1. MODE button

Push to select a surround audio mode opti-

mal for the media. Three types of virtual

surround modes supported by natune sur-

round sound technology are available.

When the surround audio modes are turned

off, a regular 2.0 ch stereo mode is applied.

JVH0598X

4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CINEMA

Optimum mode for movies. Provides power-

ful surround audio as if you are in a theater.

MUSIC

Provides natural and clear sounds with sta-

bility optimal for listening to music.

GAME

Provides realistic sounds for playing games

with bass enhanced sounds.

2. Mode indicators

The selected surround audio mode will illu-

minate.

3. DISPLAY SELECT button

Slide this switch to select which of the audio

sources to listen to when the rear displays

are playing different sources.

L: the headphone will play audio from the

source playing on the left display

R: the headphone will play audio from the

source playing on the right display

4. ON/OFF button

Push to turn the headphones on or off.

5. Power ON/OFF indicator

Illuminates when the headphones are turned

on.

6. VOL button

Turn to adjust the volume.

Operating tips:

●The headphones will automatically turn off

after several minutes if there is no audio

output during that period. The headphones

will also turn off after approximately 4 hours

of continuous use. To prevent the battery

from being discharged, keep the power

turned off when not in use.

●If the sound from the headphones is not

clear, it may be due to interference from an

infrared communication device or a cellular

phone. If this happens, turn down the head-

phone volume or stop using the head-

phones. It is also possible that the head-

phones may be too far or offset from the

transmitter which is in the rear display

screen. Use the headphones in front of the

rear display.

●The sound may also be interrupted tempo-

rarily when there is something between the

headphones and the transmitter causing in-

terference. Move the source of interference,

such as opaque materials, hands, hair, etc.

Battery replacement:

CAUTION

●An improperly disposed battery can

harm the environment. Always confirm

local regulations for battery disposal.

●When changing the batteries, do not let

dust or oil get on the components.

NOTE:

Change the batteries of the headphones

when they stop functioning while playing or

when noise is produced.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101

To replace the battery:

1. Open the lid as illustrated above.

For headphones, use a flat object, such as a

coin, if necessary, to open the lid located on

the back of the left headphone speaker.

2. Replace both batteries with new ones.

●Recommended battery: Size AAA x 2

●Be careful not to touch the battery terminal

●Make sure that the and ends on

the batteries match the markings inside the

compartment.

3. Close the lid securely.

ACTIVATING REAR DISPLAYS

CAUTION

●The glass screen on the display screen

may break if hit with a hard or sharp

object. If the glass breaks, do not touch

the liquid crystalline material. In case of

contact with skin, wash immediately

with soap and water.

●Applying pressure to a display screen

may damage it. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Care and maintenance” in

this section.

JVH0592X

5GA0119X

4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

The rear displays are located on the back of the

front head restraints.

Use the remote controller to operate the rear

display screens. For additional information, refer

to “Remote controller” in this section.

Select the left or right rear display using the

DISPLAY SELECT button on the remote control-

ler and push the button to activate the

corresponding rear display. When the display is

turned on, a green indicator on the lower left

corner of the display will illuminate.

The lower part of the rear displays 䊊

1functions

as a signal receiver/transmitter for the remote

controller and wireless headphones, and should

not be blocked or covered.

Turning the rear displays on and off can also be

controlled on the front display. For additional

information, refer to “Controlling the rear system

on the front display” in this section.

NOTE:

●The rear displays may turn off automatically

when the temperature is high to protect the

display screens from being damaged.

●The movement of the images displayed on

the rear displays could slow down when the

temperature is below 32°F (0°C) but this is

not a malfunction. The movement will return

to normal when the temperature rises be-

tween 32°F (0°C) and 122°F (50°C).

●The following conditions may occur but

these are characteristics of the crystal dis-

play and are not malfunctions:

– Black spots, bright spots and after-

images appear on this display.

– The screen appears faint or dimmed de-

pending on the angle viewed.

OPERATIONS ON REAR DISPLAYS

Use the remote controller and take the following

steps to operate the rear displays in the rear

seats:

1. Turn on the rear displays using

the button on the remote controller.

2. Push the HOME button and select a source

from the DVD, AUX, USB or HDMI interface

devices.

When USB is selected for the first time after

the USB device is connected, select a file

you with to play from the File Browser

screen.

JVH1389X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103

Menus

Push the MENU button on the remote controller

to display the operation screen for the source that

is playing. Select and adjust the preferred items

using the Select buttons and the ENTER button

on the remote controller. The available menu

items differ depending on the selected source.

Available menu items:

●“Speaker Output” key

When this item is turned on, the audio of the

source playing on the corresponding rear

display will be output to the vehicle speak-

ers.

●“Top Menu” key (DVD only)

Select to display the top menu screen.

●“Title Menu” key (DVD only)

Menus specific to each disc will be shown.

For details, see the instructions attached to

the disc.

●“Title Search” key (DVD only)

A scene that belongs to a specified title will

be displayed each time the “+” key side or

the “—” key side is selected.

●“Use Keypad” key (DVD only)

Select the “Keypad” key and push the EN-

TER button to open the number entry

screen. Enter the number you want to search

for and select the “OK” key with the remote

controller. The selected Title/Chapter will be

played.

●“Audio” key (DVD, USB (DivX) only)

Select a preferred language for the audio

output.

●“Subtitle” key (DVD, USB (DivX) only)

Choose the preferred subtitle language set-

ting.

●“Angle” key (DVD only)

If the DVD contains data of different angles,

the angle of the image can be changed.

●“File Browser” key (USB only)

The data contained in the USB can be

browsed. The tracks are automatically cat-

egorized by playlists, songs, artists, com-

posers, genres, etc.

●“Play Mode” key (USB only)

Select a preferred play mode from the “Nor-

mal” key/”Repeat” key/”Shuffle” key.

●“Aspect Ratio” key

Aspect can be selected from Normal, Wide,

Cinema and Full.

●“Select No.” key (DVD (Video-CD) only)

Select a section number you wish to play.

SETTINGS AND INFORMATION

Various settings for the MES such as aspect

ratio, language, etc. can be changed on the rear

displays.

Push the SET UP button on the remote controller

and select the preferred item using the Select

button and ENTER button to change the rear

display settings and to view the system informa-

tion.

Available items:

●“System Settings” key

●“Display Settings” key

●“Information” key

System settings

To change the settings of the Mobile Entertain-

ment System, push the SET UP button on the

remote controller and select the “System Set-

tings” key.

Select the preferred item and adjust the setting

using the remote controller.

4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Available items:

●“Aspect Ratio” key

Select the image size from Normal, Wide,

Cinema and Full.

●“Language” key

The language displayed on the screen can

be changed. Select the “Manual” key and

then select a preferred language from the

list. To apply the same language that is ap-

plied to the front display, select the “Auto”

key.

The language of the rear menu screens can

be set independently from the front display.

The rear display language settings will be

applied to both the rear left and rear right

displays.

●“Operation Guide” key

When this item is turned on, an explanation

for the menu highlighted on the screen will

appear at the bottom of the screen.

●“DivX® VOD” key

DivX® VOD license information can be

viewed.

Display settings

To change the rear display settings, push the SET

UP button on the remote controller and select the

“Display Settings” key.

Select the preferred item and adjust the setting

using the remote controller.

Available items

●“Display Adjustment” key

– “Picture Mode” key

Select image quality from Normal, Dy-

namic, Cinema and Game.

– “Auto Bright” key

Select from Normal, Bright, OFF and

Dark. The brightness of the screen is ad-

justed automatically according to the

brightness inside the vehicle compart-

ment. The sensor is located on the right

side corner of the rear displays.

– “Brightness”, “Tint”, “Contrast”, “Color”

and “Black Level” keys

Adjust the levels using the

or buttons on the remote control-

ler.

– “Default” key

Select this item to reset the screen set-

tings to the default value.

●“Automatic Detail Enhancement” key

The enhancement of the contrast for details

can be adjusted automatically with this func-

tion. Select the level of the function from

High, Medium and Low.

●“Super Resolution” key

Blurred images with a low resolution can be

converted and adjusted into more crisp,

clearer images. Select the level of the func-

tion from High, Medium or Low.

●“Automatic Contrast Adjustment” key

Objects in dark images that are difficult to

view can be adjusted and enhanced auto-

matically for clearer viewing. Select the level

of the function from High, Medium or Low.

●“Noise Reduction” key

With the noise reduction function, block

noise that accompanies images can be re-

duced. Select the level of the function from

High, Medium or Low.

Software information

To display the software information of the Mobile

Entertainment System, push the SET UP button

on the remote controller and select the “Informa-

tion” key.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105

CONTROLLING THE REAR SYSTEM

ON THE FRONT DISPLAY

To control the rear displays and the rear speakers

on the front display, push the AUDIO button on

the control panel and touch the “Rear Display”

key. For additional information, refer to “Selecting

audio source” in this section.

The Mobile Entertainment System screen will

appear on the front display, allowing the system

to be controlled from the front seats.

䊊

1Status display icons

Status of the speakers and the remote con-

troller is shown in icons. Touch the icons to

change the setting.

䊊

2Source selection indicator

Touch the left/right rear display icon to dis-

play the operation screen. The currently se-

lected source on the corresponding rear dis-

play can be operated from the screen.

䊊

3Speaker status indicator

Indicates which of the audio sources is se-

lected to be heard from the speaker. Touch

to show the Rear Sound Control screen and

change the speaker setting.

䊊

4Setting menu

Various settings can be changed. Touch a

preferred menu to change the setting.

Available setting items

–“L Display Power key/R Display

Power” key

Touch to turn on or off the rear display on

the left/right side.

–“Mute” key

Touch to mute or unmute all the speakers

and the headphones.

–“Select Rear Source” key

Touch to display the Select Rear Source

screen. Select the “Left Screen” key or

the “Right Screen” key and then select a

source to be played on the screen.

–“Rear Sound Control” key

Touch to display the Rear Sound Control

screen. Select a sound setting from the

following items:

●“No rear sound — front only” key

●“Play sound for left display” key

●“Play sound for right display” key

–”Source Control” key

Touch to display the operation screen for

the currently selected source. Touch the

“Left Screen” key or the “Right Screen”

key to select which of the rear displays

you wish to operate.

–”Remote Controller Lock” key

Touch to lock or unlock the remote con-

troller operation.

When the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position, the remote con-

troller will be unlocked.

–“Rr Speaker Mute” key

Touch to mute or unmute the rear speakers

–“Auto Display Power ON” key

Touch to turn on or off the setting for

automatic power on setting. When this

item is turned on, both the left and right

rear displays will turn on automatically

when the DVD is inserted into the front

unit and the movie will start to play.

JVH1390X

4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

OPERATING TIPS

●The rear USB (rear media interface) and the

rear HDMI cannot be played on the front

screen.

●Devices connected to the USB connection

port for the front display cannot be played on

the rear displays.

●When connecting a device to the USB port

for the first time, the system structures the

file list and this could slow down the opera-

tion speed. This is not a malfunction.

●The operation speed of the system could

slow down when the left and right displays

play different files from the same device con-

nected to the USB port. This is not a mal-

function.

●Images from DVDs or devices connected to

the USB port may not be displayed in ad-

equate ratio depending on the resolution. To

correct the ratio, adjust the aspect using the

remote controller. For additional information,

refer to “System settings” in this section.

●If a computer with an HDMI output terminal

is connected to the HDMI input terminal, the

computer may not automatically shift to the

output mode. To view images on the rear

displays, operate the computer and change

the mode to the output mode according to

the computer Owner’s Manual.

Multiple source display

It is possible to play different sources on each

display

Refer to the following table of example combina-

tions.

Playback combinations by media:

Rear Display (L) Rear Display

(R)

Availability of

playback on the

left and right dis-

play

DVD DVD Simultaneous

playback

DVD USB Individual play-

back

DVD HDMI Individual play-

back

HDMI HDMI Simultaneous

playback

HDMI USB Individual play-

back

Rear Display (L) Rear Display

(R)

Availability of

playback on the

left and right dis-

play

USB USB Individual play-

back*1

*1: When playing a USB device simultaneously

on the left and right displays, playback may be

limited by the image quality (resolution) of the

data. Refer to the following examples of combi-

nations. However, when the system is under a

heavy load, there are some combinations that

cannot be played.

Combinations according to USB device image

quality

Rear Display (L) Rear Display (R) Availability of

individual play-

back on the left

and right display

FULL HD (Maxi-

mum 1920 x

1080p)

FULL HD (Maxi-

mum 1920 x

1080p)

X (Simultaneous

playback)

FULL HD (Maxi-

mum 1920 x

1080p)

SD (Maximum

720 x 480p)

HD (Maximum

1280 x 720p)

HD (Maximum

1280 x 720p)

X (Simultaneous

playback)

HD (Maximum

1280 x 720p)

QHD (Maximum

960 x 540p)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107

Rear Display (L) Rear Display (R) Availability of

individual play-

back on the left

and right display

HD (Maximum

1280 x 720p)

SD (Maximum

720 x 480p)

QHD (Maximum

960 x 540p)

QHD (Maximum

960 x 540p)

QHD (Maximum

960 x 540p)

SD (Maximum

720 x 480p)

SD (Maximum

720 x 480p)

SD (Maximum

720 x 480p)

FULL HD (Maxi-

mum 1920 x

1080p)

HD (Maximum

1280 x 720p)

X (Files selected

from the rear

cannot be

played. Enjoy the

combinations

that can be

played)

FULL HD (Maxi-

mum 1920 x

1080p)

QHD (Maximum

960 x 540p)

X (Files selected

from the rear

cannot be

played. Enjoy the

combinations

that can be

played)

NOTE:

●Different movie files cannot be played on the

left and right displays at the same time if

either or both of the movie files contain im-

ages with high resolution.

●When DVD or AUX device is selected to be

played on the rear displays, different movie

files cannot be played on the left and right

displays at the same time.

CARE AND MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

●Do not apply excessive force to the

monitor screen.

●Avoid touching or scratching the moni-

tor as it may become dirty or damaged.

●Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme temperature conditions [below

-4°F (-20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)]

●Do not attempt to operate the system in

extreme humidity (less than 10% or

more than 75%)

●For cleaning, turn the rear displays off

and use a soft dry cloth. Never use a

rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or

any kind of solvent or paper towel with

a chemical cleaning agent. They will

scratch or cause discoloration to the

displays. If dirt does not come off with a

dry cloth, slightly dampen the cloth with

neutral detergent.

AUDIO SETTINGS

Audio settings can be adjusted or audio related

functions can be turned on/off using the following

procedure.

Some of the setting items may not be displayed

when the audio system is turned off.

1. Push the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Audio” key.

The following setting items are available:

*: Availability of the item depends on the

model and specifications.

●“Sound Settings” key

4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Setting Items Action

“Bass” key Adjust the speaker tone quality and sound balance by touching the “+”/”-” keys, “L”/“R”

keys or “R”/“F” keys.

“Treble” key

“Balance” key

“Fader” key

“Bose® Centerpoint” key* When this item is turned on, surround sound playback is generated from a traditional ste-

reo recording. Turn on this item to activate Bose® Centerpoint and to change its effect

level with the “Surround Vol” key.

“Surround Vol” key* Touch the “+”/”-” keys to adjust the “Surround Vol” key level if Bose® Centerpoint is

turned on.

“Speed Sensitive Vol” key* This automatically adjusts the volume depending on the vehicle speed. Touch the “+”/”-”

keys to change the sensitivity level.

“Driver’s Audio Stage” key* When this item is turned on, a better sound quality will be provided to the driver’s

position. The driver can enjoy a more crisp and clear sound that is specialized for the driv-

er’s seat position. The prominence of the effect of this feature depends on the type of mu-

sic that is played. For some music, it may be difficult to recognize the effect of this feature.

●“Display Album Cover Art” key

Turn this item on to display image files from the media device. If the media device does not contain images, no image will be displayed.

●“Radio Settings” key

Setting Items Action

“HD Mode AM” key When this item is turned on, the analog and digital reception switches automatically.

When this item is turned off, the reception is fixed in the analog mode.

“HD Mode FM” key

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109

●“DVD Settings” key*

Setting Items Action

“Angle” key Images and movies can be viewed in different angles if the DVD contains this data. Switch the angle

number by touching the “+”/“-” keys.

“CM Skip” key Select commercial skip length from 15, 30, and 60 seconds.

“DRC” key Select the DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) setting from OFF, 1 and 2. DRC allows tuning of the dy-

namic range of sound recorded in the Dolby Digital format.

“Angle Mark” key Turn the angle mark display on/off. When this item is turned on, “Multi Angle” will be displayed on the

DVD screen.

“Menu Skip” key DVD menus are automatically configured and the contents will be played directly when this item is turned

on. Note that some discs may not be played directly even if this item is turned on.

“DOWN MIX” key When this item is turned on, a multi-channel recording will be converted to a traditional two channel (ste-

reo) recording.

“DVD Language” key Enter the language code of the preferred language.

“Language” key Changeable items will vary depending on the type of DVD.

For DVD-V:

Audible language can be changed by touching the “+”/“-” keys.

For Video CD:

Select the sound setting from Main audio, Sub audio and Main/Sub audio.

For DVD VR:

Select the sound setting from Main audio 1, Sub audio 1, Main/Sub audio 1, Main audio 2, Sub audio 2,

and Main/Sub audio 2.

“Subtitle” key The subtitle language can be changed by touching the “+” or “-” keys.

“DVD Screen Settings” key Touch to adjust the DVD aspect ratio.

“PG/PL Mode” key Touch to switch the PG/PL mode setting.

INFO:

The available setting items differ depending on the DVD.

4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●“AUX settings” key

Setting Items Action

“AUX Image Display” key The image display size setting can be selected from the “Normal”, “Wide” and “Cinema”

keys.

“Volume Setting” key The volume setting can be selected from the “Low”, “Medium” and “High” keys.

INFO:

Image display can be turned on/off by touching the “Image ON”/“Image OFF” keys on the upper right corner on the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111

DISC/USB MEMORY DEVICE CARE

AND CLEANING

Discs

●Handle a disc by its edges. Never touch the

surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.

●Always place discs in their storage cases

when they are not being used.

●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the

center to the outer edge using a clean, soft

cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular

motion.

Do not use a conventional record cleaner or

alcohol intended for industrial use.

●The inner and outer edges of a new disc may

be rough. Remove the rough edges by rub-

bing the inner and outer edges with the side

of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

USB memory device

●Never touch the terminal portion of the USB

memory device.

●Do not place heavy objects on the USB

memory device.

●Do not store the USB memory device in very

humid locations.

●Do not expose the USB memory device to

direct sunlight.

●Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory

device.

Refer to the owner’s manual for the USB memory

device for details.

GRACENOTE® END USER LICENSE

AGREEMENT

This application or device contains software from

Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California

(“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the

“Gracenote Software”) enables this application

to perform disc and/or file identification and ob-

tain music-related information, including name,

artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote

Data”) from online servers or embedded data-

bases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to

perform other functions. You may use Gracenote

Data only by means of the intended End-User

functions of this application or device.

You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the

Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for

your own personal non-commercial use only. You

agree not to assign, copy, transfer, or transmit the

Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to

any third part. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR

EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACE

SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EX-

CEPT WHEN EXPRESSLY PERMITTED

HEREIN.

You agree that your non-exclusive license to use

the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,

and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-

late these restrictions. If your license terminates,

you agree to cease any and all use of the

Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights

in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and

the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership

rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote

become liable for any payment to you for any

information that you provide. You agree that

SAA0451

4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this

Agreement against you directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to

track queries for statistical purposes. The pur-

pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is

to allow the Gracenote service to count queries

without knowing anything about who you are. For

more information, see the web page for the

Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote ser-

vice.

The Gracenote Software and each item of

Gracenote Data is licensed to you “AS IS”.

Gracenote makes no representations or warran-

ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy

of any Gracenote Data from the Gracenote Serv-

ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data

from the Gracenote Servers or to change data

categories for any cause that Gracenote seems

sufficient. No warranty is made that the

Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are

error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-

ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with

new enhanced or additional data types or cat-

egories that Gracenote may provide in the future

and is free to discontinue its services at any time.

GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT

LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-

CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-

SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR

USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR

ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE

WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY

CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-

AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST

REVENUES.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in

your vehicle, be sure to observe the following

precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may

adversely affect the engine control system and

other electronic parts.

WARNING

●A cellular phone should not be used for

any purpose while driving so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of

cellular phones while driving.

●If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may be

given to vehicle operation.

●If you are unable to devote full attention

to vehicle operation while talking on

the phone, pull off the road to a safe

location and stop your vehicle.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113

CAUTION

●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic control

system harnesses. Do not route the an-

tenna wire next to any harness.

●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio

as recommended by the manufacturer.

●Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

●For details, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

WARNING

●Only use a phone after stopping your

vehicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full atten-

tion may be given to vehicle operation.

●If you find yourself unable to devote full

attention to vehicle operation while

talking on the phone, pull off the road in

a safe location and stop your vehicle

before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, only

use a phone after starting the engine.

Your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an owner

of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phone, you can set up the wireless connection

between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless tech-

nology, you can make or receive a telephone call

with your cellular phone in your pocket.

Once a cellular phone is connected to the in-

vehicle phone module, the procedure for con-

necting the phone does not need to be per-

formed again. Your phone is automatically

selected by the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is switched to the ON position

with the selected cellular phone turned on and

carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to five different Bluetooth®

cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.

However, you can talk on only one cellular phone

at a time.

The Voice Recognition system supports phone

commands, so dialing a phone number using

your voice is possible. For additional information,

refer to “Voice Recognition system” in this

manual.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, refer to the following notes.

●Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®

functions share the same frequency band

(2.4GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and wire-

less LAN functions at the same time may

slow down or disrupt communications and

could cause undesired noise. It is recom-

mended that you turn wireless LAN (Wi-Fi)

off when using the Bluetooth® functions.

●Set up the wireless connection between a

compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle

phone module before using the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Pone System.

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM

4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular phones

may not be recognized by the in-vehicle

phone module. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ and search

for a recommended phone list.

●You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside the service area for

your cellular phone network.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive radio waves, such as in

a tunnel, in an underground parking ga-

rage, behind a tall building or in a moun-

tainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked in order to

prevent dialing.

●When the radio wave condition is not ideal

or ambient sound is too loud, it may be

difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-

ing a call.

●This Bluetooth® system supports Wide-

band speech, which enhances the sound

quality of phone calls placed over

Bluetooth®. To take advantage of this fea-

ture, the cellular device should be used on a

carrier supporting Adaptive MultiRate Wide-

band (AMR-WB) or HD voice technology.

The performance of AMR-WB may vary by

carrier and calling area. Consult your cellular

carrier if you experience issues with call

quality or connection.

●Immediately after the ignition switch is

turned ON, it may be impossible to receive a

call for a short period of time.

●Do not place the cellular phone in an area

surrounded by metal or far away from the

in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone

quality degradation and wireless connection

disruption.

●While a cellular phone is connected through

the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the

battery of the cellular phone may discharge

quicker than usual.

●If the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem seems to be malfunctioning, please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ for trouble-

shooting help.

●Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to be

emitted from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location may

reduce or eliminate the noise.

●Refer to the owner’s manual for the cellular

phone for information regarding the tele-

phone pairing procedure specific to your

phone, battery charging , and cellular phone

antenna, etc.

●The antenna display on the monitor may not

match the antenna display of some cellular

phones.

●The battery display on the monitor may not

match the battery display of some cellular

phones.

●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as

possible to her the caller’s voice clearly as

well as to minimize echoes.

●If reception between callers is unclear, ad-

justing the incoming or outgoing call volume

may improve the clarity.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory Information

FCC ID: HYQDNNS086

NOTE:

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-

posure limits set forth for uncontrolled environ-

ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)

Exposure Guidelines. This equipment has very

low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply

without maximum permissive exposure evaluation

(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-

stalled and operated with at lease 20cm and

more between the radiator and person’s body.

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

IC Regulatory Information

The antenna cannot be removed (and changed)

by the user.

NOTE:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license–exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) This device may or may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation

of the device.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure

This equipment complies with IC radiation expo-

sure limits set forth for uncontrolled environment

and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency

(RF) exposure rules. This equipment has very low

levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply

without maximum permissive exposure evaluation

(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-

stalled and operated with at least 20cm and more

between the radiator and person’s body.

Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-

located or operated in conjunction with any other

antenna or transmitter.

This Class B digital apparatus meets all require-

ments of the Canadian Interference Causing

Equipment Regulations.

L’antenne ne peut être enlevé (et modifié par

l’utilisateur).

4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

Le préent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence.

L’exploitation est autorisé aux deux condi-

tions suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas

produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de

l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage ra-

dioéectrique subi, mêe si le brouillage est

susceptible d’en compromettre le fonction-

nement.

The Bluetooth® word

mark and logos are

registered trademarks

owned by Bluetooth

SIG, Inc. and any use

of such marks by

DENSO

CORPORATION is

under license. Other

trademarks and trade

names are those of

their respective

owners.

PHONE

Connecting Bluetooth® Device

Your vehicle is equipped with a Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System and Bluetooth®

streaming audio device. If you are an owner of a

compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone

or Bluetooth® audio device, you can set up the

wireless connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module, or Bluetooth®

audio and in-vehicle audio module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can make

or receive a telephone call with your cellular

phone in your pocket and listen to music on your

Bluetooth® streaming audio device via the in-

vehicle system.

Connecting cellular phone/audio device

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Bluetooth” key and touch the

“Connect Device” key.

3. Touch the “Add New (X/5 Free)” key to reg-

ister a device.

4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,

operate the compatible Bluetooth® cellular

phone to enter the PIN code.

The pairing procedure for cellular phones

varies depending on the model of cellular

phone. Refer to the owner’s manual for the

cellular phone for details.

If the registered device has both audio and

phone functions, the system displays a mes-

sage asking if you would like to register the

device for another function.

The procedure for connecting a cellular

phone/audio device varies depending on the

Bluetooth® device. Refer to the owner’s

manual for the Bluetooth® device for de-

tails.

NOTE:

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to be

emitted from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ or call NISSAN

Consumer Affairs Department for instructions on

pairing NISSAN recommended cellular phones

or audio devices.

Phone selection

Select one of the connected devices for opera-

tion.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117

1. Push the switch, then touch the “Se-

lect Phone” key. A list of the connected

cellular phones is displayed.

2. Select one of the connected cellular phones

from the list.

3. When selection of the device is successful,

a message on the display indicates that the

cellular phone was selected.

Making a call

1. Push the switch.

2. Select one of the following methods to make

a call.

Available methods

●“Favorites” key

Select a telephone number from a list of

personally selected numbers.

●“Call History” key

Select a telephone number from recent in-

coming or outgoing calls.

●“Phonebook” key

Select a telephone number from the phone-

book.

The telephone number must be transferred

to the phonebook from the cellular phone

prior to using this method. For additional

information, refer to “Phone and text mes-

sage settings” in this section.

●“Dial Number” key

Input the phone number manually using the

keypad displayed on the screen. Touch

the key to call the number. For addi-

tional information, refer to “How to input

letters and numbers” in this section.

3. The number will be dialed and the screen will

change to the call in progress screen.

NAA1720

4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Receiving a call

When you receive a phone call, a notification

message is displayed on the touch screen dis-

play with a ring tone.

Taking a call

To answer a call, take one of the following ac-

tions.

●Push the switch.

●Touch the “Answer” key.

Reject a call

To reject a call, touch the “Decline” key.

Receiving a call while on the line with an-

other person

When another phone call is received while on the

line with another person, a message box inform-

ing you of the incoming call will appear on the

display.

Available items

Available Items Action

“Answer” key Take the second call and

put the fist call on hold.

“Decline” key Reject the second call and

keep the fist call on line.

During a call

There are various options available during a call.

Select one of the following options displayed on

the screen if necessary.

Available items

Available

Items

Action

“Switch

Call” key*

Answers another incoming call. The per-

son you are talking to will be placed on

hold. Push once more to speak to the

person on hold again.

5GF0026X 5GF0018X 5GF0055X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119

Available

Items

Action

“Hang Up”

key

This disconnects the person you are

currently connected to and will connect

you to the person who is on hold.

“Mute” key/

”Cancel

Mute” key

When muted, your voice will not be

heard by the person on the other end of

the line.

“Hold Call”

key**

Places the call on hold.

“Enter Dig-

its” key

Using the touch tone, send digits to the

connected party for using services such

as voicemail.

“Use Hand-

set” key /

“Use Hands

free” key

Transfers the call to the cellular phone.

“End All

Calls” key*

Hangs up all calls including the ones

that were on hold.

*: Available when multiple lines are connected.

**: Available when a single line is connected.

●To adjust the volume of the person’s voice to

be louder or quieter, push the /

button on the steering wheel or turn the

VOL/ON • OFF button on the audio main

button, while talking on the phone.

●Touch the “Mute” key if you do not want your

voice to be heard by the person on the other

end of the line.

Bluetooth® settings

The Bluetooth® settings can be set in detail

according to the user’s preference.

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Bluetooth” key.

3. Touch the preferred item.

●“Bluetooth” key

Turns the Bluetooth® connection to the ve-

hicle on/off.

●“Connect Device” key

Touch this item to connect to the

Bluetooth® device. You can also delete a

registered device and display information for

the registered device.

●“Select Phone” key

Registered Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phones are shown on the list. Select a de-

vice from the list to disconnect or connect a

Bluetooth® device.

●“Select Audio Device” key

Registered Bluetooth® audio players are

shown on the list. Select a device from the

list to disconnect or connect a Bluetooth®

device.

●“Vehicle Bluetooth Device Info” key

The registered device name and the PIN

code can be changed.

HANDS-FREE TEXT MESSAGING

ASSISTANT

WARNING

Use the text messaging feature after park-

ing your vehicle in a safe location. If you

have to use the feature while driving, ex-

ercise extreme caution at all times so full

attention may be given to vehicle

operation.

CAUTION

This feature is disabled if the connected

device does not support the Message Ac-

cess Profile (MAP). For additional infor-

mation, refer to the owner’s manual for

your phone.

4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of

“Text-to-Speech”. Check local regulations before

using this feature.

The text messaging assistant system allows the

sending and receiving of the text messages

through the vehicle interface.

Depending on the device that is connected to the

vehicle, some of the items may not be displayed.

Receiving a message

When the cellular phone connected to the ve-

hicle receives a text message, a notification is

displayed on the display accompanied by a tone.

To check the message, touch the “Check Now”

key. Touch the “Later” key to save the message to

be checked later.

Using the text message function with iPhone®.

If you would like to use the text message function

with your iPhone®, please follow the steps be-

low.

1. Connect iPhone® to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System.

2. Disconnect iPhone® from vehicle setting

menu.

3. Turn “Show Notification” ON from

Bluetooth® setting menu on your iPhone®.

4. Connect iPhone® from vehicle setting

menu.

JVH1470M

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121

Displaying received message list

1. To display the phone menu screen, take the

following actions:

●Push the switch on the steering

wheel or control panel (if so equipped).

2. Touch the “Text Messages” key.

3. Touch an item on the list to read or to reply to

the message.

Up to 20 messages can be stored on the mes-

sage list.

Received message screen

Touching the “Check Now” key on the new mes-

sage notification screen or selecting a message

from the message list will show details of the

received message on the display.

Available actions:

●“Next” key:

Touch to read the next message.

5GF0037X NAA1656

4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

●“Previous” key:

Touch to read the previous message.

●“Reply” key:

A reply template can be selected.

For additional information, refer to “Sending

a text message” in this section.

●“Play”/ “Stop” key:

Touch the “Play” key to have the hands-free

phone system read out the received mes-

sage. Touch “Stop” to stop reading.

●“Add Template” key:

The received text message can be added to

the template (text list).

●“Call” key:

If the sender of the message is registered in

the Phonebook, touch this menu to make a

call to the sender.

●After the message is read out, a message

box will appear and an action can be

selected.

“Reply” key Create a reply message. For additional information, refer to “Sending a text message” in this section.

“Next” key Have the system read out the next message.

●If the sender’s name and address is registered in the Phonebook, the name of the sender is displayed as sender information on the screen.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123

Sending a text message

To display the phone menu screen, take the fol-

lowing actions:

1. Push the switch on the steering wheel

or on the control panel (if so equipped).

2. Touch the “Text Message” key.

3. Touch the “Compose Message” key.

The following items are available.

Available item Action

“To” key

“Keypad” key Type in the address of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the “OK” key to confirm the

address.

“Phonebook” key Select a recipient from the phonebook and touch the “OK” key to confirm.

“Template” key

Select from list Select an item from the message list. The selected text will be added to the message to be

sent.

“Edit Text Message Re-

plies” key

Select an item in the message list to be edited. Use the keypad to edit the text and touch

the “OK” key to complete editing.

“Send” key Touch to send the message.

5GF0003X

4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE

SETTINGS

Phone settings

The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System can

be set in detail according to the user’s prefer-

ence.

1. Press the Setting button.

2. Touch the “Phone/Mail” key.

3. Touch the “Phone Settings” key.

The following phone setting items are available.

Incoming Call Settings:

Setting item Action

“Ringtone” key Select a type of ringtone.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125

Phonebook/Favorites Settings:

Setting item Action

“Configure Phonebook Settings” key “Automatic Transfer Settings”

key “Phonebook Auto download” key Turns automatic download of the phonebook from the cel-

lular phone on/off.

“Call History Download” key Turns automatic download of the cellular phone call history

on/off.

“Manual Phonebook Transfer”

key “Transfer and Overwrite” key (Depend-

ing on cellular phone) Manually transfers information from the phonebook on the

cellular phone.

“Transfer and Add” key (Depending on

cellular phone)

“Delete Phonebook” key To delete a single item, select the item you wish to delete

from the list. Touch the “Delete All” key to delete all items.

To delete multiple items, touch the “Multiple Selection”

key.

“Favorites Settings” key “Delete Favorites” key To delete a single item, select the item you wish to delete

from the list. Touch the “Delete All” key to delete all items.

To delete multiple items, touch the “Multiple Selection”

key.

“Add to Favorites” key “From Phonebook” key Select items from the phonebook of the in-vehicle system

to add to the favorites.

“From Outgoing Calls” key Select items from the outgoing calls list to the in-vehicle

system to add to the favorites.

“From Incoming Calls” key Select items from the incoming calls list of the in-vehicle

system to add to the favorites.

“From Missed Calls” key Select items from the missed calls list of the in-vehicle

system to add to the favorites.

“Delete Call History” key “Delete Outgoing Call History” key To delete a single item, select the item you wish to delete

from the list. Touch the “Delete All” key to delete all items.

To delete multiple items, touch the “Multiple Selection”

key.

“Delete Incoming Call History” key

“Delete Missed Call History” key

“Delete ALL Call History” key

The volume of the ringtone, incoming call and outgoing call can also be adjusted.

4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Mail settings

Various settings can be changed from the Mail

Settings screen.

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Phone/Mail” key.

3. Touch the “Mail Settings” key.

The following mail setting items are available.

Settings item Action

“Message Download Set-

tings” key

The transfer function can

be turned on/off. When

the transfer function is on,

the phonebook on the cel-

lular phone will be auto-

matically downloaded to

the hands-free messaging

system when connected.

“Attempts for Sending”

key

The number of reattempts

after failing to send a text

message can be selected

between 0 and 3.

“New Message Alert” key The type of tone used for

the notification sound can

be selected.

“Edit Text Message Re-

plies” key

The template (text to se-

lect from when composing

an outgoing message) can

be edited.

Phonebook

Information in the phonebook on cellular phones

can be downloaded. For additional information,

refer to “Phone and text message settings” in this

section.

1. Push the switch.

2. Touch the “Phonebook” key and select from

the list.

This can be viewed on the display and used to

make calls or send text messages.

Favorites

Up to 40 phone numbers can be transferred to

the favorites list from a cellular phone.

1. Push the switch.

2. Touch the “Favorites” key and select from

the list.

It can be viewed on the display and used to make

calls or send text messages.

5GF0021X 5GF0022X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127

Voice Tag:

A custom voice tag can be recorded for phone

numbers on the favorites list and used to dial the

number by speaking it.

1. Push the switch.

2. Touch the “Favorites” key.

3. Select an item from the list.

4. Touch the “Voice Tag” key.

Available items Action

“Register” key Touch to record a voice tag for the phone number.

“Re-registration” key Touch to record the voice tag.

“Play” key Play the recorded voice tag.

“Delete” key Touch to delete the voice tag.

5GF0023X

4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® INFORMATION

Information about the connected Bluetooth® de-

vice can be viewed.

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Bluetooth” key.

3. Touch the “Vehicle Bluetooth Device Info.”

key.

The following items are available.

Available item Action

“Device Name” key The name of the connected Bluetooth® device is

displayed. Touch the “Device Name” key to display the

keyboard input screen for editing.

“Enter PIN Code” key The passkey of the connected Bluetooth® device is

displayed. Touch the “Enter PIN Code” key to display the

keyboard input screen.

Device Address The device address of the connected Bluetooth® device

is displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129

NISSANCONNECT

MOBILE APPS

OVERVIEW

Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of

some of the applications and features, such as

social networking and texting. Check local regu-

lations for any requirements.

NissanConnect

Mobile Apps provide in-

vehicle access to two types of applications: Ve-

hicle Apps and Mobile Apps (if so equipped).

Some pre-installed Vehicle Apps can be used

without taking any extra steps.

CAUTION

●While driving, some operations are lim-

ited in order to prevent distracting the

driver. While driving, avoid keeping a

close watch on the display.

●Some application services may be sub-

ject to change or termination without

prior notice.

The system allows you to download new applica-

tions, update downloaded applications and de-

lete downloaded applications in a similar manner

as popular smartphone operating systems.

You will need to connect a compatible smart-

phone to the vehicle in order to update Vehicle

Apps or use Mobile Apps.

The usage of applications is only guaranteed for

smartphones that have been tested and ap-

proved for use with NissanConnect

Mobile

Apps. Only iPhone® and Android devices are

currently supported. Android smartphones must

support Bluetooth® and SPP (Serial Port Pro-

file).

USING APPLICATIONS

NOTE:

To use APP functions on the models with-

out a navigation system, the calendar set-

ting is necessary for checking the SSL ex-

piration date. For additional information,

refer to “Clock settings” in this section.

MAIN OPERATION

Push the APPS button to display the menu

screen.

Touch the icon for the desired application. The

selected application will be launched.

The applications shown on the menu screen and

the display order can be customized. For addi-

tional information, refer to “App Garage Settings

screen” in this section.

Some applications can be set to launch automati-

cally upon vehicle ignition.

NISSANCONNECT

MOBILE APPS

4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

VEHICLE APPS

Vehicle Apps are unique applications developed

by NISSAN.

App Garage screen

Push the APPS button and touch the “App Ga-

rage” key.

Available settings

●“Vehicle Apps Manager”key (if so equipped)

Installs, uninstalls and updates Vehicle

Apps.

●“App Garage Settings” key

View Apps information, manage Apps, cus-

tomize shortcuts on the menu screen and

set notifications.

●Available application list

Displays the downloaded Vehicle Apps and

selected Mobile Apps (if so equipped).

When a listed application is selected, the

application will start.

5GD0012X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131

App Garage Settings screen

You can use various application settings.

1. Press the APPS button and touch the “App

Garage” key.

2. Touch the “App Garage Settings” key.

Menu Item Action

“All Apps” key Shows all applications. Select an application from the list to modify additional application-specific

settings.

“Running Apps” key Applications list Displays all running applications. To display application information or stop an application, select

the desired application from the list.

“Stop All” key Stops all running applications.

“Menu Icon Location Setting” key Applications list Shows or hides the application icon on the menu screen.

“Delete All” key Deletes all application icons on the menu screen.

“Auto Start Setting” key Enables this setting to automatically launch the application upon vehicle ignition.

“System Information” key Displays system information.

“Install Apps via USB” key Installs an application via USB from the NISSAN portal site.

“Automatic Connection” key (if so equipped) Sets the connecting interval. Vehicle Apps Manager (if so equipped) connects to the server at

regular intervals in order to obtain up-to-date information (such as checking for application

updates).

“Network Notification” key (if so equipped) If the “Network Notification” key is on, a pop-up message is displayed when a network connection

is established.

“Installation Notification” key (if so equipped) If the “Install Notification” key is on, a pop-up message is displayed when a new application is

installed.

“Factory Data Reset” key Discards the downloaded or stored application data.

4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

●If the Auto Start Setting is enabled, some

applications may be accessible to other driv-

ers of your vehicle.

●When the “Network Notification” key (if so

equipped) is turned off, some apps will be

started automatically and use network com-

munication. Communication fees will be

charged.

●Depending on the type of application, some

applications may not be displayed in the

“Running Apps” key field even if they are

running.

●The Auto Start function may not be available

for some applications. Vehicle Apps Manager (if so

equipped)

On this screen, you can update, uninstall and

install Vehicle Apps.

1. Press the APPS button and touch the “App

Garage” key.

2. Touch the “Vehicle Apps Manager” key.

Available setting items

●“All Apps” key

Displays all available Vehicle Apps. You can

select to display application information, up-

date, install and uninstall applications.

●“My Apps” key

Displays installed Vehicle Apps. You can

select to display application information, up-

date and uninstall applications.

●“New Releases” key

Displays newly released Vehicle Apps. You

can select to install applications.

NOTE:

●In order to display the application list screen

or the installation and update screens using

the Vehicle Apps Manager, connection via a

smartphone is required to establish commu-

nication.

●NissanConnect

Mobile Apps must be in-

stalled and running on a compatible smart-

phone in order to download updates or use

Vehicle Apps that require a network connec-

tion. For additional information, refer to “Get-

ting user ID and password” in this section.

5GD0004X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133

The major Apps available for use in

this system

The major Apps available for use in Nissan-

Connect

Mobile Apps are as follows.

The Apps are to be updated in the near future.

APPS Descriptions

Quick Guide You can see how to connect a Bluetooth® device, make a call and set the clock.

Driving Performance Vehicle performance such as Fuel Flow, Accel, etc., can be understood intuitively.

Maintenance Note You can check maintenance items inside the vehicle at your convenience.

Calendar*/** (if so equipped) Today’s schedule can be checked before you leave. Your schedule is linked to web-based services.

Email*/** (if so equipped) The email account you use can also be accessed through the vehicle system. You will be informed when a new email is received.

Compass (models with navigation system) In addition to the current traveling direction of the vehicle, the direction of the destination is also shown.

Accurate information cannot be provided if GPS position information cannot be obtained.

Clock Clock shows the current time in various kinds of skins.

Mobile Apps** (if so equipped) Many popular applications you usually use in your smartphone can also be used in your vehicle.

After registering a subscription in NissanConnect

Mobile Apps, you can use these applications by operating the in-vehicle display.

*: Requires an account to be set up.

**: Requires NissanConnect

Mobile Apps to be downloaded to your smartphone.

4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

●Use the information from the Driving

Performance strictly as a reference to

make your driving more comfortable.

The readings are not meant to prevent

accidents caused by reckless driving or

poor driving conditions (due to weather,

road conditions, etc.). Always obey all

traffic regulations and posted speed

limits.

●Operating the Driving Performance

while driving can lead to a crash result-

ing in serious injuries or death. Always

park the vehicle in a safe place before

operating the display screen.

●Look at the display screen only briefly

while driving. Keep your eyes on the

road. Inattentive driving may lead to a

crash resulting in serious injuries or

death.

For Canada

NOTE:

A PIN code can be used so that other

people cannot see your email and calendar

apps. When the engine is turned off and

then on again, the PIN code has to be input.

After the PIN code is input, regardless of

whether your smartphone is connected to

the vehicle or not, your email and calendar

apps will be viewable until the engine is

turned off. When the system is set to valet

parking, if the relevant account is erased,

your email and schedule will be erased

from the system.

INFO:

●NissanConnect

Mobile Apps must be in-

stalled and running on a compatible smart-

phone in order to download updates or use

Vehicle Apps that require a network connec-

tion. For additional information, refer to “Get-

ting user ID and password” in this section.

●When email service and calendar schedule

information are displayed in the in-vehicle

display, the system controls the display

based on the ID and password. Therefore,

users are required to manage an ID and

password.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135

Examples of how Vehicle Apps is used

Example 1: Driving Performance applica-

tion

This allows you to see the vehicle status and the

results of driving operation.

1. Push the APPS button and touch the “Driv-

ing Performance” key.

2. Touch the < or > key to change the layout of

the Driving Performance meter.

Touch the meter illustration on the Performance

Meter screen to select another meter to display.

NOTE:

Use the displayed information as a refer-

ence. It may differ from actual vehicle infor-

mation depending on the road surface con-

ditions or temperature. Also, it may differ

from what is displayed on the vehicle com-

bination meter.

●Lateral G (G force) and vertical G: Due

to the inclination of the road surface, G

may occur even when the vehicle stops.

This is not a malfunction.

●Fuel economy: This is a guideline for

the level of fuel economy driving.

Therefore, it may differ from the actual

fuel economy achieved. Example 2: email application (if so

equipped)

This allows you to access web-based email

through an in-vehicle interface. When you use

this application for the first time, you need to

create a new user.

To use the email application service, connect a

smartphone to the vehicle.

1. Push the APPS button and touch the “Email”

key.

2. Touch the “Create New User” key. The new

user input screen will be displayed.

5GD0020X 5GD0028X

4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Input your name and PIN code and select

the “Instant Access” key ON or OFF and

then touch the “Save” key.

INFO:

If the Instant Access mode is set to ON, it is not

necessary to enter a PIN code each time.

4. The stored user name is displayed in the list.

Touch the user name.

5. Input PIN code and touch the “OK” key. This

will display your mail box screen.

If an account is not yet set up, set up an account

(Google account, etc.) in the Manager Account

screen displayed.

INFO:

●On the receive message screen, touch the

sender name or address to display the

sender detail screen.

●System folders (Inbox, Draft, Send, etc.)

cannot be modified.

MOBILE APPS (if so equipped)

Mobile Apps are a limited selection of popular

smartphone-based Apps that have been custom-

ized for in-vehicle use. Mobile Apps can be ac-

cessed by connecting your compatible smart-

phone to the vehicle.

Using with iPhone®:

To use NissanConnect

Mobile Apps with your

iPhone®, the iPhone®, must be connected with

a USB cable. If an additional iPhone®, is con-

nected by wired connection while an iPod®, is

being used via a wired connection, the service

will not be available. To use the service, it is first

necessary to unplug the iPod® cable from the

USB port where the iPod®, is connected. For

additional information, refer to “USB/iPod® con-

nection port” in this section.

Using with an Android smartphone:

To use NissanConnect

Mobile Apps with your

Android smartphone, the device must be con-

nected via Bluetooth® and registered as a

hands-free device. For additional information, re-

fer to “Connecting Bluetooth® device” in this

section.

A compatible smartphone is required to

use Mobile Apps.

CAUTION

●To use Mobile Apps, the NissanCon-

nect

Mobile App must be installed

and running on the compatible smart-

phone. This app can be downloaded

from the iTunes App Store or Google

Play store.

●Mobile Apps also requires an active

subscription and valid NISSAN Owner

Portal account. Please see

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect (Eng-

lish), www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr

(French) or call the NissanConnect

support line at 1–877–664–2738.

●Communication fees may be charged

depending on the contents of the con-

tract between the user and the mobile

phone carrier.

●Before using this service, some applica-

tions may require individual subscrip-

tions (e.g., Facebook, etc.).

●For some applications, the system may

not support all of the functions of appli-

cations that are installed on your smart-

phone. Additionally, due to service pro-

vider policies, the contents of

application services may be changed or

terminated.

●If the smartphone is out of the range of

communication, some functions cannot

be used.

●Before exchanging ownership of the ve-

hicle, delete application data (email

data, etc.) stored in the in-vehicle

device.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137

Getting user ID and password

When you activate the NissanConnect

Mobile

Apps service for the first time, you should acquire

the user ID and password in advance. The acqui-

sition of a user ID and the setup of a password

which logs in to exclusive applications is re-

quired.

INFO:

●It is also possible to acquire an ID and a

password directly from a NISSAN portal

site.

●The vehicle information is required for enter-

ing the user information.

NOTE:

Other applications may not operate as a

result of installing NissanConnect

Mo-

bile Apps. (It is impossible to perform veri-

fication tests that combine the system with

all possible applications available for a

smartphone.)

For details of Mobile Apps, please refer to

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect (English),

www.Nissan.ca/NissanConnect/fr (French)

or call the NissanConnect

Support Line

at 1–877–664–2738.

Notes on linking smartphone app to

vehicle

NOTE:

●The configuration setting for each ap-

plication within the NissanConnect

Mobile Apps must be set to ON in order

for the application to be accessible

through the in-vehicle interface.

●Some applications may not run unless

they are installed on a smartphone.

●The set of applications shown on the

in-vehicle display is determined by the

user ID information registered in the

NissanConnect

Mobile Apps of the

connected smartphone.

●When using each application, it is as-

sumed that the user has already

agreed to the user policy of each appli-

cation in advance. Accuracy of informa-

tion that is obtained using an applica-

tion is not guaranteed.

●Even when Mobile Apps are updated,

regular Apps used in a smartphone

may not always be synchronized.

Using smartphone applications

1. Connect a smartphone to the vehicle.

2. Push the APPS button and touch the “App

Garage” key.

3. Touch an application to display information.

INFO:

●The screen shown on the display may not be

identical with the screen displayed on the

smartphone.

●Mobile Apps are not usable if a smartphone

is not connected to the vehicle.

Trademarks

“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that

an electronic accessory has been designed to

connect specifically to iPod® or iPhone®, re-

spectively, and has been certified by the devel-

oper to meet Apple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for the operation of this

device or its compliance with safety and regula-

tory standards. Please note that the use of this

accessory with iPod® or iPhone® may affect

wireless performance.

4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Apple, the Apple logo, iPhone®, iPod®, iPod

classic®, iPod nano®, and iPod touch® are

trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.

and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of

Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple

Inc.

App Store

Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks of

Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-

tries. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.

Google Play™

Google Play is a trademark of Google Inc.

Google

Calendar™ calendaring application is a trade-

mark of Google Inc.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

SYSTEM

Initialization

The Voice Recognition system will activate a few

seconds after the ignition switch is turned on.

Once activation is complete, you can start using

the system by pushing the switch on the

steering wheel and speaking voice commands. If

the switch on the steering wheel is pushed

before the activation completes, the display will

show a message to wait until the system is ready.

BEFORE STARTING

To get the best recognition performance from the

Voice Recognition system, observe the following

items.

●The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to eliminate

surrounding noises (traffic noise and vibra-

tion sounds, etc.) which may prevent the

system from correctly recognizing the voice

commands.

●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a

command.

●Speak in a natural conversational voice with-

out pausing between words.

GIVING VOICE COMMANDS

1. Push the switch located on the steer-

ing wheel.

2. A list of commands appear on the screen,

and the system provides a voice menu

prompt.

When this screen is displayed, almost all of

the commands can be recognized. Available

commands for each category can be shown

on the right side of the screen. Highlight a

category listed on the left side of the screen

with the multi-function controller to find your

preferred command.

5GE0002X

VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139

Selecting a category by touching the screen or

pressing the ENTER button will execute the com-

mand. After executing the category command,

only the commands related to the selected cat-

egory can be recognized.

3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the

screen changes from to ,

speak a command. You can also select a

command by directly touching the screen.

The Voice Recognition system will pause opera-

tion when the multi-function controller is moved.

To resume operation, push the switch on

the steering wheel.

4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts

and speak after the tone sounds until the

preferred operation is completed.

To cancel the voice command, push and hold

the switch.

You can interrupt the voice prompt at any time by

pushing the switch.

Operating tips

●Speak a command after the tone.

●If the command is not accepted, the system

announces, “Please say again”. Repeat the

command in a clear voice.

●Push the switch on the steering-

wheel once to return to the previous screen.

●Voice commands spoken from the passen-

ger seat cannot be recognized.

●When the switch on the steering

wheel is pushed while the air conditioner is

set to the Auto mode, the system controls

the air conditioner fan speed in order to

improve Voice Recognition performance.

When the fan speed is set higher than the

4th speed position, the fan speed is de-

creased to 4th speed. When the air condi-

tioner is set to the manual mode, the fan

speed does not change. The accuracy of

Voice Recognition may be affected depend-

ing on the fan speed and the air direction.

●To skip the voice guidance function and give

the command immediately, push the

switch on the steering wheel to interrupt the

system. Remember to speak after the tone.

●To cancel the command, push and hold

the switch or the switch on the

steering-wheel.

●To adjust the volume of the system feedback,

push the volume switch on the steering

wheel or use the audio system

VOL/ON•OFF button while the system is

making the announcement.

Voice prompt interrupt

Push the switch on the steering-wheel to

stop the voice prompt and give the command at

once. Remember to wait for the tone before

speaking.

How to see the voice command

screen

1. Push the switch to display the first

screen of the voice command list.

2. Speak a command or select an item from the

voice command list. The second screen is

displayed.

3. Speak a command. The list screen is dis-

played.

4. Speak the preferred number from the list to

perform operation.

The voice commands can be spoken one at a

time following prompts step by step or the com-

mand can be spoken successively in one step.

4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

䊊

1Shows available command list. It is also

available to select a command from this list

by touching or using the multi-function con-

troller.

䊊

2Shows available command list. Displayed

commands are only available to execute

through Voice Recognition. You can say

commands from the left screen and the right

screen continuously.

䊊

3Previously selected command.

䊊

4Command list

You can say a command from the list, touch

the screen directly or select, using the steer-

ing switch or the multi-function controller.

You can say a preferred word for the < >

enclosed part of the command.

䊊

5“Previous”/ “Next” key

Say as a command or touch to go to the

previous/next screen. It cannot be selected

using the steering switch or multi-function

controller.

䊊

6Command numbers

Speak 1 to 6 numbers to select. Also, you can

touch the screen directly, using the steering

switch or the multi-function controller.

How to speak numbers

Voice Recognition requires the user speak num-

bers in a certain way when giving voice com-

mands.

General rule

Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used. (For

example, if speaking 500, “five zero zero” can be

used, but “five hundred” cannot.)

First screen

5GD0015X

Second screen

5GD0016X

List screen

5GE0015X

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-141

Examples

1–800–662–6200

“One eight zero zero six six two six two zero zero”

For the best recognition, speak “zero” for the

number “0” and “oh” for the letter “o”.

Voice command examples

As examples, some additional basic operations

that can be performed by voice commands are

described here.

Example 1– Placing a call from handsfree

phonebook:

1. Push the switch located on the steer-

ing wheel.

2. Wait for the indicator to change to

and speak “ Phone”.

You can also speak “Phone” and then “Call

<Name> successively.

3. Speak “Call <Name>”.

When options (Home, Work, etc.) are registered

to a name in the contact list of a cellular phone,

the option can be commanded directly.

Example, “Call Steve Brown Work” or “Call Steve

Brown Other”

4. The system prompts you to speak or select

an item number from the displayed list. To

select a displayed matching item, speak a

number from between 1 and 6.

If the selected number has more than one phone

number registered to it, the phone number list is

displayed.

Example 2– Playing radio:

1. Push the switch located on the steer-

ing wheel.

2. Wait for the indicator to change to

and speak “Audio”.

3. Speak “Play FM” to turn on the FM radio.

Command list

To use the Voice Recognition function, you can

speak commands in the order of 1st command,

2nd command and 3rd command. You can also

operate the system with directly speaking the

2nd or 3rd command.

Variable numbers or words such as names can

be applied in < > when speaking a command.

For additional information, refer to the separate

Navigation System Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped) for the navigation command.

5GE0021X

4-142 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

General command

Command Action

Show More Commands Displays other commands of the same category.

Go Back Corrects the last recognition result to return to the previous screen.

Exit Cancels Voice Recognition.

Next Skips to the next page.

Previous Skips to the previous page.

General phone command

The following commands can be used during the Voice Recognition session.

Command Action

Dial The system makes a call to a spoken phone number.

Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-143

Phone command

1st command 2nd command 3rd command 4th command Action

Phone Call <Name> < 1–6 > Makes a call to a contact that is stored on the cellular phone. Select from the list of displayed

contacts on the right side screen.

Dial <#> Dial Makes a call to a spoken phone number.

Change Number Changes the number to call.

Recent Calls < 1–6 > Makes a call to the recent incoming, outgoing, or missed call number.

Read Text < 1–6 > Play Listens to recent text message received.

Reply Replies to received message.

Call Calls the sender of the message.

Send Text < phonebook name> Selects a text message from the list and sends it to a contact name. You can select type from

<Work>, <Mobile>, <Home>, or <Other>.

< phonebook name>< type>

Phonebook < phonebook name> Makes a call to a contact that is stored on the cellular phone. You can select type from “Work”,

“Mobile”, “Home”, or “Other”. Select “Reply” to reply to a message. Select “Call” to call the

sender.

< phonebook name>< type>

Favorites < favorite name >

< 1–6 > Accesses frequently called contacts by storing them in the favorites list.

< favorite name >

< Type>

Redial Makes a call to the last outgoing phone number.

International

Call < phone number > Makes an international call by allowing more than 11 digits to be spoken. You may need to in-

clude the international call prefixes and country codes.

Add Phone Use this command to connect a compatible Bluetooth ® device to the system. Follow the on-

screen instructions to complete the pairing process from your handset.

Call < Name >

Work < 1–6 > To call someone’s work place, say the person’s name stored in the phonebook on your cellular

phone between “Call” and “Work”.

Call < Name >

Cellular < 1–6 > To call someone’s cellular phone, say the person’s name stored in the phonebook on your cellu-

lar phone between “Call” and “Mobile”.

Call < Name >

Home < 1–6 > To call someone’s home, say the person’s name stored in the phonebook on your cellular phone

between “Call” and “Home”.

Call < Name >

Other < 1–6 > To call someone at a place categorized as “Other”, say the person’s name stored in the phone-

book on your cellular phone between “Call” and “Other”.

4-144 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

The system can read out SMS text messages in voice.

However, it cannot always read the text correctly.

Audio command

1st command 2nd command 3rd command Action

Audio FM <87.7–107.9> Switches to the FM band, selecting the station of the preferred frequency.

SXM <Channel#> Switches to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio band, selecting the preferred channel.

USB Play Album <album name> Turns on the USB mode, selecting the album.

iPod Play Album <album name> Turns on the iPod® mode, selecting the album.

AM <530–1710> Switches to the AM band, selecting the preferred station.

FM <87.7–107.9> HD <#> Switches to the FM HD band, selecting the preferred station.

DISC Track <#> Turns on the CD, selecting the track number.

USB Play Song < Name> Switches to the USB, selecting the track. You can speak the commands

successively.

Play < Source Name> Plays the spoken audio source.

USB All Artists Displays the USB all artists list.

USB All Albums Displays the USB all albums list.

USB All Folders Displays the USB all folders list.

iPod All Artists Displays the iPod® all artists list.

iPod All Albums Displays the iPod® all albums list.

iPod All Songs Displays the iPod® all songs list.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-145

Notes on operating audio by Voice Recog-

nition

●An audio device connected via Blutooth ®

cannot be operated with the Voice Recogni-

tion system. Source change is only available

for Bluetooth®streaming audio.

●Song title and Artist name information will be

overwritten when another iPod®/iPhone®

is connected after song titles and artists

names in the previously connected

iPod®/iPhone® have been installed.

●If two USB devices are connected at the

same time, voice operation will only be avail-

able for use with one registered and se-

lected device. When selecting “YES” in the

pop-up screen that displays after a new

USB audio device is connected, the USB

audio device is registered in the Voice Rec-

ognition system and is selected automati-

cally. One iPod® and one USB device can

be registered in the system. If a USB audio

device is newly registered, old data is over-

written. It may take a few moments to regis-

ter an audio device. If you want to enable

voice operation for music stored on a previ-

ously registered audio device, select the de-

vice you want to use in advance. For addi-

tional information, refer to the ⬙Voice

Recognition settings⬙in this section.

Even when a device has been previously

registered, simply connecting the device will

not result in it being selected automatically.

●The Voice Recognition system may not

function when the song information is too

long (artist names, album titles, song

titles, and playlists, etc.)

●The SXM function will not operate without

a subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Ra-

dio.

4-146 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Information command

1st command 2nd command Action

Information Voice Menu Connects to the Nissan Connect

Mobile Apps Services Response Specialists. For

additional information, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual for details.

Fuel Prices Displays the fuel prices.

Weather Forecast Displays the weather forecast.

Current Weather Displays the nearby weather (current weather).

Sports Scores Displays the sports scores.

Traffic Information* Turns the traffic information system on or off.

Route Information* Displays the route information.

*: Models with navigation system only.

NOTE:

The Fuel Prices, Weather Forecast, Current Weather, Sports Scores and Traffic Information will not operate without a subscription to

SiriusXM Radio

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-147

VOICE RECOGNITION SETTINGS

Voice recognition functions can be set.

1. Press the SETTING button.

2. Touch the “Voice Recognition” key.

3. Touch the item you want to set.

Available settings

●“Minimize Voice Feedback” key:

Set the Minimize Voice Feedback function “ON”

key (short feedback).

●“Audio Device Setting” key

Select an audio device to be operated via voice

recognition system from the list of devices regis-

tered to the in-vehicle audio system. The device

with an indicator light illuminated can be oper-

ated with voice recognition system.

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

For assistance or inquiries about NissanCon-

nect

, or to order updated map data for the

navigation system (where fitted), it is recom-

mended that you contact a NISSAN dealer.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

4-148 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SYSTEM UNIT

Display screen

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The screen is too dark. The cabin temperature is too low. Wait until the cabin temperature becomes moderate.

Screen brightness is set to the maximum darkness. Adjust the brightness setting of the screen. For additional

information, refer to “Screen settings” in this section.

The screen is too bright. Screen brightness is set to the maximum brightness. Adjust the brightness setting of the screen. For additional

information, refer to “Screen settings” in this section.

A small black spot or a small bright spot appears on the

screen. This is a phenomenon typical to display screens. This is not a malfunction.

A dot or stripe pattern appears on the screen. Electromagnetic waves that are generated from neon

billboards, high voltage electric power cables, ham radios

or other radio devices equipped on other vehicles may ad-

versely affect this screen.

This is not a malfunction.

Image lag appears on the screen. This is a phenomenon typical to display screens. This is not a malfunction.

Image motion displayed on the screen is slow. The cabin temperature is below 32°F (0°C). Wait until the in-cabin temperature rises to above 32°F

(0°C).

When looking at the screen from an angle, the screen

lightens or darkens. This is a phenomenon typical to display screens. Adjust the brightness setting of the screen. For additional

information, refer to “Screen settings” in this section.

The screen turns blue or an error message is displayed on

the display. The SD card is not inserted into the slot correctly. If the SD card containing map data is accidentally removed,

after re-inserting the SD card containing map data into the

slot, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and then

back in the ON position again.

A system malfunction has occurred. It is recommended that you contact a NISSAN dealer for

inspection.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-149

AUDIO SYSTEM

HD Radio Technology

Sound:

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Delay in digital audio on HD Radio broadcasts. The radio acquires an analog station first and blends to a

digital signal. This is not a malfunction.

Audio skip, stutter or echo. The radio station has not properly aligned the digital and

analog audio. Verify correct operation on another station. Report any sta-

tion with poor performance.

Volume changing up/down. The radio station has not properly aligned digital and ana-

log audio level. Verify correct operation on another station and check

www.hdradio.com for stations in the area. Report any sta-

tion with poor performance.

Sound fading in and out. The transition between analog and digital is taking place

(blending). Verify transition performance on several stations in the

area. Report any station with poor performance.

Excessive blending (Transition between analog and digital). The receiver is located near the edge of the digital cover-

age area. Refer to www.hdradio.com to verify stations in your cover-

age area.

Digital audio not better than analog audio. Audio processing on the digital audio at a station can po-

tentially decrease the digital audio sound quality. Verify correct operation on another station. Report any sta-

tion with poor performance.

Functional:

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Keep losing my local stations. The digital coverage is slightly less than the analog signal

coverage. Verify correct operation on another station. This is ex-

pected behavior.

Shadowing (urban/terrain) can cause reduced digital

coverage. Verify correct operation on another station.

Some data fields are blank. Text information is sent at the broadcaster’s discretion. Verify correct operation on another station. Report any sta-

tion issues.

Text information is truncated / appears to be more

available. The display is limited to a fixed number of characters and

more data is being sent than can be shown. This is intended behavior.

AM reception changes at night. AM stations are required by the government (FCC) to lower

their power at night. This is not a malfunction.

4-150 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Compact Disc (CD) player

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Music cannot be played back. The disc is inserted upside down. Insert a CD with the label side facing up.

Moisture has accumulated inside the unit. Wait until the moisture evaporates (approximately 1 hour).

The cabin temperature is too high. Wait until the cabin temperature becomes moderate.

The disc is scratched or dirty. Wipe off any dirt from the disc.

Scratched discs cannot be recovered. Replace the disc.

Depending on the condition in which they are stored, discs may

become unreadable due to deterioration (for example, keeping

the discs in the passenger compartment, etc.).

Replace the disc with a deterioration-free disc. Do not use a de-

teriorated disc. The label surface of a disc may crack or chip, and

the layer of the label surface may eventually peel off.

Compressed audio files cannot be played back. If both music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files

(MP3 data, etc.) are mixed on one disc, the compressed audio

files cannot be played back.

Prepare a disc that contains compressed audio files only.

The files are not named using characters that are compliant with

the specifications. Use the character codes and the number of characters that are

compliant with the specifications for the folder names and file

names. In addition, always use “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”

file extensions.

It takes a long time before the music starts

playing. The disc contains a large amount of data. Some time may be required to check the files. It is recommended

that unnecessary folders or any files other than compressed au-

dio files should not be recorded on a disc.

The sound quality is poor. The disc is dirty. Wipe off any dirt from the disc.

No sounds are played although the CD play time

is displayed. The system is playing the first track of a mix mode disc. (Mix

mode is a format in which data except music is recorded on the

first track and music data is recorded on one other than the first

track in a session.)

Play music data in other tracks.

Music cuts off or skips. The combination of writing software and hardware might not

match; or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc.

might not match the specifications.

Create a disc using different writing speed settings, etc.

The system skips the selected track and moves

to the next track. A non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”,

“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”. Prepare MP3/WMA files.

Some of the file cannot be played due to copyright protection. Prepare playable files.

The tracks do not play back in the desired order. The folder locations on the disc are changed by the writing soft-

ware while the files are written on the disc. Check the settings of the writing software and create a new disc.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-151

iPod® player

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not recognize an iPod®. The connector cable is not correctly connected or the

iPod® does not correctly operate.

Connect the connector cable again. If the system does not

recognize the iPod® after performing the procedure above,

reset the iPod®.

The iPod® that is connected is not compatible with the

system.

Check the iPod® model and firmware versions available for

the system.

The USB extension cable is not correctly connected. Do not use a USB extension cable.

The cable is rapidly connected to or disconnected from the

USB connector.

Slowly connect or disconnect the USB cable.

An iPod® cannot be operated. The iPod® is connected to the in-vehicle audio system

while headsets, etc. are connected to the iPod®.

Remove all equipment from the iPod® after disconnecting

the iPod® from the system, and then connect it to the sys-

tem again.

The iPod® is not operating normally. Disconnect and re-connect the iPod® to the in-vehicle

audio system.

The system plays back an album/track that includes par-

ticular album art.

Disconnect the iPod® from the in-vehicle audio system

and then reset the iPod®. Disable the album art and then

re-connect the iPod® to the system.

An iPod® does not respond. There are too many tracks in a category. Decrease the number of tracks in a category (less than

3,000 tracks).

The shuffle function is turned on. Turn off the shuffle function if many tracks are stored on

the iPod.

Music cannot be played back. The connector is not connected to the iPod®. Firmly connect the connector until it clicks.

Music stops playing. The sound cuts off due to vibration resulting from the

iPod® being in an unstable location.

Place the iPod® in a stable location where it does not roll

over.

The sound is distorted. The EQ (equalizer) function of the iPod® is turned on. Turn off the EQ (equalizer) function.

The iPod® battery requires more time than usual to

charge.

Charging the iPod® battery may take longer while the

iPod® is playing.

If the iPod® requires charging, it is recommended to stop

playback.

4-152 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

An iPod® cannot be charged while connected to the

system.

The cable connected to the iPod® may be deteriorated

(cable disconnection, etc.).

Check the cable.

The connected iPod® cannot be operated with the in-

vehicle system.

— The operation of an iPod® must be performed using the

in-vehicle audio system after the iPod® is connected to

the system.

The sound skips. Surrounding circumstances (noise, etc.) may cause the

audio to skip.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

The USB extension cable is not correctly connected. Do not use a USB extension cable.

USB memory

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not recognize a USB device. A USB extension cable is used. Do not use a USB extension cable.

A USB hub is used. Do not use a USB hub.

Connection or disconnection operation of the USB device

was too abrupt.

Connect or disconnect the USB device slowly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-153

Bluetooth® streaming audio

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

Registration cannot be performed. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible with the

in-vehicle audio system. Check the owner’s manual for the Bluetooth® audio device.

The PIN code is incorrect. Check the PIN code for the Bluetooth® audio device that is

to be registered.

Check that the PIN code for the Bluetooth® audio device is

consistent with that for the in-vehicle audio system.

Another Bluetooth® device is used in the vehicle. Turn off the other Bluetooth® device and wait until registra-

tion is completed.

Music cannot be played. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible with the

in-vehicle audio system. Check the owner’s manual for the Bluetooth® audio device.

The system is not in the Bluetooth® audio mode. Press the “AUDIO” button to select the Bluetooth® audio

mode.

The Bluetooth® adapter is turned off. Turn on the Bluetooth® adapter when it is used for a

Bluetooth® audio device.

Music stops playing. The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible with the

in-vehicle audio system. Visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ to search for a recom-

mended Bluetooth® audio device.

A cellular phone is connected. This is not a malfunction.

The sound may cut off when a Bluetooth® audio device is

operated. Press the “AUDIO” button to select the Bluetooth® audio

mode, and then operate the device on the vehicle’s display

screen.

Audio operation cannot be performed. A Bluetooth® audio device that does not support audio

operations is in use. This is not a malfunction.

Refer to the owner’s manual for the Bluetooth® audio

device.

An error occurs when connecting to a Bluetooth® audio

profile. Turn the power source of the Bluetooth® audio player off

and on, and then resume connection with the system.

4-154 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

A cellular phone cannot be registered. The cellular phone is not compatible with the in-vehicle

hands-free phone system. Use a cellular phone compatible with the system. It is rec-

ommended that you visit the website www.nissanusa.com/

bluetooth/ for model compatibility.

Registration of the cellular phone has been performed

incorrectly. Check the registration procedure, and then register the cel-

lular phone again.

A cellular phone cannot be connected or becomes discon-

nected after registration is complete. The Bluetooth® setting of the in-vehicle hands-free phone

system is turned off. Turn on the Bluetooth® setting of the system.

The Bluetooth® setting of the cellular phone is turned off. Turn on the Bluetooth® setting of the cellular phone.

The remaining battery level of the cellular phone is low. Charge the battery of the cellular phone.

The wireless Bluetooth® connection may be disrupted de-

pending on the location of the cellular phone. Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by

metal or far away from the in-vehicle hands-free phone

system. Do not place the cellular phone close to the seats

or your body.

Registration of the cellular phone is not complete. Perform registration of the cellular phone.

A call to a particular number fails. If the system tries to make a call several times to the same

phone number (for example: the party does not respond to

the call, the party is out of the network service area, or the

call is abandoned before the party responds), the system

may reject a request to make a call to the phone number.

Turn the cellular phone off and then on again to reset the

connection.

The system does not recognize the connection of a cellular

phone and cannot receive or make a call. The cellular phone is not compatible with the in-vehicle

hands-free phone system. Use a cellular phone compatible with the system. It is rec-

ommended that you visit the website www.nissanusa.com/

bluetooth/ for model compatibility.

The cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then register the cel-

lular phone again.

The phone operation is limited by the functions (such as

dial lock, etc.) of the registered cellular phone. Remove any settings that are limiting use of the cellular

phone, and then perform registration again.

Registered voice tag is cut short. Speaking of the voice tag did not fit within the 5 second

recording period after the beep. Speak the voice tag within 5 seconds after the beep.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-155

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The other party cannot hear your voice. The other party can

hear your voice, but it cracks or cuts out. The cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then register the cel-

lular phone again.

The fan speed of the air conditioner is too fast. Decrease the fan speed of the air conditioner.

The ambient noise level is excessive. (For example: heavy

rain, construction sites, inside a tunnel, oncoming vehicles,

etc.)

Close the windows to shut out ambient noise.

The noise generated by driving the vehicle is too loud. Reduce the vehicle speed, and then speak a command.

The incoming or outgoing voice level is too loud. Adjust the incoming or outgoing voice level properly.

The voice is cut out or noise is heard during a call. The wireless Bluetooth® connection may be disrupted de-

pending on the location of the cellular phone. Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by

metal or far away from the in-vehicle hands-free phone

system. Do not place a cellular phone close to the seats or

your body.

When a cellular phone is operated to make a call, the

hands-free function is no longer available. Some models of a cellular phone do not switch to the

hands-free mode when they are operated to make a call. This is not a malfunction. Make a call again using the hands-

free function.

The other party’s voice cannot be heard. There is no

ringtone. The volume level is set to the minimum. Adjust the volume level.

A cellular phone is not connected. Check the registration procedure, and then register the cel-

lular phone again.

Each volume level (ringtone, incoming voice or outgoing

voice) is different. Each volume level is not adjusted properly. Adjust each volume level properly.

The antenna display is different between the vehicle screen

and the screen on a cellular phone. Making or receiving a

call is unavailable even though the antenna display indi-

cates that it is possible to do so.

The antenna display varies depending on the model of cel-

lular phone. This does not indicate a malfunction. The antenna display

and remaining battery level shown on the navigation screen

may be different from those shown on the cellular phone

screen. Use them as a reference.

A voice cannot be heard clearly when using a cellular

phone behind tall buildings. Some structures such as tall buildings, etc. may cause ir-

regular reflection of radio waves or completely shut out ra-

dio waves that are used for cellular phones.

This is not a malfunction.

Noise is heard when using a cellular phone under/near ar-

eas of elevated railroads, high voltage electric power

cables, traffic signals, or neon billboards, etc.

Electromagnetic waves that are generated from radio de-

vices may adversely affect the cellular phone. This is not a malfunction.

Noise is heard in the sound from the audio system while

using a cellular phone. Radio waves that are generated from a cellular phone may

adversely affect the sound from the audio system. This is not a malfunction.

4-156 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The sound skips. The cellular phone may have turned on the wireless LAN

(Wi-Fi). Turn off the wireless LAN (Wi-Fi).

Phonebook cannot be downloaded. An error occurred during the phone pairing process. Re-register the Bluetooth® pairing information after deleting

the pairing information from both the cellular phone and the

vehicle system.

VOICE RECOGNITION

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The system does not operate or fails to interpret the com-

mand correctly. The interior of the vehicle is too noisy. Close the windows or make sure that the other occupants

are quiet.

The fan speed of the air conditioner is too fast. Decrease the fan speed of the air conditioner.

The noise generated by driving the vehicle is too loud. Reduce the vehicle speed, and then speak the command.

The voice command is spoken in a low voice. Speak the command in a louder voice.

The command is spoken too fast. Speak the command after confirming the following: voice

guidance is announced, a tone sounds, and an icon on the

screen changes from white to orange.

The command is spoken too slowly. Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.

The system prompts to repeat a command. Pronunciation is unclear. Speak clearly.

The command is spoken too late after the tone. Speak the command within 5 seconds after confirming the

following: a voice guidance is announced, a tone sounds,

and an icon on the screen changes from white to orange.

An improper command is spoken. Speak the command or a number that is displayed in white

on the screen.

Speak a command that is shown in the command list.

The system does not correctly recognize a number spoken. Many numbers are spoken at once. Place a pause between the appropriate digits for correct

recognition by the system. When speaking a telephone

number, place a pause between area codes and dial codes,

etc.

Voice Recognition does not operate, and a tone sounds

twice after pushing the switch. The switch is pushed before the system is ready to

accept voice commands.

After turning on NissanConnect

, wait for the Voice Rec-

ognition system to be ready before giving voice commands.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-157

Symptom Possible cause Possible solution

The USB memory device cannot operate with Voice

Recognition. Depending on the device, an iPhone® or iPod® may be

recognized as a USB memory device. This is not a malfunction.

More than one audio device is connected to the USB port. Only one audio device can be operated with the Voice Rec-

ognition system even when multiple numbers of devices are

connected. Select an audio source to operate with the

Voice Recognition system.

The USB/iPod® operation screen is grayed out. The audio device is not connected. Connect an audio device to the system.

An audio source to be operated with the Voice Recognition

system has not been selected. Select an audio source to be operated with the Voice Rec-

ognition system.

An error message is displayed when trying to select a track

and operate the USB/iPod®. The track information is being processed for registration by

the system. Song information will be loaded into the system when a new

audio device is registered for the first time or when the song

information in the pre-registered device has been changed.

Wait for the loading to complete (this may take from a few

minutes up to an hour).

The number of songs stored on the connected audio de-

vice exceeds its capacity. Decrease the number of songs stored on the audio device.

No song is stored on the audio device. Store songs on the connected audio device. Storing songs

with information such as artist name, album name, song

name, and playlist, etc. will make Voice Recognition song

search available.

The Navigation item is not displayed in the voice operation

menu screen. Voice Recognition command preparation for the navigation

system is not completed immediately after the system is

started.

Display any screen other than the Voice Recognition screen,

and then push the switch.

The system does not correctly recognize a Point of Interest

(POI) name spoken. There are some rare cases where a POI is unavailable by

Voice Recognition but the location can be found on the

map.

This is not a malfunction. Consider using an alternative

search method, like street address.

Partial or alias name is spoken. For best results, speak the full name.

Some POI category names can only be searched when

nearby. This is not a malfunction.

4-158 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NissanConnect

uses an operating system like

those found on many computers, tablets and cell

phones. Like these devices, processing speed

may vary, and system response delays or resets

may occur intermittently. This does not indicate a

malfunction, and further information on system

operation can be found below.

System Start-Up

Due to the large number of features and capabili-

ties that the NissanConnect

needs to load on

start-up, it may take up to a minute for all func-

tions (such as Apps) to be available. The system

will display “Now Loading All Apps...” during this

time.

System Response Delay

NissanConnect

uses an operating system like

those found on many computers, tablets and cell

phones. Like these devices, sometimes pro-

grams do not respond immediately and this may

temporarily delay system use.

In most situations, simply waiting a few moments

longer should be sufficient for the pending opera-

tions to complete.

If the system temporarily does not respond to

commands, the system can be easily reset. Sim-

ply push down the VOL/ON-OFF knob for at

least 5 seconds. The system will turn off and

restart.

After restart, all functions should be available.

If a navigation route was set, the route should

resume automatically.

System Reset

As noted above, intermittent system resets may

occur during normal operation. You may also

wish to reset the system if you find that a particu-

lar feature is not loading or responding. Often, a

quick system reset will resolve any issue you may

be experiencing. After restart, all functions will be

available as described above.

System Updates

Like many digital devices, the NissanConnect

is designed to allow for software updates as

enhancements are developed and additional fea-

tures added. If you have questions about system

performance, it is recommended that you contact

a NISSAN dealer to ensure that your vehicle has

had the latest available software installed.

Operating Tips

NissanConnect

provides several methods of

operation to suit your preferences. The following

are suggested operating tips.

●Operating the multi-function controller

steering wheel controls, or other controls

too quickly can cause a lag between the

control and the display. Operate the controls

carefully and allow the system to respond to

your request.

●NISSAN recommends using Voice Recog-

nition whenever possible to select options

while driving. Some touch screen function-

ality is intentionally unavailable during driv-

ing. Please view the available voice com-

mands by pushing the (TALK) switch

and then selecting a category on the display.

●When looking for a street address or Points

of Interest (POI), remember that you can use

Connected Search and Assisted Search

features within NissanConnect

Services

to expand your search methods and results.

The Voice Recognition system recognizes a

defined set of commands. These commands

can be viewed in the display by pushing

the (TALK) switch and then selecting

a category from the displayed list. The com-

mands can also be found in the Voice Rec-

ognition section under command list. For

additional information, refer to “Command

list” in this section.

ADDITIONAL SYSTEM INFORMATION

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-159

●In some situations, the system may not be

able to recognize your command even if you

say the exact command. This can be due to

noise conditions or an accent.

●In some unique cases, the system may ex-

pect a word to be spoken as it is spelled as

opposed to the way it is normally pro-

nounced.

ADDITIONAL HELP

For additional technical information, it is recom-

mended that you contact us online at OWNERS.

www.nissanusa.com or call us at

1–855–426–6628.

4-160 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-161

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving................5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2

Three-way catalyst..............................5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........5-3

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ....................................5-6

Avoiding collision and rollover. . ..................5-7

Off-road recovery...............................5-7

Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-7

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-8

Driving safety precautions .......................5-8

Push-Button Ignition Switch .......................5-10

Operating range...............................5-11

Push-button ignition switch positions . . . .........5-12

Emergency engine shut off .....................5-12

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge.......5-13

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.............5-13

Before starting the engine .........................5-14

Starting the engine ...............................5-14

Remote start (if so equipped) ...................5-15

Driving the vehicle ................................5-15

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ........5-15

Parking brake ....................................5-19

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .........5-20

BSW system operation ........................5-22

How to enable/disable the BSW system .........5-23

BSW system limitations ........................5-23

BSW driving situations.........................5-24

System temporarily unavailable..................5-28

System maintenance...........................5-28

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) .....5-30

RCTA system operation ........................5-31

How to enable/disable the RCTA system .........5-32

RCTA system limitations........................5-33

System temporarily unavailable..................5-36

System maintenance...........................5-37

Cruise control (if so equipped) . . ...................5-38

Precautions on cruise control ...................5-38

Cruise control operations.......................5-39

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped)......5-40

ICC system operation ..........................5-41

The ICC switch ...............................5-43

ICC system limitations .........................5-48

System temporarily unavailable..................5-51

System maintenance...........................5-53

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) (if so equipped) . .5-54

FEB system operation..........................5-55

Turning the FEB system on/off . . ................5-57

FEB system limitations .........................5-57

System temporarily unavailable..................5-58

System malfunction ............................5-59

System maintenance...........................5-59

Break-in schedule ................................5-60

Fuel efficient driving tips...........................5-61

Increasing fuel economy...........................5-62

Intelligent 4WD (if so equipped)....................5-62

4x4–i system operation ........................5-62

Parking/parking on hills............................5-66

Power steering . . .................................5-67

Brake system ....................................5-67

Brake precautions .............................5-67

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-68

Brake assist ..................................5-69

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............5-69

Rise-up and build-up ..........................5-71

Brake force distribution ........................5-71

Hill Descent Control System (if so equipped) ........5-72

Hill start assist system ............................5-73

Rear sonar system (RSS) (if so equipped) ...........5-73

Cold weather driving..............................5-74

Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-74

Antifreeze.....................................5-74

Battery .......................................5-74

Draining of coolant water .......................5-74

Tire equipment . . ..............................5-75

Special winter equipment.......................5-75

Driving on snow or ice .........................5-75

Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-75

WARNING

●Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assistance

of others alone in your vehicle. Pets

should also not be left alone. They

could accidentally injure themselves or

others through inadvertent operation of

the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,

temperatures in a closed vehicle could

quickly become high enough to cause

severe or possibly fatal injuries to

people or animals.

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-

ous. It can cause unconsciousness or

death.

●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all win-

dows fully open, and have the vehicle

inspected immediately.

●Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

●Do not park the vehicle with the engine

running for any extended length of time.

●Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise exhaust

gases could be drawn into the passen-

ger compartment. If you must drive with

one of these open, follow these

precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

●If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer through

the seal on the liftgate or the body,

follow the manufacturer’s recommen-

dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-

try into the vehicle.

●The exhaust system and body should be

inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system, un-

derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission control

device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust

gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at

high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, animals

or flammable materials away from the

exhaust system components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING

AND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

CAUTION

●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to

help reduce exhaust pollutants.

●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-

ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-

able loss of performance or other un-

usual operating conditions are

detected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel

level. Running out of fuel could cause

the engine to misfire, damaging the

three-way catalyst.

●Do not race the engine while warming it

up.

●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start

the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and in-

flated to the inflation pressure recommended by

the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has

tires of a different size than the size indicated on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,

you should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when

the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you

should stop and check all four tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the

vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s

responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if under-inflation has not reached the level to

trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the

system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-

function indicator is combined with the low tire

pressure telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-

mately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-

function exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS

malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-

ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Additional information:

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with the

TPMS, the TPMS does not monitor the tire

pressure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving 5-3

●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle

is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h).

Also, this system may not detect a sudden

drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire

while driving).

●The low tire pressure warning light does not

automatically turn off when the tire pressure

is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the

recommended pressure, the vehicle must be

driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to

activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire

pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure

gauge to check the tire pressure.

●The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears in the vehicle information display

when the low tire pressure warning light is

illuminated and low tire pressure is detected.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

turns off when the low tire pressure warning

light turns off.

●The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears each time the ignition switch is

placed in the on position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

●The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS

malfunction.

●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on

the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation

and the outside temperature. Do not reduce

the tire pressure after driving because the

tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside

temperature can lower the temperature of

the air inside the tire which can cause a

lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-

nate. If the warning light illuminates, check

the tire pressure for all four tires.

●The Tire and Loading Information label (also

referred to as the vehicle placard or tire

inflation pressure label) is located in the

driver’s door opening.

●You can also check the pressure of all tires

(except the spare tire) on the vehicle infor-

mation display screen. The order of the tire

pressure figures displayed on the screen

corresponds with the actual order of the tire

position.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire pres-

sure warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light off. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible. (For additional information,

refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section for changing a flat

tire.)

5-4 Starting and driving

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CAUTION

●The TPMS may not function properly

when the wheels are equipped with tire

chains or the wheels are buried in snow.

●

Do not place metalized film or any metal

parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This

may cause poor reception of the signals

from the tire pressure sensors, and the

TPMS will not function properly.

Some devices and transmitters may temporarily

interfere with the operation of the TPMS and

cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-

minate.

Some examples are:

– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio

frequencies are near the vehicle.

– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is

being used in or near the vehicle.

– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a

DC/AC converter is being used in or near the

vehicle.

Low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in

the following cases.

●If the vehicle equipped with a wheel and tire

without TPMS.

●If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID

has not been registered.

●If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modification not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Starting and driving 5-5

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert

When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the

TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert provides visual and

audible signals outside the vehicle to help you

inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift

lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch to the ON position.

Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators

will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is reached,

the horn beeps once and the hazard indica-

tors stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

●If the tire is over-inflated more than ap-

proximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators flash

three times. To correct the pressure, push

the core of the valve stem on the tire

briefly to release pressure. When the

pressure reaches the designated pres-

sure, the horn beeps once.

●If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds after

starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that

the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not operating.

●The TPMS will not activate the Easy Fill

Tire Alert under the following conditions:

– If there is interference from an external

device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation device

is not sufficient to inflate the tire.

–

There is a malfunction in the TPMS system.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or haz-

ard indicators.

–

The identification code of the tires pres-

sure sensor is not registered to the system.

– The battery of the tire pressure sensor is

low.

●If the Easy Fill Tire Alert does not operate

due to TPMS interference, move the ve-

hicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward

and try again.

If the Easy Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire

pressure gauge.

ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles.

They have higher ground clearance than passen-

ger cars to make them capable of performing in a

variety of on-pavement and off-road applications.

This gives them a higher center of gravity than

ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground

clearance is a better view of the road, allowing

you to anticipate problems. However, they are not

designed for cornering at the same speeds as

conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more

than low-slung sports cars are designed to per-

form satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at

all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As

with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate

this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control

or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more likely to die than a

person wearing a seat belt.

For additional information, refer to “Driving safety

precautions” in this section.

5-6 Starting and driving

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss of

control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey

all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,

high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-

neuvers, because these driving practices could

cause you to lose control of your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes the

vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when

tired. Never drive when under the influence of

alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-

the-counter drugs which may cause drowsi-

ness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in

the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemental

restraint system” section of this manual, and also

instruct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-

sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an

unbelted or improperly belted person is

significantly more likely to be injured or

killed than a person properly wearing a

seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side wheels

may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this

occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-

hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed

is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-

hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle

speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the

steering wheel until both tires return to the

road surface. When all tires are on the road

surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-

propriate driving lane.

●If you decide that it is not safe to return the

vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,

road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the

vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur

if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to

hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss

can also be caused by driving on under-inflated

tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling

and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway

speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-

ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect

the tires for wear and damage. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual. If a tire

rapidly loses air pressure or “blows-out” while

driving, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-

ing the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle

must be driven as appropriate based on the con-

ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.

Starting and driving 5-7

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.

Losing control of the vehicle may cause a

collision and result in personal injury.

●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in

the direction of the flat tire.

●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

●Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel

with both hands and try to hold a straight

course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-

erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location

off the road and away from traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually

stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and

contact a roadside emergency service to

change the tire. For additional information,

refer to “Changing a flat tire” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcohol

or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-

duces coordination, delays reaction time

and impairs judgement. Driving after

drinking alcohol increases the likelihood

of being involved in an accident injuring

yourself and others. Additionally, if you

are injured in an accident, alcohol can

increase the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,

you must choose not to drive under the influence

of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are

injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Al-

though the local laws vary on what is considered

to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol

affects all people differently and most people

underestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! That is

true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription)

and illegal drugs too. Don’t drive if your ability to

operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol,

drugs, or some other physical condition.

DRIVING SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Your NISSAN is designed for both normal and

off-road use. However, avoid driving in deep wa-

ter or mud as your NISSAN is mainly designed for

leisure use, unlike a conventional off-road ve-

hicle.

Remember that 2-wheel drive models are less

capable than 4-wheel drive models for rough

road driving and extrication when stuck in deep

snow or mud, or the like.

Please observe the following precautions:

WARNING

●Spinning the front wheels on slippery

surface may cause the 4WD warning

message to display and the 4WD sys-

tem to automatically switch from the

4WD to the 2WD mode. This could re-

duce the traction. Be especially careful

when towing a trailer. (4WD models)

●Drive carefully when off the road and

avoid dangerous areas. Every person

who drives or rides in this vehicle

should be seated with their seat belt

fastened. This will keep you and your

passengers in position when driving

over rough terrain.

5-8 Starting and driving

●Do not drive across steep slopes. In-

stead drive either straight up or straight

down the slopes. Off-road vehicles can

tip over sideways much more easily

than they can forward or backward.

●Many hills are too steep for any vehicle.

If you drive up them, you may stall. If

you drive down them, you may not be

able to control your speed. If you drive

across them, you may roll over.

●Do not shift gears while driving on

downhill grades as this could cause

loss of control of the vehicle.

●Stay alert when driving to the top of a

hill. At the top there could be a drop-off

or other hazard that could cause an

accident.

●If your engine stalls or you cannot make

it to the top of a steep hill, never at-

tempt to turn around. Your vehicle could

tip or roll over. Always back straight

down in R (Reverse) gear and apply

brakes to control your speed.

●Heavy braking going down a hill could

cause your brakes to overheat and fade,

resulting in loss of control and an acci-

dent. Apply brakes lightly and use a low

gear to control your speed.

●Unsecured cargo can be thrown around

when driving over rough terrain. Prop-

erly secure all cargo so it will not be

thrown forward and cause injury to you

or your passengers.

●Secure heavy loads in the cargo area as

far forward and as low as possible. Do

not equip the vehicle with tires larger

than specified in this manual. This could

cause your vehicle to roll over.

●Do not grip the inside or spokes of the

steering wheel when driving off-road.

The steering wheel could move sud-

denly and injure your hands. Instead

drive with your fingers and thumbs on

the outside of the rim.

●Before operating the vehicle, ensure

that the driver and all passengers have

their seat belts fastened.

●Always drive with the floor mats in place

as the floor may become hot.

●Lower your speed when encountering

strong crosswinds. With a higher center

of gravity, your NISSAN is more affected

by strong side winds. Slower speeds

ensure better vehicle control.

●Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires, even with 4WD

engaged.

●For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

●Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing), or

similar equipment even if the other two

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure you inform test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may

result in drivetrain damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could

result in serious vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

●When a wheel is off the ground due to

an unlevel surface, do not spin the

wheel excessively.

Starting and driving 5-9

●Accelerating quickly, sharp steering

maneuvers or sudden braking may

cause loss of control.

●If at all possible, avoid sharp turning

maneuvers, particularly at high speeds.

Your NISSAN vehicle has a higher cen-

ter of gravity than a passenger car. The

vehicle is not designed for cornering at

the same speeds as passenger cars.

●Failure to operate this vehicle correctly

could result in loss of control and/or a

rollover accident.

●Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted,

or radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Install tire chains on the front

wheels when driving on slippery roads

and drive carefully.

●Be sure to check the brakes immedi-

ately after driving in mud or water. For

additional information, refer to “Brake

system” in this section.

●Avoid parking your vehicle on steep

hills. If you get out of the vehicle and it

rolls forward, backward or sideways,

you could be injured.

●Whenever you drive off-road through

sand, mud or water as deep as the

wheel hub, more frequent maintenance

may be required. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Periodic maintenance”

in the “Maintenance and schedules”

section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button ignition

switch while driving the vehicle except in

an emergency. (The engine will stop when

the ignition switch is pushed three con-

secutive times in quick succession or the

ignition switch is pushed and held for

more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops

while the vehicle is being driven, this

could lead to a crash and serious injury.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

5-10 Starting and driving

When the ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will

illuminate.

Push the ignition switch center:

●Once to change to ACC.

●Two times to change to ON.

●Three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically return to the

LOCK position when any door is either opened or

closed with the switch in the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition

switch position cannot be switched to OFF until

the shift lever is moved to the P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-

ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch

position will change to the ON position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF

position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the push-button ignition switch cannot be

moved from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for operation are

displayed on the vehicle information display. For

additional information, refer to “Vehicle informa-

tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be used

when the Intelligent Key is within the specified

operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present near

the operating location, the Intelligent Key sys-

tem’s operating range becomes narrower and

may not function properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range,

it is possible for anyone, even someone who does

not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition

switch to start the engine.

LSD2014 LSD2020

Starting and driving 5-11

The operating range of the engine start function

is inside of the vehicle 䊊

●The luggage area is not included in the op-

erating range, but the Intelligent Key may

function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instru-

ment panel, inside the glove box, storage bin

or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not

function.

●If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door

or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent

Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in this

position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is

pushed to the ACC position while carrying the

Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door is

opened or closed with the ignition switched off.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accessories,

such as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position after a period

of time under the following conditions:

●All doors are closed.

●Shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of

the following occur:

●Any door is opened.

●Shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

●Ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system and

electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will turn the

ignition switch to the OFF position, if the vehicle

is not running, after some time under the follow-

ing conditions:

●All doors are closed.

●Shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of

the following occur:

●Any door is opened.

●Shift lever is moved out of the P (Park)

position.

●Ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition

switch in ACC or ON positions when the

engine is not running for an extended pe-

riod. This can discharge the battery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position when

the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.

No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

5-12 Starting and driving

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is

discharged, or environmental conditions interfere

with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine

according to the following procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent

Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)

After Step 3 is performed, when the ignition

switch is pushed without depressing the

brake pedal, the ignition switch position will

change to ACC.

4. Push the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal within ten seconds after the

chime sounds. The engine will start.

NOTE:

●When the ignition switch is pushed to the

ACC or ON position or the engine is started

by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key

battery discharge indicator appears in the

vehicle information display even when the

Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is

not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent

Key battery discharge indicator, touch the

ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.

●If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator appears, replace the battery as soon

as possible. For additional information, refer

to “Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not

allow the engine to start without the use of the

registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key

(for example, when interference is caused by

another registered key, an automated toll road

device or automatic payment device on the key

ring), restart the engine using the following pro-

cedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position

for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device

(which may have caused the interference)

separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-

ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-

rate key ring to avoid interference from other

devices.

SSD0860

Starting and driving 5-13

●Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-

ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid

as frequently as possible, or at least when-

ever you refuel.

●Check that all windows and lights are clean.

●Visually inspect tires for their appearance

and condition. Also check tires for proper

inflation.

●Check that all doors are closed.

●Position seat and adjust head

restraints/headrests.

●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to

do likewise.

●Check the operation of warning lights when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate if

the shift lever is in any of the driving

positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.

Depress the brake pedal and push the igni-

tion switch to start the engine.

To start the engine immediately, push and

release the ignition switch while depressing

the brake pedal with the ignition switch in

any position.

●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-

tremely cold weather or when restarting,

depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-

proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while

holding, crank the engine. Release the

accelerator pedal when the engine starts.

●If the engine is very hard to start because

it is flooded, depress the accelerator

pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.

Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion to start cranking the engine. After five

or six seconds, stop cranking by pushing

the ignition switch to LOCK. After crank-

ing the engine, release the accelerator

pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off

the accelerator pedal by depressing the

brake pedal and pushing the push-button

ignition switch to start the engine. If the

engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the

above procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than

15 seconds at a time. If the engine does

not start, push the ignition switch to the

OFF position and wait 10 seconds before

cranking again, otherwise the starter

could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-

onds after starting. Do not race the engine

while warming it up. Drive at moderate

speed for a short distance first, especially in

cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-

gine running for a minimum of two to three

minutes before shutting it off. Starting and

stopping the engine over a short period of

time may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

5. To stop the engine, shift the shift lever to the

P (Park) position and push the ignition

switch to the OFF position.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-14 Starting and driving

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

REMOTE START (if so equipped)

Vehicles started with the remote start require the

ignition switch to be placed in the ON position

before the shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position. To place the ignition switch to the

ON position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN In-

telligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks and

adjustments” section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), or (M)

Manual shift mode. Always depress the

brake pedal until shifting is completed.

Failure to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. this may cause a loss of control.

●Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident or

damage the transmission.

CAUTION

●To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-

trolled to produce maximum power and smooth

operation.

The recommended operating procedures for this

transmission are shown on the following pages.

Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle

performance and driving enjoyment.

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

Starting and driving 5-15

Starting the vehicle

1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before moving the shift

lever out of the P (Park) position.

This CVT is designed so that the foot

brake pedal must be depressed before

shifting from P (Park) to any driving

position while the ignition switch is in

the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of

the P (Park) position and into any of

the other positions if the ignition

switch is placed in the LOCK, OFF or

ACC position while the ready light illu-

minates.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and

move the shift lever to a driving position.

3. Release the parking brake and foot brake

pedal and then gradually start the vehicle in

motion.

WARNING

●Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive) position.

Always depress the brake pedal until

shifting is completed. Failure to do so

could cause you to lose control and

have an accident.

●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward or

reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of control.

●Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident or

damage the transmission.

CAUTION

●To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

●Except in an emergency, do not shift to

the N (Neutral) position while driving.

Coasting with the transmission in the N

(Neutral) position may cause serious

damage to the transmission.

5-16 Starting and driving

Shifting

Press the button 䊊

Awhile depressing the

brake pedal

Press the button 䊊

Ato shift

Shift without pressing 䊊

Abutton

After starting the engine, fully depress the brake

pedal, push and press the shift lever button and

move the shift lever from the P (Park) position to

any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is

in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause the

vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away

and result in serious personal injury or

property damage.

CAUTION

Use the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position

only when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

P (Park) position only when the vehicle is

completely stopped

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the

vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.

Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.

The brake pedal must be depressed and

the shift lever button pushed in to move the

shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive

position to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake

first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position.

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use the

R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle

is completely stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make

sure the vehicle is completely stopped before

selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake

pedal must be depressed and the shift lever

button pushed in to move the shift lever

from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any drive po-

sition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The

engine can be started in this position. You may

shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine

while the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

L (Low)

Use this position for engine braking on steep

downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes and

whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not use

the L (Low) position in any other circumstances.

LSD2127

Starting and driving 5-17

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged, the

shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park)

position even with the brake pedal depressed

and the shift lever button pushed. To move the

shift lever, perform the following procedure:

1. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Remove the shift lock release cover 䊊

Aus-

ing a suitable tool.

4. Push down the shift lock release 䊊

Busing a

suitable tool.

5. Press the shift lever button 䊊

Cand move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position 䊊

while holding down the shift lock release.

The vehicle may be moved to the desired

location. Replace the removed shift lock re-

lease cover after the operation. If the shift

lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park)

position, have the CVT system checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from the

P (Park) position while the engine is run-

ning and the brake pedal is depressed, the

stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning

stop lights could cause an accident injur-

ing yourself and others.

Overdrive (O/D) OFF switch

When the O/D OFF switch is pushed with the shift

lever in the D (Drive) position, the light in the

instrument panel illuminates. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this manual.

Use the overdrive OFF mode when you need

improved engine braking.

To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push the O/D

OFF switch again. The indicator light will

turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when the shift

lever is shifted to any position other than D

(Drive), the overdrive OFF mode will be automati-

cally turned off.

LSD2128 LSD2246

5-18 Starting and driving

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-

erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-

sion down into a lower gear, depending on the

vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection

mode

This transmission has a high fluid temperature

protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-

comes too high (for example, when climbing

steep grades in high temperatures with heavy

loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine

power and, under some conditions, vehicle

speed will be decreased automatically to reduce

the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelerator

pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be

limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-

ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning

and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe

system may be activated. The Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indi-

cate the fail-safe mode is activated. For

additional information, refer to “Malfunc-

tion Indicator Light (MIL)” in the “Instru-

ment and controls” section of this manual.

This will occur even if all electrical circuits

are functioning properly. In this case, place

the ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then push the switch

back to the ON position. The vehicle should

return to its normal operating condition. If

it does not return to its normal operating

condition, have the transmission checked

and repaired, if necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-

tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,

vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.

The reduced speed may be lower than

other traffic, which could increase the

chance of a collision. Be especially careful

when driving. If necessary, pull to the side

of the road at a safe place and allow the

transmission to return to normal opera-

tion, or have it repaired if necessary.

WARNING

●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

●Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

●Do not use the shift lever in place of the

parking brake. When parking, be sure

the parking brake is fully engaged.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and /or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-19

To engage: Firmly depress the parking brake.

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. Firmly depress the parking brake pedal and it

will release.

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning

light goes out.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the BSW system

could result in serious injury or death.

●The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not

designed to prevent contact with ve-

hicles or objects. When changing lanes,

always use the side and rear mirrors

and turn and look in the direction your

vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to

change lanes. Never rely solely on the

BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of other

vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes. The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊

1in-

stalled near the rear bumper to detect other ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane.

LSD0158 LSD2221

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so

equipped)

5-20 Starting and driving

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either

side of your vehicle within the detection zone

shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts

from the outside mirror of your vehicle and ex-

tends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear

bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) side-

ways.

Detection zone

SSD1030

LSD2494

Starting and driving 5-21

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approximately

20 mph (32km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detec-

tion zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1)

illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the

system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA

indicator light flashes. The BSW indicator light

continues to flash until the detected vehicles

leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates

for a few seconds when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator

light is adjusted automatically depending on the

brightness of the ambient light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after

the driver activates the turn signal, then only the

side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no

chime sounds. For additional information, refer to

“BSW driving situations” in this section.

The BSW system automatically turns on every

time the engine is started, as long as it is acti-

vated using the settings menu on the vehicle

information display. LSD2491

5-22 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

When the BSW system is enabled in the vehicle

information display, the system can be turned off

by pushing the warning systems switch. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Warning systems

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the BSW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display and

then press ENTER. Use the button to

select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

ENTER button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER

button.

3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER

button.

4. Use the ENTER button to turn the system on

or off.

NOTE:

●When enabling/disabling the system, the

system will retain current settings even if the

engine is restarted.

●The RCTA system (if so equipped) is inte-

grated into the BSW system. There is not a

separate selection in the vehicle information

display for the RCTA system. When the

BSW is disabled, the RCTA system is also

disabled.

●When the BSW system is turned on, the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle

information display illuminates.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the BSW system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

●The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground clear-

ance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detection

zone when you accelerate from a

stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the de-

tection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles in

a row, the vehicles after the first ve-

hicle may not be detected if they are

traveling close together.

●The radar sensors’ detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-

ing in a narrow lane, the radar sen-

sors may detect vehicles driving two

lanes away.

Starting and driving 5-23

●The radar sensors are designed to

ignore most stationary objects, how-

ever objects such as guardrails,

walls, foliage and parked vehicles

may occasionally be detected. This is

a normal operation condition.

●The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow build-up on the

vehicle

– Dirt build-up on the vehicle

●Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors. These conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles.

●Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound, and

it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator

off

Indicator

flashing

Another vehicle approaching from

behind

Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator

light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from behind in an adjacent lane.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2299

5-24 Starting and driving

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn

signal when another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

●The radar sensors may not detect vehicles

which are approaching rapidly from behind.

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle

stays in the detection zone for approximately

2 seconds.

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

●When overtaking several vehicles in a row,

the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be

detected if they are traveling close together.

●The radar sensors may not detect slower

moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

Illustration 3 – Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2302

Illustration 4 – Overtaking another vehicle

LSD2303

Starting and driving 5-25

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected.

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illumi-

nates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from

either side.

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn

signal while another vehicle is in the detection

zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the

side indicator light flashes.

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

LSD2305

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

LSD2308

5-26 Starting and driving

NOTE:

●If the driver activates the turn signal before a

vehicle enters the detection zone, the side

indicator light will flash but no chime will

sound when the other vehicle is detected.

●The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle

which is traveling at about the same speed

as your vehicle when it enters the detection

zone.

LSD2493

Starting and driving 5-27

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will

be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear and

the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink 䊊

Ain

the vehicle information display.

The system is not available until the conditions no

longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing

the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system (if so equipped) will also stop work-

ing.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

system will resume automatically.

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off

automatically. The system malfunction warning

message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (orange)

will appear in the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system (if so equipped) will also stop work-

ing.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the message continues

to appear, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors

clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the

area around the radar sensors.

LSD2221

5-28 Starting and driving

Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma-

terial), install accessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors. It is recommended that you con-

sult a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar

sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference when the equip-

ment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed and

used in accordance with the instruction manual,

may cause harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. Operation of this equipment in a resi-

dential area is likely to cause harmful interference

in which case the user will be required to correct

the interference at his own expense.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Informa-

tion:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-

ronment. This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 20 cm be-

tween the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or oper-

ating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause inteference,

2. This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

Starting and driving 5-29

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the RCTA system

could result in serious injury or death.

●The RCTA system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is not

designed to prevent contact with ve-

hicles or objects. When backing out of a

parking space, always use the side and

rear mirrors and turn and look in the

direction your vehicle will move. Never

rely solely on the RCTA system.

The RCTA system will assist you when backing

out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in

reverse, the system is designed to detect other

vehicles approaching from the right or left of the

vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will

alert you.

LSD2494

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

(if so equipped)

5-30 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an

approaching vehicle when the driver is backing

out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the

vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from

either side, the system chimes (once) and the

side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the

side the vehicle is approaching from. The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊

1in-

stalled on both sides near the rear bumper to

detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors 䊊

1can detect an approaching

vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m)

away.

LSD2216 LSD2221

Starting and driving 5-31

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

When the RCTA system is enabled in the vehicle

information display, the system can be turned off

by pushing the warning systems switch. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Warning systems

switch” in the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

Perform the following steps to enable or disable

the RCTA system.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display and

then press ENTER. Use the button to

select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

ENTER button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the ENTER

button.

3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER

button.

4. Use the ENTER button to turn the system on

or off.

When the RCTA system is turned on, the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle infor-

mation display illuminates.

LSD2492

5-32 Starting and driving

NOTE:

●The RCTA system is integrated into the

BSW system. There is not a separate selec-

tion in the vehicle information display for the

RCTA system. When the BSW is disabled,

the RCTA system is also disabled.

●When enabling/disabling the system, the

system setting will be retained even if the

engine is restarted.

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD2173

Starting and driving 5-33

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the RCTA system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●Always check surroundings and turn to

check what is behind you before back-

ing up. The radar sensors detect ap-

proaching (moving) vehicles. The radar

sensors cannot detect every object such

as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,

animals or child-operated toy

vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately 19 mph

(30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

●The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain situations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle parked

next to you obstructs the beam of the

radar sensor.

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approaching

vehicle turns into your vehicle’s park-

ing lot aisle.

– Illustration e: When the angle formed

by your vehicle and approaching ve-

hicle is small

●The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/snow build-up on the

vehicle

– Dirt build- up on the vehicle

●Do not attach stickers (including trans-

parent material), install accessories or

apply additional paint near the radar

sensors. These conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles

●Excessive noise (e.g. audio system vol-

ume, open vehicle window) will inter-

fere with the chime sound, and it may

not be heard.

5-34 Starting and driving

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approaching

in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite

direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not

be sounded by the RCTA system after the

first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1

LSD2043

Illustration 2

LSD2044

Starting and driving 5-35

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the system will

be deactivated automatically. The “Side Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear and

the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) will blink 䊊

Ain

the vehicle information display.

The systems are not available until the conditions

no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system will also stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

system will resume automatically.

LSD2493

5-36 Starting and driving

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically. The system malfunction warn-

ing message with the BSW/RCTA indicator (or-

ange) will appear in the vehicle information dis-

play.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the RCTA

system will also stop working.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off

and restart the engine. If the message continues

to appear, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper.

Always keep the area near the radar sensors

clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary

ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist

or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused by

objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the

radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing the

area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transparent ma-

terial), install accessories or apply additional

paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around the

radar sensors. It is recommended that you con-

sult a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar

sensors is damaged due to a collision.

Radio frequency statement

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

LSD2221

Starting and driving 5-37

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference when the equip-

ment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed and

used in accordance with the instruction manual,

may cause harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. Operation of this equipment in a resi-

dential area is likely to cause harmful interference

in which case the user will be required to correct

the interference at his own expense.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Informa-

tion:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-

ronment. This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 20 cm be-

tween the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or oper-

ating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause inteference,

2. This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. ACCEL/RES switch

2. COAST/SET switch

3. CANCEL switch

4. ON/OFF switch

LSD2218

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

5-38 Starting and driving

●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it

cancels automatically. The indicator

illuminates in the vehicle information display

then blinks to warn the driver. For additional

information, refer to “Vehicle information dis-

play” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

●If the indicator blinks, push the cruise

control ON/OFF switch off and have the

system checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●The indicator may blink when the

cruise control ON/OFF switch is pushed

ON while pushing the ACCEL/RES,

COAST/SET, or CANCEL switch. To prop-

erly set the cruise control system, use the

following procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driving

under the following conditions:

●When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in

speed.

●On winding or hilly roads.

●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

●In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-

tween 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without

keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON/OFF switch on. The indicator (white)

in the vehicle information display will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to

the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch

and release it. The indicator (green) in the

vehicle information display will illuminate. Take

your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle

maintains the set speed.

●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-

celerator pedal. When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously

set speed.

●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed

when going up or down steep hills. If this

happens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

●Push the CANCEL switch; the indica-

tor (green) in the vehicle information display

goes out.

●Tap the brake pedal; the indicator

(green) goes out.

●Push the ON/OFF switch off. The in-

dicator in the vehicle information display go

out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled and

the indicator (green) in the vehicle infor-

mation display goes out if:

●You depress the brake pedal while pushing

the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.

The preset speed is deleted from memory.

●The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph

(13 km/h) below the set speed.

●You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of

the following three methods:

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the COAST/SET switch.

Starting and driving 5-39

●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you de-

sire, release the switch.

●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed in-

creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one

of the following three methods:

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it.

●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-

lease the switch when the vehicle slows to

the desired speed.

●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed de-

creases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-

lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-

turns to the last set cruising speed when the

vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the ICC system

could result in serious injury or death.

●The ICC system is only an aid to assist

the driver and is not a collision warning

or avoidance device. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive safely,

and be in control of the vehicle at all

times.

●Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

●Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ICC system. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the ICC system. To

avoid serious injury or death, do not rely

on the system to prevent accidents or to

control the vehicle’s speed in emer-

gency situations. Do not use the ICC

system except in appropriate road and

traffic conditions.

The ICC system is intended to enhance the op-

eration of the vehicle when following a vehicle

traveling in the same lane and direction.

The ICC system uses a radar sensor 䊊

Alocated

on the front of the vehicle to detect vehicles

traveling ahead.

If the radar sensor detects a slower moving ve-

hicle ahead, the system will reduce the vehicle

speed so that your vehicle follows the vehicle in

front at the selected distance.

The detection range of the sensor is approxi-

mately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

LSD2098

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

(if so equipped)

5-40 Starting and driving

ICC SYSTEM OPERATION

The ICC system maintains a selected distance

from the vehicle in front of you within the speed

range 0 to 90 mph (0 to 144 km/h) up to the set

speed. The set speed can be selected by the

driver between 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h),

based on road conditions.

The vehicle travels at the set speed when the

road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is designed to maintain a se-

lected distance from the vehicle in front of you

and can reduce the speed to match a slower

vehicle ahead. The system will decelerate the

vehicle as necessary and if the vehicle ahead

comes to a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a

standstill. However, the ICC system can only

apply up to 40% of the vehicle’s total braking

power.

This system should only be used when traffic

conditions allow vehicle speeds to remain fairly

constant or when vehicle speeds change gradu-

ally. If a vehicle moves into the traveling lane

ahead or if a vehicle traveling ahead rapidly de-

celerates, the distance between vehicles may

become closer because the ICC system cannot

decelerate the vehicle quickly enough. If this oc-

curs, the ICC system will sound a warning chime

and blink the system display to notify the driver to

take necessary action.

LSD2517

Starting and driving 5-41

For additional information, refer to “Approach

warning” in this section.

The following items are controlled in the ICC

system:

●When there are no vehicles traveling ahead,

the ICC system maintains the speed set by

the driver. The set speed range is between

approximately 20 and 90 mph (32 and

144 km/h).

●When there is a vehicle traveling ahead, the

ICC system adjusts the speed to maintain

the distance, selected by the driver, from the

vehicle ahead. If the vehicle ahead comes to

a stop, the vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system. The sys-

tem will cancel once it judges a standstill

with a warning chime.

●When the vehicle traveling ahead has moved

out from its lane of travel, the ICC system

accelerates and maintains vehicle speed up

to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle speed

or warn you when you approach stationary and

slow moving vehicles. You must pay attention to

vehicle operation to maintain proper distance

from vehicles ahead when approaching toll gates

or traffic congestion.

When driving on the freeway at a set speed and

approaching a slower traveling vehicle ahead, the

ICC system will adjust the speed to maintain the

distance, selected by the driver, from the vehicle

ahead. If the vehicle ahead changes lanes or exits

the freeway, the ICC system will accelerate and

maintain the speed up to the set speed. Pay

attention to the driving operation to maintain con-

trol of the vehicle as it accelerates to the set

speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to a ve-

hicle ahead, this system automatically acceler-

ates or decelerates your vehicle according to the

speed of the vehicle ahead. Depress the accel-

erator to properly accelerate your vehicle when

acceleration is required for a lane change. De-

press the brake pedal when deceleration is re-

quired to maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to its sudden braking or if a vehicle

cuts in. Always stay alert when using the ICC

system.

SSD0254

5-42 Starting and driving

THE ICC SWITCH

The system is operated by the CRUISE ON/OFF

switch and four control switches, all mounted on

the steering wheel.

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without erasing the

set speed.

2. RES/+ switch:

Resumes set speed or increases speed in-

crementally.

3. SET/- switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces speed

incrementally.

4. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following distance:

●Long

●Middle

●Short

5. CRUISE ON/OFF switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

The ICC system display and indicators

The display is located between the speedometer

and tachometer.

1. CRUISE ON/OFF switch indicator:

●ICC system ON indicator (white): In-

dicates that the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

is ON.

●ICC system SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is set.

●ICC system warning (orange): Indi-

cates that if there is a malfunction in the

ICC system.

LSD2518 LSD2285

Starting and driving 5-43

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance between ve-

hicles set with the distance switch.

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle in front

of you.

Operating ICC

To turn on the cruise control: quickly push

and release the CRUISE ON/OFF switch 䊊

A. The

ICC system ON indicator (white), set distance

indicator and set vehicle speed indicator come

on in a standby state for setting.

To set cruising speed: accelerate your vehicle

to the desired speed, push the SET/– switch and

release it. The ICC system set indicator (green),

vehicle ahead detection indicator, set distance

indicator and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊

Bwill

come on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Your vehicle will maintain the set speed.

When the SET/– switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the system cannot be set

and the ICC indicators will blink for approximately

2 seconds:

●When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and a vehicle ahead is not detected

LSD2519 LSD2520

5-44 Starting and driving

●When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

Manual mode

●When the parking brake is applied

●When the brakes are operated by the driver

When the SET/– switch is pushed under the

following conditions, the system cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a message will

pop up:

●When the VDC system is off (To use the ICC

system, turn on the VDC system. Push the

CRUISE ON/OFF switch to turn off the ICC

system and reset the ICC switch by pushing

the CRUISE ON/OFF switch again.)

For additional information about the VDC

sytem, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system” in this section.

●When ABS or VDC is operating

●When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no longer

slipping. Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch

to turn off the ICC system, and reset the ICC

system by pushing the CRUISE ON/OFF

switch again.)

䊊

1System set display with vehicle ahead

䊊

2System set display without vehicle ahead

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane ahead, the

ICC system decelerates the vehicle by control-

ling the throttle and applying the brakes to match

the speed of a slower vehicle ahead. The system

then controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the driver

selected distance.

NOTE:

●The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

●When the brake operates, a noise may

be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the vehicle

ahead detection indicator comes on. The ICC

system will also display the set speed and se-

lected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected ahead, the

ICC system gradually accelerates your vehicle to

resume the previously set vehicle speed. The ICC

system then maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the vehicle

ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during acceleration to

the set vehicle speed or any time the ICC system

is in operation, the system controls the distance

to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the system will

be canceled.

LSD2288

Starting and driving 5-45

When passing another vehicle, the set speed

indicator 䊊

Bwill flash when the vehicle speed

exceeds the set speed. The vehicle detect indi-

cator will turn off when the area ahead of the

vehicle is open. When the pedal is released, the

vehicle will return to the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the ICC

system, you can depress the accelerator pedal

when it is necessary to accelerate your vehicle

rapidly.

䊊

1System set display with vehicle ahead

䊊

2System set display without vehicle ahead

How to change the set vehicle speed

To cancel the preset speed: use one of the

following methods:

●Push the CANCEL switch. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

●Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle speed

indicator will go out.

●Turn the CRUISE ON/OFF switch off. The

ICC indicators will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed: use one

of the following methods:

●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push and

release the SET/– switch.

●Push and hold the RES/+ switch. The set

vehicle speed will increase by approximately

5 mph (5 km/h).

●Push, then quickly release the RES/+

switch. Each time you do this, the set speed

will increase by approximately 1 mph

(1 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed: use one

of the following methods:

●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-

hicle attains the desired speed, push the

SET/– switch and release it.

●Push and hold the SET/– switch. The set

vehicle speed will decrease by approxi-

mately 5 mph (5 km/h).

●Push, then quickly release the SET/– switch.

Each time you do this, the set speed will

decrease by approximately 1 mph (1 km/h).

To resume the preset speed: push and re-

lease the RES/+ switch. The vehicle will resume

the last set cruising speed when the vehicle

speed is over 20 mph (32 km/h).

LSD2289 LSD2288

5-46 Starting and driving

How to change the set distance to the

vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be se-

lected at any time depending on the traffic con-

ditions.

Each time the distance switch 䊊

Ais

pushed, the set distance will change to long,

middle, short and back to long again, in that

sequence.

Distance Approximate distance at

60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short 90 (30)

●The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed. The

higher the vehicle speed, the longer the dis-

tance.

●If the engine is stopped, the set distance

becomes “long”. (Each time the engine is

started, the initial setting becomes “long”.)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle ahead

due to rapid deceleration of that vehicle or if

another vehicle cuts in, the system warns the

driver with the chime and ICC system display.

Decelerate by depressing the brake pedal to

maintain a safe vehicle distance if:

●The chime sounds.

●The vehicle ahead detection indicator blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in some cases

when there is a short distance between vehicles.

Some examples are:

●When the vehicles are traveling at the same

speed and the distance between vehicles is

not changing.

●When the vehicle ahead is traveling faster

and the distance between vehicles is in-

creasing.

●When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

●The vehicle approaches other vehicles that

are parked or moving slowly.

●The accelerator pedal is depressed, overrid-

ing the system.

LSD2521 LSD2429

Starting and driving 5-47

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when the

ICC sensor detects objects on the side of

the vehicle or on the side of the road. This

may cause the ICC system to decelerate or

accelerate the vehicle. The ICC sensor may

detect these objects when the vehicle is

driven on winding roads, narrow roads, hilly

roads, or when entering or exiting a curve.

In these cases you will have to manually

control the proper distance ahead of your

vehicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or driving

position in the lane) or traffic or vehicle condition

(for example, if a vehicle is being driven with some

damage).

ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the ICC system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The ICC system is primarily intended for

use on straight, dry, open roads with

light traffic. It is not advisable to use the

ICC system in city traffic or congested

areas.

●The ICC system will not adapt automati-

cally to road conditions. This system

should be used in evenly flowing traffic.

Do not use the system on roads with

sharp curves, or on icy roads, in heavy

rain or in fog.

SSD0252

5-48 Starting and driving

●As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive or

absentminded driving, or overcome

poor visibility in rain, fog, or other bad

weather. Decelerate the vehicle speed

by depressing the brake pedal, depend-

ing on the distance to the vehicle ahead

and the surrounding circumstances in

order to maintain a safe distance be-

tween vehicles.

●If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the

vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system. The

system will cancel once it judges that

the vehicle has come to a standstill and

sound a warning chime. To prevent the

vehicle from moving, the driver must

depress the brake pedal.

●Always pay attention to the operation of

the vehicle and be ready to manually

control the proper following distance.

The ICC system may not be able to

maintain the selected distance between

vehicles (following distance) or se-

lected vehicle speed under some

circumstances.

●The system may not detect the vehicle

in front of you in certain road or weather

conditions. To avoid accidents, never

use the ICC system under the following

conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy or

there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as on

ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog, snow,

etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to the

bumper around the distance sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the vehicle

may go beyond the set vehicle speed

and frequent braking may result in

overheating the brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it diffi-

cult to keep a proper distance be-

tween vehicles because of frequent

acceleration or deceleration

– Interference by other radar sources.

●Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

●In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. Always

stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-

tem where not recommended in this

warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the following

objects:

●Stationary and slow moving vehicles

●Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

●Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

●Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel lane

The following are some conditions in which the

sensor cannot properly detect a vehicle ahead

and the system may not operate properly:

●When snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

●When excessively heavy baggage is loaded

in the rear seat or cargo area of your vehicle.

Starting and driving 5-49

The ICC system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s operation within the limita-

tions of the system.

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is limited. A

vehicle ahead must be in the detection zone for

the vehicle-to-vehicle distance detection mode

to maintain the selected distance from the vehicle

ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the detec-

tion zone due to its position within the same lane

of travel. Motorcycles may not be detected in the

same lane ahead if they are traveling offset from

the centerline of the lane. A vehicle that is enter-

ing the lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may have to

manually control the proper distance away

from vehicle traveling ahead.

When driving on some roads, such as winding,

hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads which are

under construction, the ICC sensor may detect

vehicles in a different lane, or may temporarily not

detect a vehicle traveling ahead. This may cause

the ICC system to decelerate or accelerate the

vehicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be affected by

vehicle operation (steering maneuver or traveling

position in the lane, etc.) or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn you

by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You will

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

SSD0253

5-50 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which the ICC

system may be temporarily unavailable. In these

instances, the ICC system may not cancel and

may not be able to maintain the selected follow-

ing distance from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC system is

automatically canceled. A chime will sound and

the system will not be able to be set:

●When the VDC system is turned off

●When the VDC or ABS operates

●When a vehicle ahead is not detected and

your vehicle is traveling below the speed of

15 mph (24 km/h)

●When the system judges the vehicle is at a

standstill

●When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive) or

Manual mode

●When the parking brake is applied

●When a wheel slips

LSD2615

Starting and driving 5-51

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no longer

present, turn the system off using the ICC

CRUISE ON/OFF switch. Turn the ICC system

back on to use the system.

Condition B

When the radar sensor area of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, the ICC

system will automatically be canceled. If the sen-

sor area is covered with ice, a transparent or

translucent vinyl bag, etc., the ICC system may

not detect vehicles ahead. In these instances, the

ICC system may not cancel and may not be able

to maintain the selected following distance from

the vehicle ahead. Be sure to check and clean the

sensor area.

The system warning light (orange) will illuminate

and the “front radar obstruction” warning mes-

sage will appear in the vehicle information dis-

play.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, park the

vehicle in a safe location and turn the engine off.

Check to see if the radar sensor window is

blocked. If the radar sensor window is blocked,

remove the blocking material. Restart the engine.

If the warning light continues to illuminate, have

the ICC system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating properly, a

chime sounds and the system warning light (or-

ange) will come on.

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the vehicle in a

safe place. Turn the engine off, restart the engine,

resume driving and set the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or the

indicator stays on, it may indicate that the

system is malfunctioning. Although the ve-

hicle is still drivable under normal condi-

tions, have the vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LSD2411 LSD2395

5-52 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the ICC system 䊊

Ais located on

the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

●Always keep the sensor area clean.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor. Do not touch or remove the

screw located on the sensor. Doing so could

cause failure or malfunction. If the sensor is

damaged due to an accident, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

●Do not attach a sticker (including transpar-

ent material) or install an accessory near the

sensor. This could cause failure or malfunc-

tion.

●Do not attach metallic objects near the sen-

sor area (brush guard, etc.) This could cause

failure or malfunction.

●Do not alter, remove, or paint the front bum-

per. Before customizing or restoring the

front bumper, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference when the equip-

ment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed and

used in accordance with the instruction manual,

may cause harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. Operation of this equipment in a resi-

dential area is likely to cause harmful interference

in which case the user will be required to correct

the interference at his own expense.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Informa-

tion:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-

ronment. This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 20 cm be-

tween the radiator and your body.

LSD2098

Starting and driving 5-53

The transmitter must not be co-located or oper-

ating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause inteference,

2. This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-

tions for proper use of the FEB system

could result in serious injury or death.

●The FEB system is a supplemental aid

to the driver. It is not a replacement for

the driver’s attention to traffic condi-

tions or responsibility to drive safely. It

cannot prevent accidents due to care-

lessness or dangerous driving

techniques.

●The FEB system does not function in all

driving, traffic, weather and road

conditions.

The FEB system can assist the driver when there

is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle

ahead in the traveling lane.

The FEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊

Alocated

behind the lower grille of the front bumper to

measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the

same lane.

LSD2098

FORWARD EMERGENCY BRAKING

(FEB) (if so equipped)

5-54 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. FEB emergency warning indicator

3. FEB system warning light

FEB SYSTEM OPERATION

The FEB system will function when your vehicle is

driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph

(5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the FEB

system will provide an initial warning to the driver

by both a visual and audible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and force-

fully after the warning, and the FEB system de-

tects that there is still the possibility of a forward

collision, the system will automatically increase

the braking force. If the driver does not take

action, the FEB system issues the second visual

warning (red) and audible warning and also ap-

plies partial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the

FEB system applies harder braking automatically.

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

braking is performed by the FEB system.

LSD2639

Starting and driving 5-55

Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the

vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway

conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a

forward collision or may help mitigate the conse-

quences of a collision, should one be unavoid-

able. If the driver is handling the steering wheel,

accelerating or braking, the FEB system will func-

tion later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the fol-

lowing conditions:

●When the steering wheel is turned as far as

necessary to avoid a collision.

●When the accelerator pedal is depressed.

●When there is no longer a vehicle detected

ahead.

If the FEB system has stopped the vehicle, the

vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately

2 seconds before the brakes are released.

LSD2492

5-56 Starting and driving

TURNING THE FEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the FEB sys-

tems ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until “Settings” dis-

plays in the vehicle information display and

then press ENTER. Use the button to

select “Driver Assistance”. Then press the

ENTER button.

2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press the

ENTER button.

3. Use the ENTER button to turn the system on

or off.

When the FEB system is turned off, the FEB

system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

●The FEB system will be automatically turned

on when the engine is restarted.

FEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations for

the FEB system. Failure to operate the

vehicle in accordance with these system

limitations could result in serious injury or

death.

●The FEB system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

●The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in

the roadway.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Crossing vehicles.

●The radar sensor has some perfor-

mance limitations. If a stationary ve-

hicle is in the vehicle’s path, the FEB

system will not function when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds over approxi-

mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

●The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following conditions:

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material cov-

ering the radar sensor.

– Interference by other radar sources.

– Snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles.

– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.

motorcycle).

– When driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp curves.

●In some road or traffic conditions, the

FEB system may unexpectedly apply

partial braking. When acceleration is

necessary, continue to depress the ac-

celerator pedal to override the system.

●Braking distances increase on slippery

surfaces.

●The system is designed to automatically

check the sensor’s functionality, within

certain limitations. The system may not

detect some forms of obstructions of

the sensor area such as ice, snow, stick-

ers, etc. In these cases, the system may

not be able to worn the driver properly.

Be sure that you check, clean and clear

the sensor area regularly.

●Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-57

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interference

from another radar source, making it impossible

to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB system is

automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange) will illu-

minate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist, the

FEB system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper is

covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it im-

possible to detect a vehicle ahead, the FEB sys-

tem is automatically turned off.

The FEB system warning light (orange) will illu-

minate and the “front radar obstruction” warning

message will appear in the vehicle information

display.

LSD2616

5-58 Starting and driving

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the

vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the

P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean

the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft

cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light

continues to illuminate, have the FEB system

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the FEB system malfunctions, it will be turned

off automatically, a chime will sound, the FEB

warning light (orange) will illuminate and the

warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the

vehicle information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the

vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and

restart the engine. If the warning light continues

to illuminate, have the FEB system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor 䊊

Ais located behind the lower grille

of the front bumper.

To keep the system operating properly, be sure to

observe the following:

●Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean.

●Do not strike or damage the areas around

the sensor.

●Do not cover or attach stickers or similar

objects on the front bumper near the sensor

area. This could cause failure or malfunction.

●Do not attach metallic objects near the sen-

sor area (brush guard, etc.). This could

cause failure or malfunction.

●Do not alter, remove or paint the front bum-

per. Before customizing or restoring the

front bumper, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer.

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two condi-

tions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-

ence, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to operate the

equipment.

LSD2098

Starting and driving 5-59

This equipment has been tested and found to

comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,

pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These

limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference when the equip-

ment is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate

radio frequency energy and, if not installed and

used in accordance with the instruction manual,

may cause harmful interference to radio commu-

nications. Operation of this equipment in a resi-

dential area is likely to cause harmful interference

in which case the user will be required to correct

the interference at his own expense.

Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Informa-

tion:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-

posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-

ronment. This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 20 cm be-

tween the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or oper-

ating in conjunction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause inteference,

2. This device must accept any interference,

including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation of the device.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to obtain

maximum engine performance and ensure

the future reliability and economy of your

new vehicle. Failure to follow these rec-

ommendations may result in shortened

engine life and reduced engine

performance.

●Avoid driving for long periods at constant

speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the

engine over 4,000 RPM.

●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

●Avoid quick starts.

●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 mi

(805 km). Your engine, axle or other parts

could be damaged.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

5-60 Starting and driving

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving

Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy

from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

●Avoid rapid starts and stops.

●Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

●Maintain constant speed while commut-

ing and coast whenever possible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

●Look ahead to try and anticipate and mini-

mize stops.

●Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your number

of stops.

●Maintaining a steady speed can minimize

red light stops and improve fuel effi-

ciency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

●Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more effi-

cient to open windows to cool the vehicle

due to reduced engine load.

●Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more effi-

cient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to

increased aerodynamic drag.

●Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

●Observing the speed limit and not ex-

ceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally

allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due

to reduced aerodynamic drag.

●Maintaining a safe following distance be-

hind other vehicles reduces unnecessary

braking.

●Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced brak-

ing and smooth acceleration changes.

●Select a gear range suitable to road con-

ditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

●Using cruise control during highway driv-

ing helps maintain a steady speed.

●Cruise control is particularly effective in

providing fuel savings when driving on flat

terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

●Utilize a map or navigation system to de-

termine the best route to save time.

7. Avoid Idling

●Shutting off your engine when safe for

stops exceeding 30–60 seconds saves

fuel and reduces emissions.

8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

●Automated passes permit drivers to use

special lanes to maintain cruising speed

through the toll and avoid stopping and

starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

●Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel

economy.

●Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to effec-

tively circulate the engine oil before driv-

ing.

●Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating

temperature more quickly while driving

versus idling.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Starting and driving 5-61

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

●Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever possible.

●When entering a hot vehicle, opening the

windows will help to reduce the inside

temperature faster, resulting in reduced

demand on your A/C system.

●Keep your engine tuned up.

●Follow the recommended scheduled main-

tenance.

●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-

sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

●Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-

proper alignment increases tire wear and

lowers fuel economy.

●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

4X4–I SYSTEM OPERATION

WARNING

●Do not drive beyond the performance

capability of the tires. Accelerating

quickly, sharp steering maneuvers or

sudden braking may cause loss of con-

trol, even with Intelligent 4WD engaged.

●For 4WD equipped vehicles, do not at-

tempt to raise two wheels off the

ground and shift the transmission to

any drive or reverse position with the

engine running. Doing so may result in

drivetrain damage or unexpected ve-

hicle movement which could result in

serious personal injury or vehicle

damage.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY INTELLIGENT 4WD (if so equipped)

5-62 Starting and driving

●Do not attempt to test a 4WD equipped

vehicle on a 2-wheel dynamometer

(such as the dynamometers used by

some states for emissions testing) or

similar equipment even if the other 2

wheels are raised off the ground. Make

sure that you inform the test facility

personnel that your vehicle is equipped

with 4WD before it is placed on a dyna-

mometer. Using the wrong test equip-

ment may result in drivetrain damage or

unexpected vehicle movement which

could result in serious personal injury

or vehicle damage.

CAUTION

●Do not operate the engine on a free

roller when any of the wheels are

raised.

●If you use the free roller, rotate 4 wheels

with the same speed without raising

any wheels.

●If a 4WD warning message is displayed

while driving there may be a malfunc-

tion in the 4WD system. Reduce the

vehicle speed immediately and have

your vehicle checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

as soon as possible.

●If the 4WD high temperature message is

displayed while you are driving, pull off

the road in a safe area, and idle the

engine. The driving mode will change to

2WD to prevent the 4WD system from

malfunctioning. If the warning message

turns off, you can drive again.

●If the incorrect tire size message is dis-

played while you are driving, pull off the

road in a safe area with the engine

idling. Check that all tire sizes are the

same, that the tire pressure is correct

and that the tires are not excessively

worn.

●If a warning message continues to be

displayed after the above operations,

have your vehicle checked as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

4WD shift switch

The 4WD system is used to select the 2WD,

AUTO or LOCK mode depending on the driving

conditions.

Turn the 4WD mode switch, located on the cen-

ter console, to select 2WD, AUTO, or LOCK.

●2WD – Turn the 4WD mode switch to the

2WD position. The 2WD indicator light in

the vehicle information display illuminates.

●AUTO – Turn the 4WD mode switch to the

neutral (AUTO) position. The 4WD AUTO

indicator light in the vehicle information dis-

play illuminates.

LSD2496

Starting and driving 5-63

●LOCK – To engage the LOCK mode, turn

the 4WD mode switch to the LOCK posi-

tion. The switch will return to the AUTO

position automatically and the 4WD LOCK

indicator light in the vehicle information dis-

play illuminates. To disengage the LOCK

mode, turn the switch to the LOCK position

again. The switch will return to the AUTO

position automatically, and the 4WD LOCK

indicator light turns into the AUTO indicator

light. The LOCK mode will automatically be

canceled when the ignition switch is turned

to the OFF position.

4WD mode Wheels driven 4WD mode indicator

light Use conditions

2WD

Front only – This mode

is used when driving on

a normal road *1

2WD For driving on dry paved

roads.

AUTO

Distribution of torque to

the front and rear

wheels changes auto-

matically depending on

road conditions

encountered. This re-

sults in improved driving

stability.

AUTO For driving on paved or

slippery roads.

LOCK 4-Wheel Drive *2 *3 LOCK For driving on rough

roads.

*1 The 2WD mode may change to the 4WD mode automatically depending on the driving conditions.

*2 The LOCK mode will change to the AUTO mode automatically when the vehicle has been driven at

a high speed. The 4WD LOCK indicator light turns into the AUTO indicator light.

*3 The LOCK mode will automatically be canceled when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF

position.

5-64 Starting and driving

4WD shift tips

●If the 4WD mode switch is operated while

making a turn, accelerating or decelerating,

or if the ignition switch is turned off while in

the AUTO or LOCK mode, you may feel a jolt.

This is normal.

●The oil temperature of power train parts will

increase if the vehicle is continuously oper-

ated under conditions where the difference

between the front and rear wheels is large

(wheel slip), such as when driving the ve-

hicle on rough roads through sand or mud or

when freeing a stuck vehicle. In these cases,

the 4WD mode changes to the 2WD mode

to protect the powertrain parts.

●Brake distance in the 4WD mode is the

same as 2WD.

CAUTION

●Depending on the driving condition, the

4WD mode may automatically change

from 2WD to 4WD even when the 2WD

mode is selected. If this occurs while

driving, the 4WD mode indicator light

will not illuminate.

●Do not start the engine with the 4WD

mode switch in any mode in the follow-

ing cases:

– when the vehicle is placed on a fre-

eroller or jacking up the vehicle with

the front tires raised and the rear

tires on the ground.

– when towing the vehicle with the rear

tires raised from the ground.

●Operate the 4WD mode switch only

when driving straight. Do not operate

the 4WD mode switch when making a

turn or backing up.

●Do not operate the 4WD mode switch

with the front wheel spinning.

●Engine idling speed is high while warm-

ing up the engine. Be especially careful

when starting or driving on slippery sur-

faces with the 4WD mode switch set in

the AUTO mode.

4WD mode indicator lights

The 2WD, 4WD AUTO and LOCK mode indica-

tor lights are located in the vehicle information

display.

The 4WD mode indicator lights will display the

mode selected by the 4WD mode switch while

the engine is running.

The 4WD AUTO indicator light illuminates when

selecting the AUTO mode.

The 4WD LOCK indicator light illuminates when

selecting the LOCK mode and the 2WD indicator

light illuminates when selecting the 2WD mode.

Starting and driving 5-65

WARNING

●Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry grass,

waste paper or rags. They may ignite

and cause a fire.

●Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park). Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and re-

sult in an accident. Make sure the shift

lever has been pushed as far forward as

it can go and cannot be moved without

depressing the foot brake pedal.

●Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

●To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave

children, people who require the assis-

tance of others or pets unattended in

your vehicle. Additionally, the tempera-

ture inside a closed vehicle on a warm

day can quickly become high enough to

cause a significant risk of injury or

death to people and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into

traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good

practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and move the

vehicle forward until the curb side wheel

gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb and

move the vehicle back until the curb side

wheel gently touches the curb.

●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the road

so the vehicle will move away from the cen-

ter of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-

tion.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

5-66 Starting and driving

WARNING

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the steering will not work. Steering will

be harder to operate.

●When the power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running,

there will be no power assist for the

steering. You will still have control of

the vehicle, but the steering will be

harder to operate. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

The power steering system is designed to pro-

vide power assist while driving to operate the

steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly

or continuously while parking or driving at a very

low speed, the power assist for the steering

wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent over-

heating of the power steering system and protect

it from getting damaged. While the power assist

is reduced, steering wheel operation will become

heavy. When the temperature of the power steer-

ing system goes down, the power assist level will

return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering

wheel operations that could cause the power

steering system to overheat.

You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is

operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunc-

tion.

If the electric power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may indicate

the power steering system is not functioning

properly and may need servicing. Have the power

steering system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the electric power steering warning light

illuminates with the engine running, there will be

no power assist for the steering, but you will still

have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater

steering effort is required to operate the steering

wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low

speeds.

For additional information, refer to “Power steer-

ing warning light” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

The brake system has two separate hydraulic

circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still

have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using engine

vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the

vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,

greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be

required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-

tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while

driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the

brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the

brakes from overheating, reduce speed and

downshift to a lower gear before going down a

slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may

reduce braking performance and could result in

loss of vehicle control.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-67

WARNING

●While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-

erating could cause the wheels to skid

and result in an accident.

●If the engine is not running or is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work. Braking will be

harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven through

water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your

braking distance will be longer and the vehicle

may pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to

heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return

to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high

speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the

stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened

or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or

drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the

best braking performance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle service

manual. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM

(ABS)

WARNING

●The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it

cannot prevent accidents resulting from

careless or dangerous driving tech-

niques. It can help maintain vehicle con-

trol during braking on slippery surfaces.

Remember that stopping distances on

slippery surfaces will be longer than on

normal surfaces even with ABS. Stop-

ping distances may also be longer on

rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or

if you are using tire chains. Always

maintain a safe distance from the ve-

hicle in front of you. Ultimately, the

driver is responsible for safety.

●Tire type and condition may also affect

braking effectiveness.

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and type

as specified on the Tire and Loading

Information label. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire and loading

information label” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section

of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do

not lock during hard braking or when braking on

slippery surfaces. The system detects the rota-

tion speed at each wheel and varies the brake

fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking

and sliding. By preventing each wheel from lock-

ing, the system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving and spin-

ning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-

press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,

but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-

ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

5-68 Starting and driving

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric

pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that

tests the system each time you start the engine

and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or

reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear

a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a

malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-

tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the

ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The

brake system then operates normally, but without

anti-lock assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during the

self-test or while driving, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The ABS operates at speeds above3-6mph(5

- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road

conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more wheels

are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly ap-

plies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action

is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You

may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a

noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from

the actuator when it is operating. This is normal

and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.

However, the pulsation may indicate that road

conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-

quired while driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal ex-

ceeds a certain level, the brake assist is activated

generating greater braking force than a conven-

tional brake booster even with light pedal force.

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. it is the driv-

ers responsibility to stay alert, drive safely

and be in control of the vehicle at all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor

driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain

driving conditions, the VDC system helps to per-

form the following functions:

●Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel

slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is

transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on

the same axle.

●Controls brake pressure and engine output

to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle

speed (traction control function).

●Controls brake pressure at individual wheels

and engine output to help the driver maintain

control of the vehicle in the following condi-

tions:

– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow

the steered path despite increased steer-

ing input)

– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to

certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to maintain

control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of

vehicle control in all driving situations.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-69

When the VDC system operates, the indi-

cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the

following:

●The road may be slippery or the system may

determine some action is required to help

keep the vehicle on the steered path.

●You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal

and hear a noise or vibration from under the

hood. This is normal and indicates that the

VDC system is working properly.

●Adjust your speed and driving to the road

conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip indicator

light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the

and indicator lights come on in the instru-

ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns

off when these indicator lights are on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC

system. The indicator illuminates to indi-

cate the VDC system is off.

When the VDC switch is used to turn off the

system, the VDC system still operates to prevent

one drive wheel from slipping by transferring

power to a non slipping drive wheel. The

indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC

functions are off and the indicator will not

flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to on

when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start the

engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse

at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you

may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in

the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an

indication of a malfunction.

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-

ing operation at high speeds or by care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be especially

careful when driving and cornering on

slippery surfaces and always drive

carefully.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator may

flash or both the and indica-

tor lights may illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and both the

and the indicator lights may

illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the and

indicator lights may illuminate.

5-70 Starting and driving

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator may flash or

both the and indicator

lights may illuminate. Do not drive on

these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

both the and indicator

lights may illuminate. This is not a mal-

function. Restart the engine after driv-

ing onto a stable surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the indicator may flash or both

the and indicator lights may

illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

RISE-UP AND BUILD-UP

The system gradually adjusts braking power dur-

ing normal braking to help provide an enhanced

brake feel.

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns, the

system optimizes the distribution of force to each

of the four wheels depending on the radius of the

turn.

WARNING

●The VDC system is designed to help the

driver maintain stability but does not

prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-

ing operation at high speeds or by care-

less or dangerous driving techniques.

Reduce vehicle speed and be especially

careful when driving and cornering on

slippery surfaces and always drive

carefully.

●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.

If suspension parts such as shock ab-

sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,

bushings and wheels are not NISSAN

recommended for your vehicle or are

extremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly. This could

adversely affect vehicle handling per-

formance, and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

●If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, the VDC system may not

operate properly and both the

and indicator light may

illuminate.

●If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are extremely

deteriorated, both the and

the indicator light may illuminate.

Starting and driving 5-71

●When driving on extremely inclined sur-

faces such as higher banked corners,

the VDC system may not operate prop-

erly and the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

Do not drive on these types of roads.

●When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

This is not a malfunction. Restart the

engine after driving onto a stable

surface.

●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN

recommended ones are used, the VDC

system may not operate properly and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illuminate.

●The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill descent

control system to control vehicle speed

when driving on steep downhill grades.

Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the hill descent control sys-

tem and decelerate the vehicle speed by

depressing the brake pedal if neces-

sary. Be especially careful when driving

on frozen, muddy or extremely steep

downhill roads. Failure to control ve-

hicle speed may result in a loss of con-

trol of the vehicle and possible serious

injury or death.

●The hill descent control may not control

the vehicle speed on a hill under all load

or road conditions. Always be prepared

to depress the brake pedal to control

vehicle speed. Failure to do so may re-

sult in a collision or serious personal

injury.

The hill descent control system can only be acti-

vated when the 4WD LOCK switch is engaged.

The hill descent control system helps maintain

vehicle speed when driving under 15 mph

(25 km/h) on steeper downhill grades. Hill de-

scent control is useful when engine braking alone

cannot control vehicle speed. Hill descent con-

trol applies the vehicle brakes to control vehicle

speed allowing the driver to concentrate on

steering while reducing the burden of brake and

accelerator operation.

If the hill descent control light is blinking, the hill

descent control is engaged; however, the hill

descent control will not control the vehicle

speed.

●Once the system is activated, the indicator

light will remain on in the instrument panel.

For additional information, refer to “Hill de-

scent control system on indicator light”in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

If the accelerator or brake pedal is depressed

while the hill descent control system is on, the

system will stop operating temporarily. As soon

as the accelerator or brake pedal is released, the

hill descent control system begins to function

again if the hill descent control operating condi-

tions are fulfilled.

For the best results, when descending steep

downhill grades, the hill descent control switch

should be ON and the shift lever in L (Low gear)

for engine braking.

HILL DESCENT CONTROL SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-72 Starting and driving

WARNING

●Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from mov-

ing backward on a hill. Always drive

carefully and attentively. Depress the

brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped

on a steep hill. Be especially careful

when stopped on a hill on frozen or

muddy roads. Failure to prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling backwards may result

in a loss of control of the vehicle and

possible serious injury or death.

●The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a standstill

on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when

the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.

Failure to do so may cause the vehicle

to roll backwards and may result in a

collision or serious personal injury.

●The hill start assist may not prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill

under all load or road conditions. Al-

ways be prepared to depress the brake

pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards. Failure to do so may result

in a collision or serious personal injury.

The hill start assist system automatically keeps

the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle

from rolling backward in the time it takes the

driver to release the brake pedal and apply the

accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.

Hill start assist will operate automatically under

the following conditions:

●The shift lever is shifted to a forward or

reverse gear.

●The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill

by applying the brake.

The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After

2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and

hill start assist will stop operating completely.

Hill start assist will not operate when the shift

lever is shifted into N (Neutral) or P (Park) or on a

flat and level road.

WARNING

●Always turn and look back before back-

ing up. The RSS is not a substitute for

proper backing procedures.

●Read and understand the limitations of

the rear sonar system as contained in

this section. Inclement weather may af-

fect the function of the RSS; this may

include reduced performance or a false

activation.

●This system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

LSD0095

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM REAR SONAR SYSTEM (RSS) (if so

equipped)

Starting and driving 5-73

●The system is designed as an aid to the

driver in detecting large stationary ob-

jects to help avoid damaging the ve-

hicle. The system will not detect small

objects below the bumper, and may not

detect objects close to the bumper or

on the ground.

●If your vehicle sustains damage to the

rear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-

aligned or bent, the sensing zone may

be altered causing inaccurate measure-

ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of

obstacles near the rear bumper when the shift

lever is in R (Reverse). The system may not

detect objects at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)

and may not detect certain angular or moving

objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 5.9 ft (1.8 m)

from the rear bumper with a decreased coverage

area at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer to

the illustration for approximate zone coverage

areas). As you move closer to the obstacle, the

rate of the tone increases. When the obstacle is

less than 10 in (25.0 cm) away, the tone will

sound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-

ary or receding object further than 10 in.

(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone

will sound for only 3 seconds. Once the system

detects an object approaching, the tone will

sound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the shift

lever is placed in R (Reverse) and the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The RSS can

be turned off in the vehicle information display.

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle infor-

mation display” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual. To turn the RSS off, the

ignition switch must be placed in the ON posi-

tion.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bum-

per fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumu-

lations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with sharp

objects). If the sensors are covered, it will affect

the accuracy of the RSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-

icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes

frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key

hole, or use the NISSAN Intelligent Key®.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-

perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the

antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For

additional information, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during extremely

cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may

freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-

mum efficiency, the battery should be checked

regularly. For additional information, refer to “Bat-

tery” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-

freeze, drain the cooling system, including the

engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Changing

engine coolant” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

5-74 Starting and driving

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry pave-

ment. However, the performance of these

tires will be substantially reduced in snowy

and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-

hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-

mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL

SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and

availability information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded

tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit their

use. Check local, state and provincial laws

before installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Tire chains” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items be

carried in the vehicle during winter:

●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove

ice and snow from the windows and wiper

blades.

●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the

jack to give it firm support.

●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

●Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” under

these conditions. Try to avoid driving on

wet ice until the road is salted or

sanded.

●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-

tion. Accelerate and slow down with

care. If accelerating or downshifting too

fast, the drive wheels will lose even

more traction.

●Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

●Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of

ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-

ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,

and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

●Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist with cold

temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used when

the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C) or lower.

Starting and driving 5-75

WARNING

●Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system or

a 2-pronged adapter. You can be seri-

ously injured by an electrical shock if

you use an ungrounded connection.

●Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-

tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug

the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded

110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the

proper extension cord or a grounded

outlet can result in a fire or electrical

shock and cause serious personal

injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block

heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a

grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension

cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault

Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-

volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be plugged in

for at least2-4hours, depending on outside

temperatures, to properly warm the engine

coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the

engine block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-

erly store the cord to keep it away from

moving parts.

5-76 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ......................6-2

Emergency engine shut off .........................6-2

Flat tire ...........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........6-3

Changing a flat tire .............................6-3

Jump starting .....................................6-9

Push starting.....................................6-11

If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-11

Towing your vehicle ...............................6-12

Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-13

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle).........6-14

Push the switch on to warn other drivers when

you must stop or park under emergency condi-

tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to

move the vehicle well off the road.

●Do not use the hazard warning flashers

while moving on the highway unless

unusual circumstances force you to

drive so slowly that your vehicle might

become a hazard to other traffic.

●Turn signals do not work when the haz-

ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switch

placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of

the hazard warning flasher switch while

driving.

To shut off the engine in an emergency situation

while driving, perform the following procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch

three consecutive times in less than 1.5 sec-

onds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch

for more than 2 seconds.

LCE2166

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER

SWITCH

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

6-2 In case of emergency

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It monitors

tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When

the low tire pressure warning light is lit, and the

“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning appears in

the vehicle information display, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pressure of

all tires (except the spare tire) on the display

screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is being

driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-

vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure

warning light. This system will activate only when

the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). For additional information, refer to

“Warning lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in “Instruments and controls” section

and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” sections of

this manual.

WARNING

●Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those who

use a pacemaker should contact the

electric medical equipment manufac-

turer for the possible influences before

use.

●If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sudden

steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,

reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road

to a safe location and stop the vehicle

as soon as possible. Driving with under-

inflated tires may permanently damage

the tires and increase the likelihood of

tire failure. Serious vehicle damage

could occur and may lead to an accident

and could result in serious personal in-

jury. Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion label to turn the low tire pressure

warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with a spare tire as soon as

possible.

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pressure

sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-

low:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking

brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to

signal professional road assistance person-

nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle

and stand in a safe place, away from traffic

and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

●Make sure the parking brake is securely

applied and the CVT is shifted into P

(Park).

●Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is

close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-

sional road assistance.

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and back

of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to

prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked

up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and tools

1. Open the liftgate and lift the luggage board

in the cargo area using the handle 䊊

LCE2142 LCE2035

6-4 In case of emergency

2. Remove the jack and tool kit cover by lifting

up using the handles.

3. Remove the tool kit 䊊

●To release the tool kit, release the hook

and eye straps 䊊

4. Remove the jack.

●The jack is secured by a fastener 䊊

D.To

release the fastener, assemble the exten-

sion 䊊

Einto the wheel nut wrench 䊊

Fas

illustrated and rotate counterclockwise to

release.

●Insert the flat end of the wheel nut wrench

䊊

Finto the slot of the fastener 䊊

D, and

rotate counterclockwise to release the

jack.

5. The lowering mechanism for the spare tire is

located on the passenger side of the cargo

area. Remove the cover 䊊

Gto access the

spare tire winch.

LCE2036 LCE2037 LCE2038

In case of emergency 6-5

6. Insert the spare tire winch socket 䊊

Hto the

lowering mechanism nut.

7. To lower the spare tire, insert the wheel nut

wrench 䊊

Fto the extension 䊊

Eand insert

the T-shaped end to the winch socket 䊊

and rotate counterclockwise.

8. After removing the spare tire from under the

vehicle, be sure to crank the cable up to

stow it.

NOTE:

Fully lower the spare tire below the vehicle

before attempting to remove the winch

from the spare tire.

9. Securely store the flat tire, tools and jacking

equipment in the vehicle.

CAUTION

●Make sure safety cable is coiled above

spare tire when reinstalling spare

tire/wheel.

●When re-installing the spare tire under

the vehicle after use, be sure to secure it

with the tire stem facing down toward

the ground. If the spare tire is improp-

erly secured with the tire stem facing up

towards the bottom of the vehicle, there

is an increased risk of separating from

the vehicle in the event of a crash which

may pose a hazard in traffic or risk of

injury to others.

Jacking up vehicle and removing the

damaged tire

WARNING

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

●Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the

jack provided with your vehicle on other

vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting

only your vehicle during a tire change.

●Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for jack

support.

●Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

●Never use blocks on or under the jack.

●

Do not start or run the engine while ve-

hicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true for

vehicles with limited slip differentials.

●Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off

the ground. It may cause the vehicle to

move.

LCE2169

6-6 In case of emergency

Always refer to the illustration for the correct

placement and jack-up points for your specific

vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached to

the jack body and the following instruc-

tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by

turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut

wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts

until the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up

point as illustrated so the top of the jack

contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. The

jack-up points are indicated by stamped ar-

rows on the side of the frame.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

LCE2048

In case of emergency 6-7

3. Install the assembled jack rod into the jack

as shown.

4. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever

and rod. Carefully raise the vehicle until the

tire clears the ground.

NOTE:

If the lug nut wrench/jack handle contacts

the ground while raising the vehicle, disas-

semble the lug nut wrench from the jack

extension rod, rotate it 90 degrees and re-

assemble.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and then remove the

tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-

tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten

the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel

nuts alternately and evenly in the sequence

illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D,䊊

E) until they are

tight.

LCE0087

LCE2043 WCE0056

6-8 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the wheel

nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely

in the sequence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

䊊

E). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts

to become loose.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-

hicle has been driven for 621 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts

to the specified torque with a torque

wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to

specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire

and loading information label affixed to the

driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire, tools and jacking

equipment in the vehicle.

6. Close the liftgate.

WARNING

●Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly se-

cured after use. Such items can become

dangerous projectiles in an accident or

sudden stop.

●The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, the

instructions and precautions below must be fol-

lowed.

WARNING

●If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting in

severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

●Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-

ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all

sparks and flames away from the

battery.

●Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-

rosive sulfuric acid solution which can

cause severe burns. If the fluid should

come into contact with anything, imme-

diately flush the contacted area with

water.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

JUMP STARTING

In case of emergency 6-9

●Whenever working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protectors (for

example, goggles or industrial safety

spectacles) and remove rings, metal

bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean

over the battery when jump starting.

●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause se-

rious injury.

●Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below. Fail-

ure to do so could result in damage to the

charging system and cause personal

injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,

position the two vehicles to bring their bat-

teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever

to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary elec-

trical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,

etc.).

3. Ensure the vent caps are level and tight.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the sequence

illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive

(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for

example, strut mounting bolt, engine

lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

●Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine com-

partment and that the cable clamps do

not contact any other metal.

LCE2223

6-10 In case of emergency

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and

let it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-

hicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the en-

gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged for

more than 10 seconds. If the engine does

not start right away, place the ignition

switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to

4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-

nect the negative cable and then the positive

cable.

CAUTION

●CVT models cannot be push-started or

tow-started. Attempting to do so may

cause transmission damage.

●Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

WARNING

●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause engine

damage or a vehicle fire.

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap while the engine is still

hot. When the radiator or coolant reser-

voir cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

●Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an

extremely high temperature gauge reading and

the illumination of the engine oil pressure/engine

coolant temperature high indicator light), or if you

feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal

noise, etc. take the following steps:

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply

the parking brake and move the shift lever to

P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air conditioner

temperature control to maximum hot and fan

control to high speed.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

In case of emergency 6-11

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for

steam or coolant escaping from the radiator

before opening the hood. If steam or coolant

is escaping, turn off the engine. Do not open

the hood further until no steam or coolant

can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-

gine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage or

looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is

running. The radiator hoses and radiator

should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,

the water pump belt is missing or loose, or

the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-

gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or the

engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan

can start at any time.

6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-

ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank

with the engine running. Add coolant to the

engine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.

Have your vehicle repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When towing your vehicle, all jurisdictional and

local regulations for towing must be followed.

Incorrect towing equipment could damage your

vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a

NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are gen-

erally familiar with the applicable laws and proce-

dures for towing. To assure proper towing and to

prevent accidental damage to your vehicle,

NISSAN recommends having a service operator

tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the ser-

vice operator carefully read the following precau-

tions:

WARNING

●Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

●Never get under your vehicle after it has

been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

●When towing, make sure that the trans-

mission, axles, steering system and

powertrain are in working condition. If

any of these conditions apply, dollies or

a flatbed tow truck must be used.

●Always attach safety chains before

towing.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

6-12 In case of emergency

For additional information about towing your ve-

hicle behind a Recreational Vehicle (RV), refer to

“Flat towing for 4–Wheel drive vehicle” or “Flat

towing for front wheel drive vehicle” in the “Tech-

nical and consumer information” section of this

manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based

upon the type of drivetrain. Please refer to the

diagrams in this section to ensure that your ve-

hicle is properly towed.

Four-wheel drive models

NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be

used when towing your vehicle or place the ve-

hicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

Never tow 4WD models with any of the

wheels on the ground as this may cause

serious and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

LCE2237

In case of emergency 6-13

Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) models

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed

with the driving wheels (front) off the ground or

place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

WARNING

●Never tow your vehicle with the front

wheels on the ground or four wheels on

the ground (forward or backward), as

this may cause serious and expensive

damage to the transmission. If it is nec-

essary to tow the vehicle with the rear

wheels raised always use towing dollies

under the front wheels.

●When towing with the rear wheels on

the ground or on towing dollies, place

the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, and secure the steering wheel

in the straight-ahead position with a

rope or similar device.

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck

vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal

injury or death when recovering a stuck

vehicle:

●

Contact a professional towing service to

recover the vehicle if you have any ques-

tions regarding the recovery procedure.

●Tow chains or cables must be attached

only to main structural members of the

vehicle.

●Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow

or free a stuck vehicle.

●Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

●Always pull the recovery device straight

out from the front of the vehicle. Never

pull at an angle.

●Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except the

attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use

a tow strap or other device designed specifically

for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions for the recovery device.

LCE2041

6-14 In case of emergency

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

●Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,

use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)

system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind the

vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear

an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-

ward.

●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)

and D (Drive).

●Apply the accelerator as little as possible

to maintain the rocking motion.

●Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few

tries, contact a professional towing service

to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2

Washing ......................................7-2

Waxing........................................7-2

Removing spots ................................7-3

Underbody ....................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels ..........................7-3

Chrome parts ..................................7-3

Tire dressings ..................................7-3

Cleaning interior...................................7-4

Air fresheners ..................................7-4

Power Moonroof (if so equipped).................7-4

Floor mats . . ...................................7-5

Seat belts .....................................7-6

Cleaning the seat tracks.........................7-6

Corrosion protection ...............................7-7

Most common factors contributing to vehicle

corrosion ......................................7-7

Environmental factors influence the rate of

corrosion ......................................7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion...............7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-

hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage

from acid rain

●after driving on coastal roads

●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-

pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get

on the paint surface

●when dust or mud builds up on the surface

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle

inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in a

shady area or protect the vehicle with a body

cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surface

when putting on or removing the body

cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of

water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild

soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose

dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm

(never hot) water.

CAUTION

●Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, espe-

cially brushless ones, use some acid for

cleaning. The acid may react with some

plastic vehicle components, causing

them to crack. This could affect their

appearance, and also could cause them

not to function properly. Always check

with your car wash to confirm that acid

is not used.

●Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical deter-

gents, gasoline or solvents.

●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot, as

the surface may become water-spotted.

●Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean

water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors,

hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to

the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas

must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the

drain holes in the lower edge of the door are

open. Spray water under the body and in the

wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away

road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to

avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface and

helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is

recommended to remove built-up wax residue

and to avoid a weathered appearance before

re-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the

proper product.

●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-

ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the

wax.

●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,

cutting compounds or cleaners that may

damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishing

on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the

finish or leave swirl marks.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,

and tree sap as quickly as possible from the

surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or

staining. Special cleaning products are available

at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory

store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is

necessary to clean the underbody regularly in

order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and

causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-

derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-

riod and again in the spring, the underseal must

be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film

from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to

become coated with a film after the vehicle is

parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft

cloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,

do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive

cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant

cleaners. They could damage the electrical

conductors, radio antenna elements or

rear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-

ened in a mild soap solution, especially during

winter months in areas where road salt is used. If

not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as am-

bient temperature.

●Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after the

cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-

abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire

dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to

the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-

ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may

react with the coating and form a compound. This

compound may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-

ing on the tire dissolves more easily than

with an oil-based tire dressing.

●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to

remove).

●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-

pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.

Appearance and care 7-3

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior

trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum

cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and

leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-

ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order to

maintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-

facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-

tectors contain chemicals that may stain or

bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean

the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can dam-

age the seat or occupant classification

sensor. This can also affect the operation

of the air bag system and result in serious

personal injury.

CAUTION

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar material.

●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and

damaging to leather surfaces and

should be removed promptly. Do not

use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,

oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents or ammonia-based cleaners as

they may damage the leather’s natural

finish.

●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-

ommended by the manufacturer.

●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-

age the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect

the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,

take the following precautions:

●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-

manent discoloration when they contact ve-

hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-

ener in a location that allows it to hang free

and not contact an interior surface.

●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on

the vents. These products can cause imme-

diate damage and discoloration when

spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions before using the air fresheners.

POWER MOONROOF (if so

equipped)

The sunshade is made from a suede material.

CAUTION

To help prevent damaging the moonroof

while cleaning:

●Do not rub the material with a cloth.

Doing so can damage the surface of the

material or cause a stain to spread.

●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-

lar chemical to clean the suede. This

may discolor the moonroof and damage

the surface.

●Clean water based stains by patting the

surface with a clean soft cloth damp-

ened in warm water. Press a clean dry

cloth onto the surface to remove as

much dampness as possible and then

let air dry.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

●Clean oil based stains by patting the

surface with a clean soft cloth damp-

ened in warm water. Press a clean dry

cloth onto the surface to remove as

much dampness as possible and then

let air dry.

FLOOR MATS

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference that

may result in a collision, injury or death:

●NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front posi-

tion or install them upside down or

backwards.

●Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or

equivalent floor mats, that are specifi-

cally designed for use in your vehicle

model and model year.

●Properly position the mats in the floor-

well using the floor mat positioning

hook. For additional information, refer

to ⴖFloor mat installationⴖin this

section.

●Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation.

●Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

●After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure they

are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it

easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-

tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they

become excessively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat position-

ing hook(s). The number and shape of the floor

mat positioning hooks for each seating position

varies depending on the vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats fol-

low the installation instructions provided with the

mat and the following:

LAI2002

Appearance and care 7-5

1. Position the floor mat in the floorwell so that

the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with

the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s)

and ensure that the floor mat is properly

positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere

with pedal operation. With the ignition in the

OFF position, the selector lever in the P

(Park) position (Automatic Transmission

models) or the shift lever in the N (Neutral)

position (Manual Transmission models) fully

apply and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal operation or

prevent the pedal from returning to its nor-

mal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for details about installing the floor mats in your

vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the floor mat

positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them

with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.

Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade

before using them. For additional information,

refer to “Seat belt maintenance” in the “Safety-

–Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint

system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the

retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,

since these materials may severely

weaken the seat belt webbing.

CLEANING THE SEAT TRACKS

CAUTION

Periodically clean the seat tracks to pre-

vent reduction of ability to move the seats.

Clean periodically with a high-powered vacuum

cleaner. Dirt and debris may reduce the ability to

adjust the seat. A wet cleansing agent may be

used if necessary.

Positioning hooks

LAI2003

7-6 Appearance and care

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

●the accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt

and debris in body panel sections, cavities,

and other areas

●damage to paint and other protective coat-

ings caused by gravel and stone chips or

minor traffic collisions

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-

hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.

Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside

the vehicle and should be removed for drying to

avoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high

relative humidity, especially those areas where

the temperatures stay above freezing and where

atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is

used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-

sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air

in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-

ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-

erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the

vehicle clean.

●Always check for minor damage to the paint

and repair it as soon as possible.

●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors

open to avoid water accumulation.

●Check the underbody for accumulation of

sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water

as soon as possible.

CAUTION

●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compartment

by washing it out with a hose. Remove

dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

●Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are

extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion

and deterioration of underbody components

such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,

brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleaned

periodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-

sion, which may be required in some areas, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

MEMO

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions ...........................8-2

Engine compartment check locations ................8-3

Engine cooling system .............................8-4

Checking engine coolant level ...................8-5

Changing engine coolant ........................8-5

Engine oil.........................................8-6

Checking engine oil level ........................8-6

Changing engine oil ............................8-7

Changing engine oil filter ........................8-8

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid .......8-9

Power steering fluid................................8-9

Brake fluid .......................................8-10

Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-11

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-11

Battery ..........................................8-11

Jump starting .................................8-13

Drive belt ........................................8-13

Spark plugs......................................8-14

Replacing spark plugs .........................8-14

Air cleaner .......................................8-15

In-cabin microfilter.............................8-15

Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-16

Cleaning .....................................8-16

Replacing ....................................8-16

Brakes ..........................................8-17

Fuses ...........................................8-18

Engine compartment...........................8-18

Passenger compartment .......................8-19

Battery replacement ..............................8-20

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......................8-21

Lights ...........................................8-22

Headlights....................................8-22

Fog lights (if so equipped) ......................8-22

Exterior and interior lights.......................8-23

Wheels and tires .................................8-25

Tire pressure..................................8-25

Tire labeling...................................8-28

Types of tires..................................8-31

Tire chains....................................8-32

Changing wheels and tires .....................8-32

When performing any inspection or maintenance

work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent

serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to

the vehicle. The following are general precau-

tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the vehicle

from moving. Move the shift lever to P

(Park).

●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF

or LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

●If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans, belts

and any other moving parts.

●It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jewelry,

such as rings, watches, etc. before

working on your vehicle.

●Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

●

Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come on

at any time without warning, even if the

ignition switch is in the OFF position and

the engine is not running. To avoid injury,

always disconnect the negative battery

cable before working near the fan.

●If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

●Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, support

it with safety stands.

●Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

●Because the fuel lines on gasoline en-

gine models are under high pressure

even when the engine is off, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.

CAUTION

●Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

●Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

●Never leave the engine or Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT) related

component harnesses disconnected

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

●Never connect or disconnect the battery

or any transistorized component while

the ignition switch is in the ON position.

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instructions

regarding only those items which are relatively

easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-

able. For additional information, refer to “Owner’s

Manual/Service Manual order information” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improper

servicing may result in operating difficulties or

excessive emissions, and could affect warranty

coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it

is recommended that you have it done by a

NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

VQ35DD engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3. Drive belt location

4. Fuse box

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8. Fuse box

9. Fuse/Fusible link box

10. Fuse/Fusible link box

11. Battery

12. Engine oil dipstick

13. Radiator cap

14. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

LDI3012

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

The engine cooling system is filled at the factory

with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and

50% water to provide year-round antifreeze and

coolant protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Additional en-

gine cooling system additives are not necessary.

WARNING

●Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional information

on precautions, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

●The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

●Never use any cooling system additives

such as radiator sealer. Additives may

clog the cooling system and cause dam-

age to the engine, transmission and/or

cooling system.

●When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted

to provide antifreeze protection to -34°

F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection

is needed due to weather where you

operate your vehicle, add Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) concentrate following the direc-

tions on the container. If an equivalent

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is

used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s

instructions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solutions

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent

may damage the engine cooling

system.

●The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or

7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-

ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-

ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer to

the ⴖMaintenance and schedulesⴖsec-

tion of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

8-4 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir when

the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below

the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant to the MAX level

䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant

level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If

there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the

radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of

the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles

(168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant or the use of non-distilled water will re-

duce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant.

For additional information, refer to the ⬙Mainte-

nance and schedules⬙section of this manual..

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

For additional information on the location of the

engine coolant reservoir, refer to “Engine com-

partment check locations” in this section.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.

The service procedure can be found in the

NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine overheat-

ing.

WARNING

●To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the en-

gine is hot.

●Never remove the radiator or engine

coolant reservoir cap when the engine

is hot. Serious burns could be caused by

high pressure fluid escaping from the

radiator.

●Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.

Check your local regulations.

LDI2860

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back into

the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-

insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil

level. It should be between the H (High) and

L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the normal oper-

ating oil level range. If the oil level is below

the L (Low) mark 䊊

A, remove the oil filler cap

and pour recommended oil through the

opening. Do not fill oil level above H

(High) mark 䊊

6. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the severity

of operating conditions.

CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-

erating the engine with an insufficient

amount of oil can damage the engine, and

such damage is not covered by warranty.

LDI3014 WDI0214

ENGINE OIL

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches

operating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug

䊊

5. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Bwith a wrench by

turning it counterclockwise and completely

drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and

replace it at this time. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine oil filter” in

this section.

●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

●Check your local regulations.

WARNING

●Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin cancer.

●Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as

soon as possible.

●Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new

washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with

a wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

34 N·m (25 ft-lb)

7. Refill engine with recommended oil through

the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler

cap securely.

For additional information on drain and refill

capacity, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends on the

oil temperature and drain time. Use these

specifications for reference only. Always use

the dipstick to determine when the proper

amount of oil is in the engine.

LDI3013

Do-it-yourself 8-7

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around

the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-

quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊

4. Remove pins 䊊

Afrom the right engine pro-

tector located inside right wheel well, re-

move protector. Remove oil filter 䊊

Bwith an

oil filter wrench by turning it counterclock-

wise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it

by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine

oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with

a clean rag.

CAUTION

●Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the sealing

surface of the engine. Failure to do

so could lead to an oil leak and en-

gine damage.

●The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from the

dipstick hole when filling the engine

with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean

engine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance

is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

LDI2938

8-8 Do-it-yourself

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine

oil if necessary.

CAUTION

●NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)

ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with

other fluids.

●Do not use Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) or Manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage

the CVT. Damage caused by the use of

fluids other than as recommended is

not covered under NISSAN’s New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

●Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under NISSAN’s

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is

required, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked when the fluid

is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to 86ºF (0 to

30ºC). The fluid level can be checked with the

level gauge which is attached to the cap. To

check the fluid level, remove the cap. The fluid

level should be between the MAX 䊊

Aand MIN 䊊

lines.

If the fluid is below the MIN 䊊

Bline, add Genuine

NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Remove the cap

and fill through the opening.

LDI2861

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-9

WARNING

Power steering fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in marked con-

tainers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

●DO NOT OVERFILL.

●Use of a power steering fluid other than

Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent

will prevent the power steering system

from operating properly.

WARNING

●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can damage

the brake system and affect the vehi-

cle’s stopping ability.

●Clean the filler cap before removing.

●Brake fluid is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is

spilled, immediately wash the surface with

water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the brake

fluid is below the MIN line 䊊

B, the brake warning

light will illuminate. Add brake fluid up to the MAX

line 䊊

A. For additional information on brake fluid

type, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the

brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

LDI2147

BRAKE FLUID

8-10 Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-

cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the

“Low Washer Fluid” warning appears in the ve-

hicle information display.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift

the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-

washer fluid into the reservoir opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for better

cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-

washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-

structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving

conditions require an increased amount of

windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-

shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze

or equivalent.

CAUTION

●Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the paint.

●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl al-

cohol based washer fluid concentrates

may permanently stain the grille if

spilled while filling the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir.

●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with

water to the manufacturer’s recom-

mended levels before pouring the fluid

into the windshield-washer fluid reser-

voir. Do not use the windshield-washer

fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid

concentrate and water.

●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Clean the battery with a solution of baking

soda and water.

●Make certain the terminal connections are

clean and securely tightened.

●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or

longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery

terminal cable to prevent discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of electronic

accessories that consume battery power

when the engine is not running (Phone char-

gers, GPS, DVD players, etc).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only

driven short distances. In these cases, the

battery may need to be charged to maintain

battery health.

LDI2583

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID BATTERY

Do-it-yourself 8-11

WARNING

●Do not expose the battery to flames, an

electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen

gas generated by the battery is explo-

sive. Explosive gases can cause blind-

ness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid

to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or

painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can

cause blindness or injury. After touch-

ing a battery or battery cap, do not

touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly

wash your hands. If the acid contacts

your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately

flush with water for at least 15 minutes

and seek medical attention.

●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in

the battery is low. Low battery fluid can

cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce battery

life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

●When working on or near a battery, al-

ways wear suitable eye protection and

remove all jewelry.

●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

●Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as

shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery

case.

WDI0224

8-12 Do-it-yourself

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only distilled

water to bring the level up to the bottom of

the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall

the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump start-

ing” in the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual. If the engine does not start by jump

starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

1. Crankshaft pulley

2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pulley

3. Generator pulley

4. Air conditioner compressor pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF or LOCK position before servicing

drive belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

LDI0302

VQ35DD engine

LDI2131

DRIVE BELT

Do-it-yourself 8-13

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual

wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is

in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced

or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-

tion and tension in accordance with the

maintenance schedule found in the ⬙Mainte-

nance and schedules⬙section of this

manual.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-tipped 䊊

spark plugs as frequently as conventional type

spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-

low the maintenance log shown in the ⬙Mainte-

nance and schedules⬙section of this manual. Do

not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by clean-

ing or regapping.

●Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch are

off and that the parking brake is engaged

securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket

can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

8-14 Do-it-yourself

WARNING

●Operating the engine with the air

cleaner filter off can cause you or others

to be burned. The air cleaner filter not

only cleans the intake air, it also stops

the flame if the engine backfires. If the

air cleaner is not installed and the en-

gine backfires, you could be burned.

Never drive with the air cleaner filter off.

Be cautious working on the engine

when the air cleaner is off.

●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or

attempt to start the engine with the air

cleaner removed. Doing so could result

in serious injury.

To remove the filter from the air cleaner, push the

tabs 䊊

Aand pull the cover upward.

The viscous paper type filter element should not

be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter

according to the maintenance log shown in the

⬙Maintenance and schedules⬙section of this

manual.

When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of

the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp

cloth.

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner, make

sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the

housing and latch the clips 䊊

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-

borne dust and pollen particles and reduces

some objectionable outside odors. The filter is

located behind the glove box. For additional in-

formation, refer to the ⬙Maintenance and sched-

ules⬙section of this manual for change intervals.

If replacement is required, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI3015

AIR CLEANER

Do-it-yourself 8-15

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using the

windshield-washer or if a wiper blade chatters

when running, wax or other material may be on

the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer

solution or a mild detergent. Your windshield is

clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear

water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked

in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Then

rinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-

shield is still not clear after cleaning the blades

and using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-

age the windshield and impair driver

vision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow

the procedure below:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

2. Push the release tab 䊊

3. Move the wiper blade 䊊

Adown and remove.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

5. Push wiper on to windshield.

CAUTION

●After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when the

hood is opened.

●Make sure the wiper blades contact the

glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-

aged from wind pressure.

LDI2757

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

8-16 Do-it-yourself

If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not

to let wax get into the washer nozzle 䊊

D. This may

cause clogging or improper windshield-washer

operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it

with a needle or small pin 䊊

Rear window wiper blade

If checking or replacement is required, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

If the brakes do not operate properly, it is recom-

mended that you have the brakes checked by a

NISSAN dealer.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust

every time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to nor-

mal. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible

wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-

placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-

ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in

motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the

brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes

checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

LDI2710

BRAKES

Do-it-yourself 8-17

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-

sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may

be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to

moderate stops is normal and does not affect the

function or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information regard-

ing brake inspections, refer to the appropriate

maintenance schedule information in the ⬙Main-

tenance and schedules⬙section of this manual.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amper-

age rating than that specified on the fuse

box cover. This could damage the electri-

cal system or electronic control units or

cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the

tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The

fuse puller is located in the fuse block in the

passenger compartment.

LDI2464

FUSES

8-18 Do-it-yourself

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with a new

fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not operate and

fuses are in good condition, check the fusible

links. If any of these fusible links are melted,

replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower amper-

age rating than that specified on the fuse

box cover. This could damage the electri-

cal system or electronic control units or

cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,

check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight

switch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

LDI0456 LDI2092

Do-it-yourself 8-19

4. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

5. Reverse step 2 to reinstall the box cover.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical

system checked and repaired. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swallow

the battery or removed parts.

LDI0456

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-20 Do-it-yourself

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-

gent Key.

2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver 䊊

Ainto

the slit 䊊

Bof the corner and twist it to sepa-

rate the upper part from the lower part. Place

a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the

casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-

lent.

●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-

tric terminals as doing so could cause a

malfunction.

●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding

the battery across the contact points will

seriously deplete the storage capacity.

●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-

tom of the lower part.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with 䊊

and 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.

If you need assistance with replacement, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device may

not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

LDI2637

Do-it-yourself 8-21

Note:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Opera-

tion is subject to the following two condi-

tions: (1) this device may not cause inter-

ference, and (2) this device must accept any

interference, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

HEADLIGHTS

Replacing the halogen headlight bulb

(if so equipped)

If bulb replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

CAUTION

●Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is

necessary, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a long

period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,

etc. entering the headlight body may

affect bulb performance. Remove the

bulb from the headlight assembly just

before a replacement bulb is installed.

●Only touch the base when handling the

bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.

Touching the glass could significantly

affect bulb life and/or headlight

performance.

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lenses of the

exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A

temperature difference between the inside and

the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not

a malfunction. If large drops of water collect

inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for servicing.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

Replacing the fog light bulb

If bulb replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

LIGHTS

8-22 Do-it-yourself

CAUTION

●High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is scratched

or the bulb is dropped.

●When handling the bulb, do not touch

the glass envelope.

●Use the same number and wattage as

originally installed as shown in the

chart.

●Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light

for a long period of time as dust, mois-

ture and smoke may enter the fog light

body and affect the performance of the

fog light.

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

High 65 H9

Low 55 H11

Park/ Daytime running — —

Turn 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

High 65 H9

Low — —

Park/ Daytime running — —

Turn 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Front fog lights (if so equipped) 55 H11

Map light* — —

Footwell light (if so equipped)* 3.4 158

Personal lights* 8 —

Glove box light* — —

Step light (if so equipped)* 3.8 194

Courtesy light* — —

Vanity mirror light (if so equipped)* — —

Cargo light* 8 —

High-mounted stop light* — —

Rear combination light*

Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W

Turn 21 WY21W

Side marker 5 W5W

Backup (reversing)* 16 W16W

License plate light* 5 W5W

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for replacement.

Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.

Do-it-yourself 8-23

1. Headlight assembly

2 Map light

3 Personal light

4. Step light (if so equipped)

5. Fog light (if so equipped)

6. Cargo light

7. High-mounted stop light

8. License plate light

9. Rear combination light

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When

replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp

and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

LDI2886 WDI0263

8-24 Do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of this

manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could aversely effect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should con-

tact the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It

monitors tire pressure of all tires except

the spare. When the low tire pressure

warning light is lit and the Tire Pressure

Low - Add Air warning appears in the

vehicle information display, one or more of

your tires is significantly under-inflated. If

equipped, the system also displays pres-

sure of all tires (except the spare tire) on

the display screen by sending a signal

from a sensor that is installed in each

wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-

tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for

example a flat tire while driving).

For additional information, refer to “Low

tire pressure warning light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section, “Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Flat

tire” in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including the

spare) often and always prior to long dis-

tance trips. The recommended tire pres-

sure specifications are shown on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label

or the Tire and Loading Information label

under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.

The Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire

pressures should be checked regularly

because:

●Most tires naturally lose air over time.

●Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other objects

or if the vehicle strikes a curb while

parking.

The tire pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold. The tires are

considered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate

speeds.

The TPMS with Easy Fill Tire Alert pro-

vides visual and audible signals outside

the vehicle for inflating the tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure. For

additional information, refer to “TPMS

with Easy Fill Tire Alert” in the “Starting

and driving” section of this manual.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-

der inflation, may adversely affect

tire life and vehicle handling.

WHEELS AND TIRES

Do-it-yourself 8-25

WARNING

●Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an accident.

●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight ca-

pacity is indicated on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do

not load your vehicle beyond this

capacity. Overloading your ve-

hicle may result in reduced tire

life, unsafe operating conditions

due to premature tire failure, or

unfavorable handling character-

istics and could also lead to a

serious accident. Loading beyond

the specified capacity may also

result in failure of other vehicle

components.

●Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge

to ensure that the tire pressures

are at the specified level.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-26 Do-it-yourself

Tire and loading information label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum num-

ber of occupants that can be seated

in the vehicle.

䊊

2Original tire size: The size of the tires

originally installed on the vehicle at

the factory.

䊊

3Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to

this pressure when the tires are cold.

Tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or more

hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The

recommended cold tire inflation is set

by the manufacturer to provide the

best balance of tire wear, vehicle

handling, driveability, tire noise, etc.,

up to the vehicle’s GVWR.

䊊

4Tire size - refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

5Spare tire size.

䊊

6Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Vehicle

loading information” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

LDI2737

Do-it-yourself 8-27

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from the

tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarely

onto the valve stem. Do not press too

hard or force the valve stem side-

ways, or air will escape. If the hissing

sound of air escaping from the tire is

heard while checking the pressure,

reposition the gauge to eliminate this

leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge

stem and compare to the specifica-

tion shown on the Tire and Loading

Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too

much air is added, press the core of

the valve stem briefly with the tip of

the gauge stem to release pressure.

Recheck the pressure and add or

release air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,

including the spare.

Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

235/65R18

33 psi, 230 kPa

Front and Rear

Original Tire:

235/55R20

35 psi, 240 kPa

Spare Tire:

T165/90D18 60 psi, 420 kPa

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers to

place standardized information on the

sidewall of all tires. This information iden-

tifies and describes the fundamental

characteristics of the tire and also pro-

vides the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The TIN

can be used to identify the tire in case of a

recall.

LDI0393

Example

WDI0394

8-28 Do-it-yourself

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles (not all

tires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimeters of

the tire from sidewall edge to side-

wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,

known as the aspect ratio, gives the

tire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This number

is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This

number is the tire’s load index. It is a

measurement of how much weight

each tire can support. You may not

find this information on all tires be-

cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not

drive the vehicle faster than the tire

speed rating.

Example

WDI0395

Do-it-yourself 8-29

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a

new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX

XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-

ment Of Transportation”. The symbol

can be placed above, below or to the

left or right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the week

and year the tire was built. For ex-

ample, the numbers 3103 means the

31st week of 2003. If these numbers

are missing then look on the other

sidewall of the tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-

coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-

ers also must indicate the materials in the

tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester

and others.

䊊

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air

pressure that should be put in the tire. Do

not exceed the maximum permissible in-

flation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum load

in kilograms and pounds that can be car-

ried by the tire. When replacing the tires

on the vehicle, always use a tire that has

the same load rating as the factory in-

stalled tire.

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-

ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire has

radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Example

LDI2786

8-30 Do-it-yourself

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that are

defined throughout this section, Intended

Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that

contains a whitewall, bears white lettering

or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-

ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical

tire that has a particular side that must

always face outward when mounted on a

vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

●When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information about

tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

●Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory equipped

tires, and may not match the potential

maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed

the maximum speed rating of the tire.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the low tire pres-

sure warning system.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-

els to provide good performance all year, includ-

ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season

tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S

on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow

traction than All Season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models

to provide superior performance on dry roads.

Summer tire performance is substantially re-

duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have

the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy

conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of

SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four

wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select

tires equivalent in size and load rating to the

original equipment tires. If you do not, it can

adversely affect the safety and handling of your

vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings

than factory equipped tires and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-

ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the same

size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all

four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires

may be used. However, some U.S. states and

Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check

local, state and provincial laws before installing

studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of

studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

Do-it-yourself 8-31

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables should not be installed

on 235/55R20 size tires. Installation of the

tire chains/cables on 235/55R20 size tires

will cause damage to the vehicle. If you

plan to use tire chains/cables, you should

install 235/65R18 size tires on your

vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to

location. Check the local laws before installing

tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure

they are the proper size for the tires on your

vehicle and are installed according to the chain

manufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAE

class “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used on

vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.

Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-

signed to meet the minimum clearances between

the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or

body component required to accommodate the

use of a winter traction device (tire chains or

cables). The minimum clearances are determined

using the factory equipped tire size. Other types

may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners

when recommended by the tire chain manufac-

turer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the

tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage to the

fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully load-

ing your vehicle when using tire chains. In addi-

tion, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your

vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling

and performance may be adversely affected.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with

chains in such conditions can cause damage to

the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to

some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tires

every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire replac-

ing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”in the “In

case of emergency” section of this

manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times. It

is recommended that wheel nuts be

tightened to specification at each

tire rotation interval.

WARNING

●After rotating the tires, check and

adjust the tire pressure.

●Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

●Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

●Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking, bulg-

ing or objects caught in the tread.

If excessive wear, cracks, bulging

or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)

should be replaced.

●The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

●Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be ob-

vious. Replace the tires as neces-

sary to prevent tire failure and

possible personal injury.

●Improper service of the spare tire

may result in serious personal in-

jury. If it is necessary to repair the

spare tire, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

●For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Important

Tire Safety Information” (US) or

“Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WDI0259

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread

design, speed rating and load carrying capacity

as originally equipped. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

WARNING

●The use of tires other than those recom-

mended or the mixed use of tires of

different brands, construction (bias,

bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns

can adversely affect the ride, braking,

handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system, ground clearance, body-

to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,

speedometer calibration, headlight aim

and bumper height. Some of these ef-

fects may lead to accidents and could

result in serious personal injury.

●If your vehicle was originally equipped

with 4 tires that were the same size and

you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires,

install the new tires on the rear axle.

Placing new tires on the front axle may

cause loss of vehicle control in some

driving conditions and cause an acci-

dent and personal injury.

●If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels which

have the same off-set dimension.

Wheels of a different off-set could

cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-

hicle handling characteristics, affect the

VDC system and/or interference with

the brake discs. Such interference can

lead to decreased braking efficiency

and/or early brake pad wear. For addi-

tional information on wheel off-set di-

mensions, refer to “Wheels and tires” in

the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

●Since the spare tire is not equipped with

the TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted

or a wheel is replaced, tire pressure will

not be indicated, the TPMS will not

function and the low tire pressure warn-

ing light will flash for approximately

1 minute. The light will remain on after

1 minute. Have your tires replaced

and/or TPMS system reset as soon as

possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

●Replacing tires with those not originally

specified by NISSAN could affect the

proper operation of the TPMS.

●The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it

is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

●When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for ID registration.

●Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

●Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may

be clogged up with dirt and cause a

malfunction or loss of pressure.

●Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could have

structural damage and could fail with-

out warning.

●The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-

formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-

tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet.

8-34 Do-it-yourself

Four-wheel drive models

CAUTION

Always use tires of the same type, size,

brand, construction (bias, bias-belted or

radial), and tread pattern on all four

wheels. Failure to do so may result in a

circumference difference between tires on

the front and rear axles which will cause

excessive tire wear and may damage the

transmission, transfer case and differen-

tial gears.

If excessive tire wear is found, it is recommended

that all four tires be replaced with tires of the

same size, brand, construction and tread pattern.

The tire pressure and wheel alignment should

also be checked and corrected as necessary. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling

and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get

out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-

anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

●For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Care of wheels

●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle

to maintain their appearance.

●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the

wheel is changed or the underside of the

vehicle is washed.

●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing

the wheels.

●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or

corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of

pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

●NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in areas

where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire)

Since the spare tire is not equipped with the

TPMS, when a spare tire is mounted (TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY or conventional), the TPMS

will not function.

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-

PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.

Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or

involved in an accident:

WARNING

●The spare tire should be used for emer-

gency use only. It should be replaced

with the standard tire at the first oppor-

tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-

tial damage.

●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

●Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle at

speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).

●When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels).

Do-it-yourself 8-35

●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate

than the standard tire. Replace the

spare tire as soon as the tread wear

indicators appear.

●Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

●Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause dam-

age to the vehicle.

●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

8-36 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements..........................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance.........................9-2

Where to go for service .........................9-2

General maintenance ..............................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance items .........9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .........9-5

Emission Control System Maintenance: ...........9-5

Chassis and Body Maintenance: .................9-6

Maintenance schedules ............................9-7

Additional Maintenance Items for severe

operating conditions ............................9-7

Standard maintenance .............................9-8

Emission control system maintenance.............9-8

Chassis & body maintenance ...................9-10

Maintenance under severe operating conditions......9-12

Severe driving conditions.......................9-12

Maintenance log..................................9-13

Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is es-

sential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical

condition, as well as its emissions and engine

performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that

the scheduled maintenance, as well as general

maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who

can ensure that your vehicle receives proper

maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-

nance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items which

should be checked during normal day-to-day op-

eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-

eration. It is your responsibility to perform these

procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requires

minimal mechanical skill and only a few general

automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by

yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a

NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this section are

required to be serviced at regular intervals. How-

ever under severe driving conditions, additional

or more frequent maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your vehicle

appears to malfunction, have the systems

checked and serviced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists

and are kept up-to-date with the latest service

information through technical bulletins, service

tips and training programs. They are completely

qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before

work begins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s

service department can perform the service

needed to meet the maintenance requirements

on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of the

vehicle, general maintenance should be per-

formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If

you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or

smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a

NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, it is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if

you think that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenance

work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-

tions” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

performed from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors

and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure

that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,

latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the

hood from opening when the primary latch is

released.

When driving in areas using road salt or other

corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis.

Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all

operating properly and installed securely. Also

check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking

the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,

and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if

necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often

and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-

sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the

spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully

for damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the TPMS

transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap

when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle

should pull to either side while driving on a

straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or

abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel

alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at

normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires, refer to

“Important Tire Safety Information” (US) or “Tire

Safety Information” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular

basis. Check the windshield at least every six

months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-

aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair

facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks

or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked on a regular basis, such as when per-

forming scheduled maintenance, cleaning the ve-

hicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation and make sure the pedal does not

catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat

away from the pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth op-

eration. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down

further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the

vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your

vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the

vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly

steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely

with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without

applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake opera-

tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held

on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake

applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Seats: Check seat position controls such as

seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure

they operate smoothly and all latches lock se-

curely in every position. Check that the head

restraints/headrests move up and down

smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold

securely in all latched positions.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt

system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters

and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,

and are installed securely. Check the belt web-

bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free play,

hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in

sufficient quantity when operating the heater or

air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that

the wipers and washer operate properly and that

the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should be

checked periodically (for example, each time you

check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery*: Check the fluid level in each cell. The

fluid should be at the bottom of the filler opening.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under

severe conditions require frequent checks of the

battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery discharge

and potential no-start conditions such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not run-

ning (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to be

charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines on

the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level

when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive belts

are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking

the vehicle on a level spot and turning off the

engine. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to

drain back into the oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose

supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the

exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of

exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust

system inspected. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon

monoxide)”in the “Starting and driving”section of

this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,

water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. Water dripping from the

air conditioner after use is normal. If you should

notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident,

check for the cause and have it corrected imme-

diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines: Check

the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine

off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,

cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,

etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the

hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose

connections.

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

Underbody: The underbody is frequently ex-

posed to corrosive substances such as those

used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very

important to remove these substances, other-

wise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel

lines and around the exhaust system. At the end

of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly

flushed with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accumulate.

For additional information, refer to the “Appear-

ance and care” section of this manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is

adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to give

you a better understanding of the scheduled

maintenance items that should be regularly

checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule

indicates at which mileage/time intervals each

item requires service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance, your ve-

hicle requires that some items be checked during

normal day-to-day operation. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “General maintenance” in this

section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended by

NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are

not required to perform maintenance on these

items in order to maintain the warranties which

come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance

items and intervals are required.

When applicable, additional information can be

found in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-

OEM approved aftermarket flushing sys-

tems and strongly advises against perform-

ing these services on a NISSAN product.

Many of the aftermarket flushing systems

use non-OEM approved chemicals or sol-

vents, the use of which has not been vali-

dated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive belts*:

Check engine drive belts for wear, fraying or

cracking and for proper tension. Replace any

damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving for

prolonged periods in dusty conditions,

check/replace the filter more frequently.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*:

Replace coolant at the specified interval. When

adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only

Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant

(blue) or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mixture for

your area, refer to “Engine cooling system” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or

the use of non-distilled water may reduce

the recommended service interval of the

coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter:

Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified

intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscos-

ity refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

Engine valve clearance*:

Inspect only if valve noise increase. Adjust valve

clearance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor lines*:

Check vapor lines for leaks or looseness. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

Fuel lines*:

Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for

leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten con-

nections or replace parts as necessary.

Spark plugs:

Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs

of the same type as originally equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake lines and cables:

Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for

chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leak-

ing. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts

immediately.

Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings:

Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts im-

mediately.

Exhaust system:

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and

hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and dam-

age. Tighten connections or replace parts as

necessary.

In-cabin microfilter:

Replace at specified intervals. When driving for

prolonged periods in dusty conditions, replace

the filter more frequently.

Propeller shaft(s):

Check for damage, looseness, and grease leak-

age.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots:

Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions, in-

spect more frequently.

Tire rotation:

Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles

(8,000 km) according to the instructions under

“Explanation of general maintenance items” in

this section. When rotating tires, check for dam-

age and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

Transmission fluid/oil, differential oil:

Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified

intervals.

If towing a trailer, using a camper or car-top

carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, re-

place the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect the

fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the

deterioration data is more than 210000, replace

the CVT fluid.

To help ensure smooth, safe and economical

driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance

schedules that may be used, depending upon the

conditions in which you usually drive. These

schedules contain both distance and time inter-

vals, up to 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the

odometer reading will indicate when service is

needed. However, if you drive very little, your

vehicle should be serviced at the regular time

intervals shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue mainte-

nance at the same mileage/time intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be performed on

vehicles that are driven under especially de-

manding conditions. Additional maintenance

items should be performed if you primarily oper-

ate your vehicle under the following conditions:

●Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

●Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures remain-

ing below freezing.

●Operating in hot weather in stop-an-go

“rush hour” traffic.

●Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for

long distances, such as police, taxi or door-

to-door delivery use.

●Driving in dusty conditions.

●Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

●Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a

car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

The following tables show the standard mainte-

nance schedule. Depending upon weather and

atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces,

individual driving habits and vehicle usage, addi-

tional or more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue main-

tenance at the same mileage/time interval.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Engine oil filter Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

STANDARD MAINTENANCE

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

Engine oil Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Engine oil filter Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Spark plugs See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if found

damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)

or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ration of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the

factory fill coolant.

(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 0.053 in (1.35 mm) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage.

(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such

maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months, whichever

comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brake lines & cables II I II I

Brake pads & rotors夝II I II I

Brake fluid夝RRR

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝III

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)夝II I II I

Exhaust system夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

Intelligent key battery RRRR

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors夝IIIII I

Brake fluid夝RR R

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I

Transfer fluid & differential gear oil See NOTE (2) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts夝II I

Tire rotation See NOTE (3)

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models)夝IIIII I

Exhaust system夝II I

In-cabin microfilter RRR R

Intelligent key battery RRR R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.

(1) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration at NISSAN

dealers every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect)

CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km).

(2) If towing a trailer, using a camper or a car-top, or driving on rough or muddy roads, change (not just inspect) oil at every 20,000 miles

(32,000 km) or 24 months.

(3) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving

conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

●Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

●Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles

(16 km) with outside temperatures remain-

ing below freezing.

●Operating in hot weather in stop-and-go

“rush hour” traffic.

●Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for

long distance, such as police, taxi or door-

to-door delivery use.

●Driving in dusty conditions.

●Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

●Towing a trailer, using a camper or using a

car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads & rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Propeller shaft & drive shaft boots (4WD models) Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or

12 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or

18 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or

24 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or

30 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or

36 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or

42 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or

48 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or

54 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or

60 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or

66 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or

72 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or

78 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or

84 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or

90 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or

96 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or

102 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or

108 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or

114 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or

120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or

126 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or

132 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or

138 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or

144 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities ......10-2

Fuel recommendation ..........................10-4

Engine oil and oil filter recommendations .........10-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations .............................10-7

Specifications....................................10-8

Engine .......................................10-8

Wheels and tires ..............................10-9

Dimensions and weights .......................10-9

When traveling or registering in another country.....10-10

Vehicle identification .............................10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ........10-10

Vehicle identification number (chassis

number) .....................................10-10

Engine serial number..........................10-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Emission control information label ..............10-11

Tire and loading information label...............10-12

Air conditioner specification label...............10-12

Installing front license plate .......................10-12

Vehicle loading information .......................10-13

Terms .......................................10-13

Vehicle load capacity .........................10-14

Securing the load.............................10-15

Loading tips .................................10-16

Measurement of weights ......................10-16

Towing a trailer ..................................10-17

Maximum load limits ..........................10-17

Towing load/specification......................10-20

Towing safety ................................10-21

Flat towing for 4–Wheel drive vehicle

(if so equipped) ..............................10-28

Flat towing for front wheel drive vehicle

(if so equipped) ..............................10-28

Uniform tire quality grading .......................10-29

Emission control system warranty .................10-30

Reporting safety defects .........................10-30

Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test ....10-31

Event Data Recorders (EDR)......................10-32

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . .10-32

The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric Measure US Measure Imperial

Measure

Fuel 74 L 19-1/2 gal 16-1/4 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel Recommendation” in this

section.

Engine oil*

Drain and refill

* For additional information,

refer to “Engine oil” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

With oil filter

change 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt • Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor oil that

matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional information, re-

fer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.

Without oil filter

change 4.5 L 4-3/4 qt 4 qt

Engine coolant

with reservoir 9.8 L 2-5/8 gal 2-1/8 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using

fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as

recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Differential gear oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super Semi-synthetic API

GL-5, Viscosity SAE 75W-90

• The use of differential gear oil other than the specified may cause

vehicle malfunctions and result in non-warranty vehicle repairs.

• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric Measure US Measure Imperial

Measure

Transfer fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid super GL-5 80W-90 or

equivalent conventional (non-synthetic) oil

• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Power steering fluid (PSF) — — —

• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.

• Use of power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF will

prevent the power steering system from operating properly.

• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Brake fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3

• Available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer

• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Windshield-washer fluid 5 L 1-3/8 gal 1-1/8 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-

freeze fluid or equivalent

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant

and oil recommendations” in this section.

• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system refrigerant

and oil recommendations” in this section.

• It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

●Do not use fuel that contains the octane

booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel

containing MMT may adversely affect

vehicle performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-

beled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets

the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-

bile manufacturers developed this specification

to improve emission control system and vehicle

performance. Ask your service station manager if

the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-

lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially

designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN

supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-

gests that you use reformulated gasoline when

available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-

genates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether

(MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising

their presence. NISSAN does not recommend

the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content

and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your

service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take

the following precautions as the usage of such

fuels may cause vehicle performance problems

and/or fuel system damage.

●The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

●If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should con-

tain no more than 10% oxygenate.

(MTBE may, however, be added up to

15%.)

10-4 Technical and consumer information

●E-15 fuel contains more than 10% oxy-

genate. E-15 fuel will adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle and should not be

used. Damage caused by such fuel is

not covered by the NISSAN New Ve-

hicle Limited Warranty.

●If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable amount

of appropriate cosolvents and corro-

sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-

lated with appropriate cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors, such methanol

blends may cause fuel system damage

and/or vehicle performance problems.

At this time, sufficient data is not avail-

able to ensure that all methanol blends

are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-

hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-

ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after

using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately

change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a

low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-

eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can

cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel

ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can

only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15

fuel. Do not use E-15 in your vehicle. U.S. gov-

ernment regulations require fuel ethanol dispens-

ing pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage for that

region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel

ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can

only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do

not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government

regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange

and black label with the common abbreviation or

the appropriate percentage for that region.

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tri-

carbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN

does not recommend the use of fuel containing

MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle per-

formance, including the emissions control sys-

tem. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to consult

your gasoline retailer for more details.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of any

aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-

tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit

removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.

Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel

system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can cause

persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark

knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-

vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you

detect a persistent heavy spark knock even

when using gasoline of the stated octane

rating, or if you hear steady spark knock

while holding a steady speed on level

roads, it is recommended that you have a

NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Fail-

ure to correct the condition is misuse of the

vehicle, for which NISSAN is not respon-

sible.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark

knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may

cause excessive fuel consumption or engine

damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-

countered, have your vehicle checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a

cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality

and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory

engine life and performance. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Recommended fluids/lubricants

and capacities” in this section. NISSAN recom-

mends the use of an energy conserving oil in

order to improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the American

Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-

tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-

cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-

tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which

do not have the specified quality label should not

be used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-

sary when the proper oil type is used and main-

tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been

previously used should not be used.

LTI2051

10-6 Technical and consumer information

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes

with temperature. Because of this, it is important

to select the engine oil viscosity based on the

temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-

ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil

viscosity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its

equivalent for the reason described in “Change

intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for your

engine are based on the use of the specified

quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters

that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding

recommended oil and filter change intervals

could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine

caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not

covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine

oil when it was built. You do not have to change

the oil before the first recommended change

interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend

upon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions may

require more frequent oil and filter changes:

●repeated short distance driving at cold out-

side temperatures

●driving in dusty conditions

●extensive idling

●towing a trailer

●stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the “Mainte-

nance and schedules” section of this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle must be charged with the refriger-

ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C

system oil Type S (DH-PS) or the exact

equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil may

cause severe damage to the air condition-

ing system and will require the replace-

ment of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone

layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the

earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-

tions require the recovery and recycling of any

refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-

tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained

technicians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-

ant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

when servicing your air conditioner system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

ENGINE

Model VQ35DD

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.780 x 3.189 (96 x 81)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

CVT in N (Neutral) position

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug FXE22HR-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels Offset in (mm) Size

Alloy 1.97 (50) 18 x 7.5J

1.97 (50) 20 x 7.5J

Tires Size

All Season 235/65R18

235/55R20

Spare tire Wheel size Tire size

Temporary spare - steel 18 x 4T T165/90D18

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 198.5 (5,042)

Overall width in (mm) 77.2 (1,960)

Overall height

without roof rack in (mm) 69.6 (1,767.5)

with roof rack in (mm) 70.2 (1,783.4)

Front and Rear Track in (mm) 65.7 (1,670)

Wheelbase in (mm) 114.2 (2,900)

Gross vehicle weight rating lb (kg) Refer to the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. certification label” on

the center pillar between the

driver’s side front and rear

doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first find

out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-

cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low

may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles

must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-

fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where

appropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of your

vehicle to another country, state, province

or district, it may be necessary to modify the

vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-

sion control and safety standards vary according

to the country, state, province or district; there-

fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district and

registered, its modifications, transporta-

tion and registration are the responsibility

of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for

any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The VIN plate is located as shown. This number is

the identification for your vehicle and is used in

the vehicle registration.

The VIN number is also available through the

center display screen. For additional information,

refer to your “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual”.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is located as

shown.

TI1050M LTI2028

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety

Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-

bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-

able vehicle information, such as: (GVWR),

(GAWR), month and year of manufacture, (VIN),

etc. Review it carefully.

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is at-

tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

LTI2255 WTI0099 LTI2256

Technical and consumer information 10-11

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and

Loading Information label. The label is located as

shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is affixed to

the underside of the hood as shown.

To mount the front license plate, attach the li-

cense plate bracket to the bumper fascia at the

location marks (small dimples) using the two

provided screws 䊊

LTI2251 WTI0173 LTI2241

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE

10-12 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

●It is extremely dangerous to ride

in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In

a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seri-

ously injured or killed.

●Do not allow people to ride in any

area of your vehicle that is not

equipped with seats and seat

belts.

●Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself with

the following terms before loading your

vehicle:

●Curb Weight (actual weight of your

vehicle) - vehicle weight including:

standard and optional equipment, flu-

ids, emergency tools, and spare tire

assembly. This weight does not in-

clude passengers and cargo.

●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight of

passengers and cargo.

●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other optional

equipment. This information is lo-

cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

●GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit specified

for the front or rear axle. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total weight

rating of the vehicle, passengers,

cargo, and trailer.

●Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,

Total load capacity - maximum total

weight limit specified of the load

(passengers and cargo) for the ve-

hicle. This is the maximum combined

weight of occupants and cargo that

can be loaded into the vehicle. If the

vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load. This

information is located on the Tire and

Loading Information label.

●Cargo capacity - permissible weight

of cargo, the subtracted weight of

occupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-13

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-

hicle shown as “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo” on the Tire and

Loading Information label. Do not exceed

the number of occupants shown as

“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-

ing Information label.

To get “the combined weight of occu-

pants and cargo”, add the weight of all

occupants, then add the total luggage

weight. Examples are shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

Example

LTI0152

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct load

limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX

kg” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX lbs

or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-

able amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if the

XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb. passengers

in your vehicle, the amount of avail-

able cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150)

= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on

the vehicle. That weight may not

safely exceed the available cargo and

luggage load capacity calculated in

step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be trans-

ferred to your vehicle. Consult this

manual to determine how this re-

duces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm

that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “Mea-

surement of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-

sures. For additional information, refer to

the “Tire and loading information label” in

this section.

SECURING THE LOAD

There are luggage hooks located in the cargo

area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure

cargo with ropes or other types of straps.

Do not apply a total load of more than

6.5 lbs. (29 N) to a single metal floor hook

when securing cargo.

Cargo area luggage hooks

LIC2208

Technical and consumer information 10-15

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding or

shifting. Do not place cargo higher than

the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, unsecured cargo could cause

personal injury.

●The child restraint top tether strap may

be damaged by contact with items in

the cargo area. Secure any items in the

cargo area. Your child could be seri-

ously injured or killed in a collision if

the top tether strap is damaged.

●Do not load your vehicle any heavier

than the GVWR or the maximum front

and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage could

occur, or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result in loss

of control and cause personal injury.

LOADING TIPS

●The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

●Do not load the front and rear axle to

the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the

GVWR.

WARNING

●Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent it

from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the seat-

backs. In a sudden stop or colli-

sion, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

●Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear GAWRs.

If you do, parts of your vehicle can

break, tire damage could occur,

or it can change the way your

vehicle handles. This could result

in loss of control and cause per-

sonal injury.

●Overloading not only can shorten

the life of your vehicle and the

tire, but can also cause unsafe

vehicle handling and longer brak-

ing distances. This may cause a

premature tire failure which

could result in a serious accident

and personal injury. Failures

caused by overloading are not

covered by the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weight

shifts that could affect the balance of your

vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive

to a scale and weigh the front and the rear

wheels separately to determine axle

loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-

ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads

should not exceed the gross vehicle

weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are

given on the vehicle certification label. If

weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-

move items to bring all weights below the

ratings.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of a

trailer and its cargo can adversely affect

vehicle handling, braking and perfor-

mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load

for the first 500 miles (805 km). Your

engine, axle or other parts could be

damaged.

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you

tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph

(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full

throttle. This helps the engine and other

parts of your vehicle wear in at the

heavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-

marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember

that towing a trailer places additional loads on

your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-

ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available

on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This

guide includes information on trailer towing ca-

pability and the special equipment required for

proper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS

Maximum trailer loads

Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the

value specified in the following Towing

Load/Specification Chart found in this section.

The total trailer load equals trailer weight plus its

cargo weight.

●When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used.

The maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating

(GCWR) should not exceed the value specified

in the following Towing Load/Specification Chart.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of the

towing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)

plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greater

than these or using improper towing equipment

could adversely affect vehicle handling, braking

and performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not

only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also

the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-

priate for level highway driving may have to be

reduced for low traction situations (for example,

on slippery boat ramps).

Temperature conditions can also affect towing.

For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside

LTI2041

TOWING A TRAILER

Technical and consumer information 10-17

temperatures on graded roads can affect engine

performance and cause overheating. The engine

protection mode, which helps reduce the chance

of engine damage, could activate and automati-

cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may

decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully

to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather

and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced engine

power and vehicle speed. The reduced

speed may be lower than other traffic,

which could increase the chance of a col-

lision. Be especially careful when driving.

If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-

ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a

safe area. Allow the engine to cool and

return to normal operation. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle over-

heats” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from improper

towing procedures is not covered by

NISSAN warranties.

Tongue load

When using a weight carrying or a weight distrib-

uting hitch, keep the tongue load between 10 -

15% of the total trailer load or use the trailer

tongue load specified by the trailer manufacturer.

The tongue load must be within the maximum

tongue load limits shown in the following “Towing

Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-

comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for

proper tongue load.

Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight

(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight

(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label. The GVW equals the combined weight of

the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,

hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional

equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must

not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label.

WTI0160 LTI2042

10-18 Technical and consumer information

Towing capacities are calculated assuming a

base vehicle with driver and any options required

to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,

cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the

trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and

reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity

and trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to

confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front

GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight

Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured

using platform type scales commonly found at

truck stops, highway weigh stations, building

supply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity for

tongue/king pin load, use the following proce-

dure.

1. Locate the GVWR on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of

the passengers and cargo that are normally

in the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum tongue/king pin load.

To determine the available towing capacity, use

the following procedure.

1. Find the GCWR for your vehicle on the

⬙Towing Load/Specification⬙chart found in

this section.

2. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the

GCWR. The remaining amount is the avail-

able maximum towing capacity.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh

your trailer on a scale with all equipment and

cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is

towed. Make sure the Gross trailer weight is not

more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown

on the trailer and is not more than the calculated

available maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to

make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear

Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front

Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight

on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to

be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-

ings.

Example:

●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed

on a scale - including passengers, cargo and

hitch - 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg).

●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -

7,250 lb. (3,289 kg).

●Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)

from “Towing Load/Specification⬙chart -

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg).

●Maximum Trailer towing capacity from “Tow-

ing Load/Specification⬙chart - 9,100 lb.

(4,128 kg).

7,250 lb. (3,289 kg) GVWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 900 lb. (409 kg) Available for tongue

weight

15,100 lb. (6,849 kg) GCWR

– 6,350 lb. (2,880 kg) GVW

= 9,123 lb. (4,138 kg) Capacity available for

towing

900 lb. (409 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 8,750 lb. (3,969 kg) Available capacity

= 10% tongue weight

Technical and consumer information 10-19

The available towing capacity may be less than

the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-

ger and cargo load in the vehicle.

Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-

tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the

trailer tongue load specification recommended

by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load

becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-

tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the

maximum tongue weight specification shown in

the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the

calculated available tongue weight is greater

than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less

than 10%, reduce the total trailer weight to match

the available tongue weight.

Always verify that available capacities are within

the required ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION CHART

U.S. and Canada

Maximum Towing Capacity*1 6,000 lb. (2,721 kg)

Maximum Tongue Load 600 lb. (272 kg)

Maximum Gross Combined Weight Rating 10,000 lb. (4,536 kg)

*1: The towing capacity values are calculated assuming a base vehicle with driver and any options required to achieve

the rating. Additional passengers, cargo and/or optional equipment will add weight to the vehicle and reduce your vehi-

cle’s maximum towing capacity.

10-20 Technical and consumer information

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional

trailer tow package. The trailer tow package in-

cludes a receiver-type frame mounted hitch. This

hitch is rated for the maximum towing capacity of

this vehicle when the proper towing equipment is

used. Choose a proper ball mount and hitch ball

that is rated for the trailer to be towed. Genuine

NISSAN ball mounts and hitch balls are available

from a NISSAN dealer.

If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional

trailer tow package, check the towing capacity of

your bumper hitch or receiver-type frame

mounted hitch. Choose a proper hitch for your

vehicle and trailer. A Genuine NISSAN trailer

hitch is available from a NISSAN dealer. Make

sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to the

vehicle to help avoid personal injury or property

damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,

rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

WARNING

Trailer hitch components have specific

weight ratings. Your vehicle may be capable

of towing a trailer heavier than the weight

rating of the hitch components. Never ex-

ceed the weight rating of the hitch compo-

nents. Doing so can cause serious personal

injury or property damage.

Hitch ball

Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight

rating for your trailer:

●The required hitch ball size is stamped on

most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also

have the size printed on the top of the ball.

●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on

the trailer weight.

●The diameter of the threaded shank of the

hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount

hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should

be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole

in the ball mount.

●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be

long enough to be properly secured to the

ball mount. There should be at least 2

threads showing beyond the lock washer

and nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and

the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.

Choose a proper class ball mount based on the

trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should

be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the

ground.

Weight carrying hitches

A weight carrying or “dead weight” ball mount is

one that is designed to carry the whole amount of

tongue weight and gross weight directly on the

ball mount and on the receiver.

Weight distribution hitch

This type of hitch is also called a “load-leveling”or

“equalizing” hitch. A set of bars attach to the ball

mount and to the trailer to distribute the tongue

weight (hitch weight) of your trailer. Many ve-

hicles can’t carry the full tongue weight of a given

trailer, and need some of the tongue weight

transferred through the frame and pushing down

on the front wheels. This gives stability to the tow

vehicle.

Technical and consumer information 10-21

A weight-distributing hitch system (Class IV) is

recommended if you plan to tow trailers with a

maximum weight over 5,000 lbs (2,268 kg).

Check with the trailer and towing equipment

manufacturers to determine if they recommend

the use of a weight-distributing hitch system.

NOTE:

A weight-distributing hitch system may af-

fect the operation of trailer surge brakes. If

you are considering use of a weight-

distributing hitch system with a surge

brake-equipped trailer, check with the

surge brake, hitch or trailer manufacturer

to determine if and how this can be done.

Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-

turer for installing and using the weight-

distributing hitch system.

General set-up instructions are as follows:

1. Park unloaded vehicle on a level surface.

With the ignition on and the doors closed,

allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes

so that it can level.

2. Measure the height of a reference point on

the front and rear bumpers at the center of

the vehicle.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust

the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper

height is within0-.5inches (0 – 13 mm) of

the reference height measured in step 2. The

rear bumper should be no higher than the

reference height measured in step 2.

WARNING

Properly adjust the weight distributing

hitch so the rear of the bumper is no

higher than the measured reference

height when the trailer is attached. If the

rear bumper is higher than the measured

reference height when loaded, the vehicle

may handle unpredictably which could

cause a loss of vehicle control and cause

serious personal injury or property

damage.

Sway control device

Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting

caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-

dling. Sway control devices may be used to help

control these affects. If you choose to use one,

contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make

sure the sway control device will work with the

vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-

tem. Follow the instructions provided by the

manufacturer for installing and using the sway

control device.

Class I hitch

Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (907 kg).

Class II hitch

Class II trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 3,500 lb (1,587 kg).

Class III hitch

Class III trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball

mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers

of a maximum weight of 5,000 lb (2,268 kg).

Tire pressures

●When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended cold

tire pressure indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating

and proper inflation pressure should

be in accordance with the trailer and

tire manufacturer’s specifications.

10-22 Technical and consumer information

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between your

vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should

be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,

not to the vehicle bumper or axle. The safety

chains can be attached to the bumper if the hitch

ball is mounted to the bumper. Be sure to leave

enough slack in the chains to permit turning

corners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electrical

system, a commercially available power-

type module/converter must be used to

provide power for all trailer lighting. This

unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct

power source for all trailer lights while

using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and

turn signal circuits as a signal source. The

module/converter must draw no more that

15 milliamps from the stop and tail lamp

circuits. Using a module/converter that

exceeds these power requirements may

damage the vehicle’s electrical system.

See a reputable trailer retailer to obtain

the proper equipment and to have it

installed.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or

local regulations. For assistance in hooking up

trailer lights, it is recommended that you contact a

NISSAN dealer or reputable trailer retailer. Ve-

hicles equipped with the optional trailer tow

package are equipped with a 7-pin trailer har-

ness connector. If your trailer is equipped with a

flat 4-pin connector, an adapter will be needed to

connect the trailer lights to the vehicle. Adapters

are available at auto parts stores and hitch retail-

ers.

Trailer brakes

When towing a trailer load of 3,500 lbs.

(1,587 kg) or more, trailers with a brake

system MUST be used. However, most states

require a separate braking system on trailers with

a loaded weight above a specific amount. Make

sure the trailer meets the local regulations and

the regulations where you plan to tow.

Several types of braking systems are available.

Surge Brakes - The surge brake actuator is

mounted on the trailer tongue with a hydraulic line

running to each trailer wheel. Surge brakes are

activated by the trailer pushing against the hitch

ball when the tow vehicle is braking. Hydraulic

surge brakes are common on rental trailers and

some boat trailers. In this type of system, there is

no hydraulic or electric connection for brake op-

eration between the tow vehicle and the trailer.

Electric Trailer Brakes - Electric braking sys-

tems are activated by an electronic signal sent

from a trailer brake controller (special brake-

sensing module). For additional information, refer

to “Electric trailer brake controller” in this section.

Have a professional supplier of towing equip-

ment make sure the trailer brakes are properly

installed and demonstrate proper brake function

testing.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-

rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Technical and consumer information 10-23

Electric trailer brake controller

Trailers equipped with electric brakes may re-

quire the installation of an aftermarket trailer

brake controller.

Your vehicle is equipped with a connector and

jumper harness that is specifically designed to be

used when installing an aftermarket brake con-

troller.

To install the electric trailer brake controller

jumper harness, perform the following proce-

dure:

1. Open the driver door. Move the seat to the

rearmost position.

Jumper Harness

LTI0117

Connector Location

LTI2045

10-24 Technical and consumer information

2. Locate the jumper harness connector under

the lower portion of the instrument panel.

The connector is taped to the wiring harness

䊊

1as indicated.

●The connector is marked with a white tag

with “elec brake conn”.

Wire color designation for electric trailer brake

controller jumper harness.

WIRE COLOR NOTE

RED/GREEN Vehicle stop lamp switch

to trailer brake controller.

BLACK Brake controller ground

(-).

BROWN/WHITE Trailer brake controller

switched output.

RED/BLUE Not used

RED Fused trailer brake con-

troller battery feed (B+).

3. Peel off the tape and connect the jumper

harness to the connector.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Install the aftermarket electric trailer brake

controller according to the manufacturer’s

instructions.

Pre-towing tips

●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level

position when a loaded and/or unloaded

trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it

has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down

condition; check for improper tongue load,

overload, worn suspension or other possible

causes of either condition.

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in

the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity

low.

●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the

trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in

the back half. Also make sure the load is

balanced side to side.

●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-

hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and

trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a

trailer to the vehicle.

●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to

all federal, state or local regulations. If not,

install any mirrors required for towing before

driving the vehicle.

●Determine the overall height of the vehicle

and trailer so the required clearance is

known.

Trailer towing tips

In order to gain skill and an understanding of the

vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,

stopping and backing up in an area which is free

from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-

mance will be somewhat different than under

normal driving conditions.

Connector

LTI2046

Technical and consumer information 10-25

●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent

load shift while driving.

●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or

lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-

tently becoming unlatched.

●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate

speed.

●When backing up, hold the bottom of the

steering wheel with one hand. Move your

hand in the direction in which you want the

trailer to go. Make small corrections and

back up slowly. If possible, have someone

guide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle and

trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not

recommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position before blocking the wheels and

applying the parking brake, transmission

damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill

side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly

release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-

sorb the vehicle load.

4. Apply the parking brake.

5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are

clear from the blocks.

6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

●While going downhill, the weight of the

trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may de-

crease overall stability. Therefore, to main-

tain adequate control, reduce your speed

and shift to a lower gear. Avoid long or

repeated use of the brakes when descend-

ing a hill, as this reduces their effectiveness

and could cause overheating. Shifting to a

lower gear instead provides “engine brak-

ing” and reduces the need to brake as fre-

quently.

●If the engine coolant temperature rises to a

high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this owner’s manual.

●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal

circumstances.

●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first

500 miles (805 km).

●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do

tow, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h).

●Have your vehicle serviced more often than

at intervals specified in the recommended

Maintenance Schedule in the “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual.

10-26 Technical and consumer information

●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will

be closer to the inside of the turn than your

vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,

make a larger than normal turning radius

during the turn.

●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely

affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-

ing vehicle sway. When being passed by

larger vehicles, be prepared for possible

changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-

hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to

allow the vehicle to coast and steer as

straight ahead as the road conditions allow.

This combination will help stabilize the ve-

hicle.

– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or

applying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the

brakes and pull to the side of the road in a

safe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-

anced as described earlier in this section.

●Be careful when passing other vehicles.

Passing while towing a trailer requires con-

siderably more distance than normal pass-

ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must

also pass the other vehicle before you can

safely change lanes.

●Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-

mission to a lower gear for engine braking

when driving down steep or long hills. This

will help slow the vehicle without applying

the brakes.

●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the

brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced

braking efficiency.

●Increase your following distance to allow for

greater stopping distances while towing a

trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.

●NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-

trol not be used while towing a trailer.

●Some states or provinces have specific

regulations and speed limits for vehicles that

are towing trailers. Obey the local speed

limits.

●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-

nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after

50 miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-

ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or

rear bumper.

●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights

before backing the trailer into the water or

the trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer to

the “Do-it-yourself” section in this manual.

Tow mode

Using tow mode is recommended when pulling a

heavy trailer or hauling a heavy load. Press the

TOW MODE switch to activate tow mode. The

indicator light on the TOW MODE switch illumi-

nates when tow mode is selected. Press the

TOW MODE switch again to turn tow mode off.

Tow mode is automatically canceled when the

ignition switch is turned off.

Tow mode includes the following features:

●Grade logic — Adjusts transmission shifts

when pulling a trailer or hauling a load up a

grade.

Technical and consumer information 10-27

●Downhill Speed Control (DSC) — automati-

cally downshifts when driving down a grade

with a trailer or heavy load to help control

vehicle speed.

Driving the vehicle in the tow mode with no

trailer/load or light trailer/light load will not cause

any damage. However, fuel economy may be

reduced and the transmission/engine driving

characteristics may feel unusual.

When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil

should be replaced and transmission

oil/fluid should be changed more fre-

quently. For additional information, refer to

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR 4–WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Never flat tow your 4-wheel drive (4WD)

vehicle.

●DO NOT tow your 4-wheel drive (4WD)

vehicle with any wheels on the ground.

Doing so may cause serious and expen-

sive damage to the powertrain.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

FLAT TOWING FOR FRONT WHEEL

DRIVE VEHICLE (if so equipped)

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the

ground is sometimes called flat towing. This

method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle

behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor

home.

CAUTION

●Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

●Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle

with the front tires on the ground. Doing

so may cause serious and expensive

damage to the powertrain.

●DO NOT tow your front wheel drive con-

tinuously variable transmission vehicle

with all four wheels on the ground (flat

towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE inter-

nal transmission parts due to lack of

transmission lubrication.

●For emergency towing procedures refer

to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”

in the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

Continuously Variable Transmission

To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously

variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle

dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s

drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-

turer’s recommendations when using their prod-

uct.

10-28 Technical and consumer information

DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality

Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to

federal safety requirements in addition to these

grades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable on

the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and

maximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested

under controlled conditions on a specified gov-

ernment test course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times

as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use, however,

and may depart significantly from the norm due to

variations in driving habits, service practices and

differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the

tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-

sured under controlled conditions on specified

government test surfaces of asphalt and con-

crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction

performance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire is

based on straight-ahead braking traction

tests, and does not include acceleration,

cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the

generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled conditions on a

specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained

high temperature can cause the material of the

tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-

sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.

The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-

mance which all passenger car tires must meet

under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.

109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel than

the minimum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-

tablished for a tire that is properly inflated

and not overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-

ther separately or in combination, can

cause heat build-up and possible tire

failure.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 10-29

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following

emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with other

vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information

Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.

If you did not receive a Warranty Information

Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-

ment by writing to:

●Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-

tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it

may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy

campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-

come involved in individual problems be-

tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-

hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-

327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go

to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh

Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information

about motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting our

Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at

1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-

fect which could cause a crash or could

cause injury or death, you should immedi-

ately inform Transport Canada in addition

to notifying NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it finds

that a safety defect exists in a group of

vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-

duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-

port Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your

dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s De-

fect Investigations and Recalls Division toll

free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also

report safety defects online at:

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7

/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=eng

(English speakers) or

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

10-30 Technical and consumer information

https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7

/PCDB-BDPP/fc-cp.aspx?lang=fra

(French speakers)

Additional information concerning motor

vehicle safety may be obtained from Trans-

port Canada’s Road Safety Information

Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at

www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speak-

ers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns

please contact our Consumer Information

Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.

WARNING

A vehicle equipped with Four-Wheel Drive

(4WD) should never be tested using a two

wheel dynamometer (such as the dyna-

mometers used by some states for emis-

sions testing), or similar equipment. Make

sure you inform the test facility personnel

that your vehicle is equipped with 4WD

before it is placed on a dynamometer.

Using the wrong test equipment may re-

sult in transmission damage or unex-

pected vehicle movement which could re-

sult in serious vehicle damage or personal

injury.

Due to legal requirements in some states and

Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-

quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-

tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of

the emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it

is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,

the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary

usage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired or

the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be

reset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking the

I/M test, check the vehicle’s

inspection/maintenance test readiness condi-

tion. Place the ignition switch in the ON position

without starting the engine. If the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 sec-

onds and then blinks for 10 seconds, the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not blink

after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is

“ready”. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer to set the “ready condition” or to

prepare the vehicle for testing.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST

Technical and consumer information 10-31

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-

corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-

ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR

is designed to record data related to vehicle

dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

●How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

●Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

●How fast the vehicle was traveling.

●Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better understand-

ing of the circumstances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by

your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under

normal driving conditions and no personal data

(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are

recorded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data with

the type of personally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

ment is required and access to the vehicle or the

EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-

facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have ac-

cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only

be accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-

mitted by law.

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model

year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine

NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of

service and repair information for your vehicle.

This manual is the same one used by the factory-

trained technicians working at NISSAN dealer-

ships. Genuine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can

also be purchased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Ser-

vice Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this model

year and prior, please contact your nearest

NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and loca-

tion of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the

NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122

and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist

you.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR) OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

10-32 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

2nd row bench seat adjustment ......1-7,1-9

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system).....................1-49

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air bag

system)...................1-56

Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-66

Air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . .1-67, 2-15

Air bag warning light, supplemental . .1-67, 2-15

Aircleaner....................8-15

Air cleaner housing filter ............8-15

Air conditioner

Air conditioner specification label . . . .10-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations ............10-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations..............10-7

Heater and air conditioner controls ....4-48

Servicing air conditioner ..........4-53

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system) .........2-30

Anchor point locations .............1-32

Antenna .....................4-69

Antifreeze ....................5-74

Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-11

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-68

Apps ......................4-130

APPS button ...................4-6

Armrests.....................1-10

Around View® Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27

Audible reminders ...............2-17

Audio system ..................4-53

AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55

Bluetooth® streaming audio ........4-62

Compact disc (CD) player .........4-75

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player

Operation ..................4-85

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-67

FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-54

iPod® Player .............4-59,4-79

iPod® player operation .......4-59,4-79

Radio ....................4-53

Steering wheel audio control

switch.................4-8,4-68

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port..................4-59,4-77

Autolight switch.................2-37

Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . .3-37, 3-39

Automatic power window switch .....2-59

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .......3-35

Automatic door locks ..............3-6

Automatic drive positioner .......3-37,3-39

AUXjack ....................4-87

Backbutton....................4-6

Battery ..................5-74,8-11

Charge warning light ............2-12

Battery replacement ..............8-20

Keyfob ...................8-20

NISSAN Intelligent Key®..........8-21

Before starting the engine ...........5-14

Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-13

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ..........5-20

Block heater

Engine ....................5-75

Boosterseats..................1-46

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-68

Brake fluid ..................8-10

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . . .8-23

Brake system ................5-67

Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11

Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-17, 8-17

Parking brake operation ..........5-19

Self-adjusting brakes ............8-17

Brake assist ...................5-69

Brake fluid ....................8-10

Brakes ......................8-17

Brake system ..................

5-67

Break-inschedule ...............5-60

Brightness/contrast button ...........4-6

Brightness control

Instrument panel ..............2-39

Bulb check/instrument panel..........2-10

Bulbreplacement................8-23

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ..................10-2

Cargo area storage bin . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56

Cargolight....................2-64

Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .10-13

Car phone or CB radio.............4-113

CD care and cleaning .............4-112

CD player (See audio system) .........4-75

Check tire pressure ...............2-28

Child restraints . . . . . . .1-25, 1-26, 1-27, 1-29

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) System ..............1-29

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-27, 1-34, 1-40, 1-46

Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-32

Child restraint with top tether strap.......1-32

Child safety rear door lock ............3-7

Chimes, audible reminders ...........2-17

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Clock set/adjustment ..............4-16

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Cold weather driving...............5-74

Compact disc (CD) player ...........4-75

Compass......................2-7

Consolebox...................2-52

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-15

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid.......................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-15

Control panel buttons ...............4-5

Backbutton..................4-6

Brightness/contrast button ..........4-6

Clockset...................4-16

Enterbutton..................4-7

Setting button .................4-6

Controls

Audio controls ................4-67

Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . .4-8, 4-68

Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-48

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . .8-5

Checking engine coolant level ........8-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5

Corrosion protection ...............7-7

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . .5-38, 5-38, 5-39

Cupholders...................2-54

Daytime Running Light System .........2-38

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.....................2-35

Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player .......4-85

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-39

Display controls

(see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . .4-6, 4-9

Doors........................3-5

Drive belt .....................8-13

Drive positioner, Automatic........3-37,3-39

Driving

Cold weather driving.............5-74

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-15

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2

Driving the vehicle ................5-15

Dual panel moonroof ..............2-60

Dual power moonroof ..............2-60

Economy-fuel..................5-62

Emergency engine shutoff .........5-12,6-2

Emission control information label ......10-11

Emission control system warranty.......10-30

Engine

Before starting the engine..........

-14

Blockheater.................5-75

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Changing engine coolant ...........8-5

Changingengineoil..............8-7

Changing engine oil filter ...........8-8

Checking engine coolant level ........8-5

Checking engine oil level ...........8-6

Engine compartment check locations ....8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5

Engine cooling system ............8-4

Engineoil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-6

Engine oil viscosity..............10-7

Engine serial number............10-11

Engine specifications ............10-8

Starting the engine .............5-14

Engine coolant temperature gauge .......2-5

Enter button ....................4-7

Event Data recorders .............10-32

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-2

Explanation of maintenance items ........9-2

11-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . .9-5

Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-50

Eyeglass case ..................2-53

Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . .6-2

Flat tire .......................6-3

Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5

Fluid

Brake fluid ..................8-10

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid.......................8-9

Engine coolant.................8-4

Engine oil ...................8-6

Power steering fluid ..............8-9

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . .8-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........10-11

Foglightswitch.................2-40

Forward Emergency Braking (FEB) . . .2-12, 5-54

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system) ......1-56

Front power seat adjustment ...........1-5

Frontseats.....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Fuel economy ................5-62

Fuel-filler door and cap ...........3-30

Fuel gauge ...................2-6

Fuel octane rating ..............10-5

Fuel recommendation ............10-4

Loose fuel cap warning ...........2-28

Fuel Cell Vehicle (FCV) System

Tirepressure.................8-25

Fuel efficient driving tips.............5-61

Fuel-filler door ..................3-29

Fuelgauge.....................2-6

Fuses.......................8-18

Fusiblelinks...................8-19

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver .............2-65,2-67,2-68

Gascap .....................3-30

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5

Fuel gauge ...................2-6

Odometer ...................2-4

Speedometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................2-5

Trip odometer .................2-4

General maintenance ...............9-2

Glovebox.....................2-52

Gloveboxlock..................2-52

Hazard warning flasher switch ..........6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch ........2-36

Headlight control switch ............2-36

Headlights ....................8-22

Headphones (See NISSAN mobile entertainment

system) .....................4-100

Head restraints..................1-12

Heated rear seats ................2-42

Heated seats ...................2-40

Heated seat switches ..............2-41

Heated steering wheel switch .........2-44

Heater

Heater and air conditioner controls.....4-48

Heater operation ...............4-49

Hill descent control switch ...........2-45

Hill descent control system ...........5-72

Hill start assist system..............5-73

HomeLink® Universal

ansceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65, 2-67, 2-68

Hood.......................3-21

Hook

Luggage hook ................2-56

Horn .......................2-40

Ignition Switch

Push-Button Ignition Switch ........5-10

Immobilizer system ............2-32,5-13

Important vehicle information label ......10-11

In-cabin microfilter ................8-15

Increasing fuel economy.............5-62

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders).................2-10,2-15

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror ........3-35

Instrument brightness control ..........2-39

Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-39

Intelligent 4WD .................5-62

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC).........5-40

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range..............3-9

11-3

Key operation ................3-10

Mechanicalkey................3-3

Remote keyless entry operation.......3-13

Troubleshooting guide............3-17

Warning signals ...............3-17

Interiorlight....................2-62

iPod®Player...............4-59,4-79

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-29

Jump starting ................6-9,8-13

Key.........................3-2

Key fob battery replacement ..........8-20

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system).........3-13

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ........3-2,3-7

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. .3-4

Labels

Air conditioner specification label .....10-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-11

Emission control information label . . . .10-11

Engine serial number............10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label ........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-10

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-66

Language setting ................4-17

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)

System ......................1-29

License plate

Installing the license plate .........10-12

Liftgate ......................3-22

Liftgate release..................3-28

Light

Air bag warning light .........1-67,2-15

Brake light (See stop light) .........8-23

Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-10

Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23

Charge warning light ............2-12

Exterior and Interior lights ..........8-23

Foglights...................8-22

Foglightswitch...............2-40

Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-36

Headlight control switch ..........2-36

Headlights..................8-22

Interiorlight..................2-62

Lightbulbs..................8-22

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-28

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-58

Security indicator light............2-16

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . .2-63

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-10,2-15

Lights.......................8-22

Maplights ..................2-63

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Gloveboxlock................2-52

Liftgate release................3-28

Power door locks ...............3-6

Loose fuel cap warning .............2-28

Low fuel warning light ..........2-14,2-28

Low tire pressure warning light .........2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-28

Luggage hook ..................2-56

Luggage rack (see roof rack) ..........2-57

Luggage (See vehicle loading information). .10-13

Maintenance

General maintenance .............9-2

Insidethevehicle...............9-3

Maintenance precautions ...........8-2

Outside the vehicle ..............

-2

Seat belt maintenance............1-24

Under the hood and vehicle .........9-4

Maintenancelog.................9-13

Maintenance requirements ............9-2

Maintenance schedules..............9-7

Maintenance under severe operation

conditions ....................9-12

Malfunction indicator light ............2-16

Manual front seat adjustment...........1-3

Maplights ....................2-63

Memory Seat ...............3-37,3-39

Meters and gauges ................2-3

Instrument brightness control ........2-39

11-4

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror......3-35

Outside mirrors ...............3-36

Rearview ...................3-34

Vanity mirror .................3-34

Mirrors ......................3-34

Mobileapps...................4-130

Mobile Entertainment System (MES) ......4-88

Moonroof......................7-4

Moving Object Detection (MOD) ........4-42

NissanConnect

...............4-130

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ..........3-2,3-7

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . .2-32, 5-13

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .10-5

Odometer .....................2-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants ................10-2

Changing engine oil ..............8-7

Changing engine oil filter ...........8-8

Checking engine oil level ...........8-6

Engine oil ...................8-6

Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .10-6

Engine oil viscosity..............10-7

Outside mirrors .................3-36

Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-11

Owner’s manual order form ..........10-32

Owner’s manual/service manual order

information ...................10-32

Parking

Parking brake operation ...........5-19

Parking/parking on hills ...........5-67

Parking brake...................5-19

Power

Front seat adjustment .............1-5

Power door locks ...............3-6

Power outlet..............2-48,2-49

Power rear windows .............2-59

Power steering fluid ..............8-9

Power steering system ...........5-67

Power windows ...............2-58

Rear power windows ............2-59

Power inverter switch ..............2-47

Power outlet................2-48,2-49

Power steering ..................5-67

Power steering fluid ................8-9

Precautions

Maintenance precautions ...........8-2

On-pavement and off-road driving

precautions ..................5-6

Precautions on booster

seats . . . . . . . . . . .1-27, 1-34, 1-40, 1-46

Precautions on child

restraints. . . . . . . . .1-27, 1-34, 1-40, 1-46

Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-17

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-49

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2

Push starting ...................6-11

Radio

Car phone or CB radio. . . . . . . . . . .4-113

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player .....................4-67

Steering wheel audio control switch .4-8, 4-68

Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M)

test .......................10-31

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ........5-30

Rear power windows ..............2-59

Rear sonar system ................5-73

Rearview mirror .................3-34

RearView Monitor ................4-20

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.......................2-35

Rear window wiper and washer switches . . .2-34

Recommended Fluids ..............10-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-32

Refrigerant recommendation ..........

10-7

Registering a vehicle in another country . . .10-10

Remote controller (See NISSAN mobile

entertainment system) ..............4-98

Remote Start ...............3-19,5-15

Reporting safety defects (US only) ......10-30

Roof rack .....................2-57

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-7

Child seat belts . . . . .1-27, 1-34, 1-40, 1-46

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-30

11-5

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ........1-3

Front power seat adjustment .........1-5

Second row bench seats ........1-7,1-9

Seatback pockets ................2-51

Seat belt

Childsafety..................1-25

Infants and small children . . . . . . . . . .1-26

Injured Person ................1-20

Largerchildren................1-26

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . .1-17

Pregnant women...............1-20

Seat belt extenders .............1-24

Seat belt maintenance............1-24

Seat belts ................1-17,7-6

Three-point type with retractor .......1-20

Seat belt extenders ...............1-24

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-20, 2-14

Seats

2nd row bench seat adjustment . . . .1-7, 1-9

Adjustment...................1-2

Armrests...................1-10

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . .3-37, 3-39

Frontseats...................1-2

Heatedseats.................2-40

Manual front seat adjustment.........1-3

Security indicator light..............2-16

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start ...........2-32,5-13

Security systems

Vehicle security system ...........2-30

Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-17

Service manual order form...........10-32

Servicing air conditioner.............4-53

Setting button ...................4-6

Smartphone connectivity ...........4-130

Sonar

Rear system .................5-73

Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14

Sparkplugs ...................8-14

Specifications ..................10-8

Speedometer ...................2-4

Speedometer and odometer ...........2-4

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . . .2-63

SRSwarninglabel................1-66

Standard maintenance ..............9-8

Starting

Before starting the engine..........5-14

Jump starting ..............6-9,8-13

Precautions when starting and driving ....5-2

Push starting .................6-11

Starting the engine .............5-14

Starting the engine ...............5-14

Steering

Power steering fluid ..............8-9

Power steering system ...........5-67

Steeringwheel..................3-32

Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-8, 4-68

Stoplight.....................8-23

Storage......................2-51

Storagebin....................2-56

Storage tray ...................2-51

Sunglassescase.................2-53

Sunglassesholder................2-53

Sunroof.......................7-4

Sun visors ....................3-33

Supplemental air bag warning labels ......1-66

Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-67, 2-15

Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-56

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels .......1-66

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-49

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-49

Switch

Autolightswitch...............2-37

Automatic power window switch ......2-59

Fog light switch ...............2-40

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . .2-36

Headlight control switch ..........2-36

Hill descent control switch . . . . . . . . .2-45

Instrument brightness control ........2-39

Power door lock switch ............3-6

Power inverter switch ............2-47

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch.....................2-35

Rear window wiper and washer

switches ...................2-34

Steering wheel switch for audio

control/Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System ....................4-68

Tow mode switch ..............2-46

Turnsignalswitch..............2-39

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off

switch.....................2-44

Tachometer ....................2-5

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start ................2-32,5-13

Three-way catalyst ................5-2

11-6

Tire

Flat tire .....................6-3

Spare tire ................6-4,8-35

Tire and Loading Information label . . . .10-12

Tire chains ..................8-32

Tirepressure.................8-25

Tire rotation..................8-32

Tires of 4-wheel drive ............8-35

Types of tires .................8-31

Uniform tire quality grading ........10-29

Wheels and tires ...........8-25,10-9

Wheel/tire size ................10-9

Tirepressure...................8-25

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....5-3

Top tether strap child restraint .........1-32

Towing

4-wheel drive models ............6-13

Flattowing.................10-28

Towing load/specification .........10-20

Towtrucktowing...............6-12

Trailer towing ................10-17

Towing a trailer .................10-17

Tow mode switch ................2-46

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver . . . . . . . . . . .2-65, 2-67, 2-68

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid.......................8-9

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) .............5-15

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country) .....................10-10

Trip odometer ...................2-4

Turn signal switch ................2-39

Uniform tire quality grading ..........10-29

USB interface ...............4-59,4-77

Vanity mirror ...................3-34

Vehicle dimensions and weights ........10-9

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-44

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system ....5-69

Vehicle identification ..............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) ......10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number) ...............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . .10-10

Vehicle immobilizer system........2-32,5-13

Vehicle loading information ..........10-13

Vehicle recovery..............6-14,6-15

Vehicle security system .............2-30

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobi-

lizer System), engine start ........2-32,5-13

Vents.......................4-46

Visors.......................3-33

Voice Recognition System...........4-139

Warning

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-67, 2-15

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-11

Battery charge warning light ........2-12

Brake warning light .............2-11

Hazard warning flasher switch ........6-2

Loose fuel cap warning ...........2-28

Low fuel warning light ........2-14,2-28

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-28

Passenger air bag and status light .....1-58

Seat belt warning light ........1-20,2-14

Supplemental air bag warning light .1-67, 2-15

TPMS......................2-4

Vehicle security system ...........2-30

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-10,2-15

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-66

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders.................2-10,2-15

Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-15

Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10, 2-15

Warning lights.............2-10,2-15

Warning lights...............2-10,2-15

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders.....................2-10

Washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switches...................2-34

Weights (See dimensions and weights) ....10-9

Wheels and tires .............8-25,10-9

Wheel/tire size ..................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-10

Windows .....................2-58

Locking passengers’ windows .......2-58

Power rear windows .............2-59

Power windows ...............2-58

Rear power windows ............2-59

Windshield-washer fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

11-7

Wiper

Rear window wiper and washer

switches ...................2-34

Wiperblades.................8-16

Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

11-8

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane

rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-

ber (Research octane number 91).

CAUTION

●Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect the

warranty coverage.

●Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

●Do not use E-15 or E-85 fuel in your

vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to

run on E-15 or E-85 fuel. Using E-15 or

E-85 fuel in a vehicle not specifically

designed for E-15 or E-85 fuel can ad-

versely affect the emission control de-

vices and systems of the vehicle. Dam-

age caused by such fuel is not covered

by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

●Do not use fuel that contains the octane

booster methylcyclopentadienyl man-

ganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel

containing MMT may adversely affect

vehicle performance and vehicle emis-

sions. Not all fuel dispensers are la-

beled to indicate MMT content, so you

may have to consult your gasoline re-

tailer for more details. Note that Fed-

eral and California laws prohibit the use

of MMT in reformulated gasoline.

●U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-

fied by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbrevia-

tion or the appropriate percentage for

that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” section of

this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

• Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”

For additional information, refer to “Engine oil and

oil filter recommendations” in the “Technical and

consumer information” section of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

Refer to the Tire and loading information label.

The label is typically located on the driver side

center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional

information, refer to “Wheels and tires” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

2017 Nissan Pathfinder | Owner's Manual USA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation